diff options
31 files changed, 0 insertions, 11142 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 3e4c4ae3fa5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,539 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN 2up.doc -%% -%% Documentation for 2up.tex/2up.sty. -%% Run through LaTeX, with or without the NFSS. -%% -%% See below if you want to try out two-up printing. -%% -%% LaTeX version of this documentation courtesy of -%% H. David Todd <hdtodd@mockingbird.wesleyan.edu> -%% -%% -\documentstyle[12pt,twoside]{article} - -\def\FileDate{January 28, 1993} -\def\FileVersion{1.2} - -%% INSTRUCTIONS FOR TWO-UP PRINTING. -%% 1. Change \iffalse below to \iftrue. -%% 2. Uncomment \special{landscape} if using Rokicki's dvips, or otherwise -%% remember to print the document out in landscape mode. -%% 3. Uncomment one of the booklet options, if desired. -%% -\iffalse - \input 2up.tex - \targetlayout{twosided} - \TwoupWrites - % \special{landscape} %% This works with Rokicki's dvips - % \targetlayout{Booklet} %% Booklet printing with 2-sided printer/copier. - % \targetlayout{booklet} %% Booklet printing with 1-sided printer/copier. -\fi - -\makeatletter - -%% PAGE NUMBERING: -%% Adjust page numbering if using booklet layout option. -\setcounter{page}{0} -\def\next{\if@leftpage\else\stepcounter{page}\fi} -\@ifundefined{target@stop}{}{\next} - -%% CONTENTS: -\def\tableofcontents{% - \par\begin{center} - \large\bf Contents - \end{center} - \begin{quote}\@starttoc{toc}\end{quote}} - -%% PAGE PARAMETERS: -\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} % paragraph indent -\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} -\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt} -\setlength{\headheight}{12pt} % height of running head -\setlength{\headsep}{30pt} % distance between header and text -\setlength{\textheight}{8.2in} % height of text on page - -%% DATES, VERSIONS AND TITLES: -\def\@maketitle{% - \begin{center} - {\Large\bf \@title \par} - \vskip 1.2em {\lineskip .5em - \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par} - \vskip .8em {\@date}% - \end{center} - \par - \vskip .5em} - -%% Page Style: -\pagestyle{myheadings} -\markboth{Two-Up Style Guide}{Version \FileVersion, \FileDate} - -%% Special list: -\newcommand{\namelistlabel}[1]{\mbox{\bf #1}\hfil} -\newenvironment{namelist}[1]% - {\begin{list}{}% - {\let\makelabel\namelistlabel - \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1} - \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.1\labelwidth}}}% - {\end{list}} - -%% VERBATIM: -%% -\begingroup - \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12 - \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2 - \catcode`\+=0 \catcode`\\=12 - +gdef+|(\) % \| = character \ - +gdef+{({) % \{ = character { - +gdef+}(}) % \} = character } -+endgroup -\def\Backslash{\protect\|} -%% -%% Define some functional font commands: -%% -\def\MainFont{\tt} % For macro definitions. -\def\UsageFont{\tt} % For in-line macro names. -\def\InlineFont{\tt} % For other in-line snipets of code. -\def\MetaFont{\rm\it} % For meta arguments. -%% -%% Short-cuts for font commands: -%% -\def\s#1{\string#1} -\def\t#1{{\InlineFont\string#1}} % For other in-line code. -\def\m#1{{\MetaFont #1\/}} % For just putting things in italics -\def\M#1{{\InlineFont\{\m{#1}\}}} % Arg is in italic, enclosed in tt braces. -\let\N\t % For in-line macro names. -\catcode`\<=13 \def<#1>{\m{#1}} % <meta> -\catcode`\"=13\def"{\verb"} % Short verb -%% -%% This is for listing macro definitions in a quote-like environment. -%% -\begingroup - \catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 - \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12 - \gdef\@MD[% - \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12 - \def{##1}[\{[\MetaFont ##1]\}]] -\endgroup -\def\MD{% - \quote - \begingroup - \@MD - \def\end{\endgroup\end}% - \def\\{\@centercr\s}% - \MainFont - \s} -\def\endMD{\endquote} -%% - -%% End preamble. -\catcode`\@=12 - -\begin{document} - -\title{Documentation for 2up.tex:\\ - Two-up printing for Generic TeX} -\author{Timothy Van Zandt\thanks{The documentation was put into - \LaTeX\ format by David Todd.}\\ Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu} -\date{Version \FileVersion\\[3pt] \FileDate} - -\maketitle -\thispagestyle{empty} - - "2up.tex"/"2up.sty" allows one to print a document two-up, with -considerable flexibility as to paper size and layout. It produces a standard -dvi file, and does not involve an additional dvi or PostScript filter. It -should work with most \TeX\ macro packages. - - {\bf Usage:} Input "2up.tex", or include "2up" as a LaTeX style option. -There is a good chance you will get the desired layout. (But you will probably -need to generate new font bitmaps to get high quality output.) See the rest of -this documentation for detailed information on controlling 2up.tex. - -\begingroup -\def\baselinestretch{.8}\large\normalsize -\tableofcontents -\endgroup -\clearpage - -\section{Comparison with other methods} - -There are other tools for two-up printing: -\begin{description} -\item[PostScript filters] -These work well as long as you only use PostScript fonts (as opposed to the -usual Metafont fonts). Otherwise, the PostScript filter scales bitmapped -fonts, and the quality is lower than with "2up.tex". - -\item[Rokicki's dvidvi] -"dvidvi" is a versatil tool that does much more than -2up printing. However, if only rearranges the pages, and does not adjust the -magnification to ensure that the pages fit properly in a two-up format. It -also adds one more step to the \TeX-dvi-printer cycle. "2up.tex", on the other -hand, combines the changes to \TeX's magnification and page layout with the -rearranging of the pages, all with an easy-to-use interface and from within -your \TeX\ document. (See Section \ref{dvidvi} on using both "2up.tex" and -"dvidvi" together.) -\end{description} - -\section{A warning about fonts} - -Two-up printing generally involves reducing a document, and thus using fonts -sizes that are not typically found on your system. If you are using bitmapped -fonts (standard for \TeX\ users), and you do not have and cannot generate the -extra fonts bitmaps, you will find 2up.sty (and any other method of two-up -printing) to give very poor quality output. - -If you are using a program like Rokicki's "dvips" that can generate extra font -bitmaps as needed, you will find that it takes a long time to print your 2up -document the first few times, as "dvips" is busy making the extra fonts. This -problem will go away. Be thankful you have such an easy way to get extra font -bitmaps. - -\section{Usage} - -Input "2up.tex". \LaTeX\ users can include "2up" as a style option. - -Then set the target and source layout: -\begin{MD} - \source{mag}{width}{height}\\ - \target{mag}{width}{height} -\end{MD} - -\begin{itemize} -\item The ``source'' layout is the layout of your document -the way it is usually printed. The ``target'' layout is the layout when it -is printed two-up. - -\item <width> and <height> are the true width and height of the paper, -when looking at the output right-side-up. - -\item <mag> refers to the source and target magnification. It should be an -integer, equal to 1000 times the magnification factor. There are also some -magic magnification numbers: -\begin{description} -\item[$\setminus$magstep<n>] for a magnification of 1.2$^n$ (n=0,...,5), or - -\item[$\setminus$magstepminus<n>] for a magnification of 1.2$^{-n}$ -(n=0,...,5). -\end{description} -Using these magnification values will make best use of the available fonts on -your system. -\end{itemize} - -"2up.tex" takes each source page, and centers in half a target page. To get -the pages to fit, the magnification of the document typically has to be -reduced. If you find that the pages are too crowded, try reducing the target -magnification. If they are too lonely, try increasing the target -magnification. - -If you want to adjust the positioning of the scaled pages, try changing the -values of "\hoffset" or "\voffset" with "\advance" or \LaTeX's "\addtolength". - -Don't change the magnification of your document after using the "\target" -command, as you will override the settings made by 2up.tex. - -You can also specify some options: -\begin{MD} - \targetlayout{options} -\end{MD} -where <options> is a comma separated list with no spaces. Valid -options are: -\begin{namelist}{topbottomxxx} - -\item [topbottom] The two source pages are printed one on top of the other. -\item [twosided] Odd pages are always printed on the right or the bottom. -\item [booklet] Pages are printed like a booklet. See Section \ref{booklet}. -\item [Booklet] Like "booklet", but for two-sided printers/copiers. -\item [dvidvi] For arranging in two-up layout with "dvidvi". See Section -\ref{dvidvi}. - -\end{namelist} - -The only other changes you might want to make to your document are the -following: -\begin{itemize} -\item You have to see to it that the target output is printed with the -correct orientation (landscape or portrait). See the documentation for your -dvi driver for details. - -\item "2up.tex" will inserts a line between pages if you change the following -dimensions: -\begin{namelist}{pagesepwidthxxx} -\item [$\setminus$pagesepwidth] Thickness of line. (Default 0pt) -\item [$\setminus$pageseplength] Length of line. (Default 6.5in) -\item [$\setminus$pagesepoffset] Distance from bottom of page to bottom of -line, or (with "topbottom" layout) from side of page to beginning of line. -(Default 1in) -\end{namelist} - -\item You can, but do not need to, use the following commands: -\begin{namelist}{twoupemptypagexxx} - -\item [$\setminus$twoupemptypage] inserts a completely blank half page -in the target. - -\item [$\setminus$twoupclearpage] \LaTeX\ users: ejects a complete target -page. - -\item [$\setminus$twoupeject] Plain \TeX users: ejects a complete target -page. - -\end{namelist} -\end{itemize} - -\section{Defaults} - - The following commands set the parameters for some common sources and -targets. The definitions of these commands are also useful examples. - - For A4 paper, just replace "8.5in" and "11in" in the definitions below by -the width and height of A4 paper. - -\begin{description} - -\item [$\setminus$twouparticle] - -This is the default for \LaTeX. -\begin{namelist}{Sourcexx} - -\item [Source:] A portrait document on 8.5x11 inch paper with wide margins as -used in \LaTeX's article style, and without marginal notes. - -\item [Target:] A landscape document on the same size paper, with the source -pages printed side by side. - -\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt} -\begin{verbatim} -\target{\magstepminus1}{11in}{8.5in} -\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}} -\end{verbatim} -\end{namelist} - -If you use narrower side margins, or if you use marginal notes, then you -will need to use "\twoupplain" or \\ "\twouplegaltarget", defined below. - -\item [$\setminus$twoupplain] - -This is the default for non-\LaTeX. - -It is the same as "\twouparticle", but for source documents with narrower -margins. -\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx} - -\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt} -\begin{verbatim} -\target{\magstepminus2}{11in}{8.5in} -\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in} -\end{verbatim} -\end{namelist} - -\item [$\setminus$twouplegaltarget] - -\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx} -\item [Source:] A portrait document on 8.5x11 inch paper with just about any -margins and perhaps with marginal notes. - -\item [Target:] A landscape document on legal size paper (8.5x14 inches), -with the source pages printed side by side. - -\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt} -\begin{verbatim} -\target{\magstepminus1}{14in}{8.5in} -\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in} -\end{verbatim} -\end{namelist} - -\item [$\setminus$twouplandscape]\hspace{1pt} -\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx} - -\item [Source:] A landscape document on 8.5x11 inch paper with just about any -margins. - -\item [Target:] A portrait document on the same size paper, with the -source pages stacked vertically. - -\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt} -\begin{verbatim} -\target{\magstepminus2}{8.5in}{11in} -\source{\magstep0}{11in}{8.5in} -\targetlayout{topbottom} -\end{verbatim} -\end{namelist} - -\end{description} - - -\section{True Dimensions} - -\TeX\ lets you use `true' dimensions, as in -\begin{verbatim} - \topmargin 1truein - \setlength{\topmargin}{1truein} -\end{verbatim} -This sets the length to 1 inch -as it appears on the page, no matter what the magnification. - -Once you use `true' dimensions, it is impossible to change the -magnification of your document, and hence it is almost impossible -to use 2up.tex. You will get an error like: -\begin{verbatim} - ! Incompatible magnification (833); - the previous value will be retained (2000). -\end{verbatim}% - -The use of `true' dimensions might be hiding in macros or style files -you are using. For example, Plain \TeX's "\magnification" command uses -true dimensions; use "\mag" instead, and then set "\hsize" and -"\vsize" appropriately scaled. If you can't find the culprit `true' -dimension in your document or input files, try putting this on the -(very) first line of your document: -\begin{verbatim} - \mag 143 \voffset 1truein \mag 1000 -\end{verbatim} - -You will get the error listed above wherever true dimensions are used -(and in some other places as well). - - -\section{Page Cross-References} - - Page cross-references (e.g., in an index or table of contents) will not be -accurate with "2up.tex", because finished pages are not immediately shipped -out. This can also cause problems with some special \LaTeX\ styles that have -multiple ".aux" files (e.g., for each chapter). - - To get better, but not perfect, page cross-references, try putting the -command -\begin{verbatim} - \TwoupWrites -\end{verbatim} -at the beginning of your document, after inputting "2up.tex". This is good for -drafts, and may fix problems with \LaTeX\ styles that have multiple ".aux" -files. "\TwoupWrites" makes "\write" and "\read" "\immediate", if you know -what that means. It might cause problems of its own, but try it and see. - - To get accurate page cross-references: -\begin{enumerate} -\item Run the job without "2up.tex", until all cross-references -are properly resolved. Run any index utility at this point. - -\item Run the job ONE MORE TIME with "2up.tex"; it will use the -correct cross-references from the previous runs. (In \LaTeX\ documents, -it is useful at this point to include the "\nofiles" command, so that -the correct cross-references are preserved.) -\end{enumerate} - -\section{Booklets\label{booklet}} - -Here are some special considerations for making booklets: - -\begin{itemize} - -\item Use the "booklet" target layout if your printer or copier cannot print -two -sides directly. "2up.tex" prints out the ``tops'' of the pages, and then the -``bottoms'', so that you can copy or print on both sides by doing one side, -flipping the output over, and doing the other side. - -\item Use "Booklet" if your printer or copier can print directly on two sides. - -\item You must have enough memory and box registers to hold all the pages in -the document. A Big\TeX\ should be able to handle at least a 32-page booklet. - -\item Sometimes booklet printing is part of the design of a document, rather -than an afterthought. In this case, you should set up the margins for the -target half-page rather than using "2up.tex" to scale the document. For -example, if using \LaTeX, 8.5x11 inch paper, \LaTeX's twoside style option, -and headings, try the following page parameter changes: -\begin{verbatim} - \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.2in} - \setlength{\evensidemargin}{-0.5in} - \setlength{\textwidth}{4.2in} - \setlength{\textheight}{6.5in} - \setlength{\topmargin}{-.4in} -\end{verbatim} -If you do this, "2up.tex" isn't adjusting margins or scaling the -document. You coould therefore get by without "2up.tex" by using "dvidvi". -\end{itemize} - -\section{Using dvidvi\label{dvidvi}} - - With the "dvidvi" layout option, "2up.tex" takes care of adjusting the -margins, and you then use "dvidvi" to arrange the pages in a two-up -format. The advantage is that cross referencing comes out right. -The disadvantage is that it involves one more step. - -Start by \TeX ing your document with "2up.tex" and the "dvidvi" layout option. -Then run the dvi file through "dvidvi". Specify the offsets for "dvidvi" at -the middle of the page. E.g., for -a side-by-side layout on 8.5x11in paper, use -\begin{verbatim} - dvidvi '2:0,1(5.5in,0in)' foo bar -\end{verbatim} -For other paper sizes, replace "5.5in" by half the target paper width. For the -"topbottom" layout, reverse the dimensions, e.g., -(0in,5.5in). For booklet printing, see the -the documentation for "dvidvi". - - -\section{Compatibility\label{compatibility}} - - These macros should work with most \TeX\ macro packages, except for -the following possible but unlikely compatibility problems: - -\begin{itemize} - -\item If you use a macro package other than \LaTeX\ that does unusual things -to end a document and/or that modifies the definition of "\end", you may -find that the last page is nor printed or that an extra page with headings -is inserted at the end of the document. This is fixable on a case-by-case -basis. See the redefinition of "\end" in "2up.tex". - -\item "2up.tex" might not work if you meddle with \TeX's "\shipout" primitive -after loading "2up.tex". - -\item If the first page of the source document is not on the first two-up -target -page (possible, for example, with two-sided printing and the "booklet" -option, but generally unlikely), "\special"'s that come at the beginning -of the document also do not get onto the first page of output. This can mess -up "\special"'s for landscape printing or -including a PostScript header file. In this case, you have to specify -these things as command line options when using your dvi driver. - -\end{itemize} - - -\section{Changes} -\begin{namelist}{V0.9xxx} -\raggedright - -\item [V0.9a] Everything redone. Too many differences to point out. - -\item [V0.9b] Interface redone again. "booklet" option added. - -\item [V0.9c] Pages ship out a little earlier. A few bugs fixed. - - Parameters "\pageseplength" and "\pagesepthickness" added. - -\item [V0.9d] Fixed bug with "\twoupclearpage" and "\twoupeject". - -\item [V0.9e] Made pages be counted (from dvi driver's viewpoint) by the -physical page number. - -\item [V0.9f] Parameter "\pagesepoffset" added, and "\pagesepthickness" -changed to "\pagesepwidth". - -\item [V1.0] None. Just seemed seemed like it was time to call it 1.0 - -\item [V1.1] Added "Booklet" and "dvidvi" target layouts. - - "\hoffset" and "\voffset" in source document now have expected effect. - -\item[V1.2] Fixed incompatibility problem with AmS-\TeX/AmS-\LaTeX. - - Added "\TwoupWrites" command. - -\end{namelist} -\end{document} -%% END 2up.doc diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc deleted file mode 100644 index 6b9cea2d0dc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1268 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN fancybox.doc -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu. -%% For copying restrictions, see fancybox.sty. -%% -%% Documentation for fancybox.sty. -%% Run through LaTeX, with or without the NFSS. -%% -\def\FileVersion{1.3} -\def\FileDate{2000/09/19} -%% -%% This creates two temporary files: \jobname.ex1 and \jobname.tmp - -\documentclass[12pt]{article} - -\makeatletter - -%% INPUT FANCYBOX.STY HERE TO CHECK FILE VERSION. - -\usepackage{fancybox} - -\ifx\FileVersion\fileversion\else - \@latexerr{Fancybox style file and documentation do not have the same - version}\@ehd -\fi - -%% DATES, VERSIONS AND TITLES: - -\def\expanddate#1/#2/#3/{\year=#1 \month=#2 \day=#3} -\begingroup - \expandafter\expanddate\filedate/ - \xdef\thefiledate{\today} -\endgroup - -\title{Documentation for fancybox.sty:\\ - Box tips and tricks for \LaTeX} -\author{Timothy Van Zandt\\ Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu} -\date{Version \fileversion\\ \thefiledate} - -\def\@maketitle{% - \begin{center} - {\Large\bf \@title \par} - \vskip 1.2em {\lineskip .5em - \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par} - \vskip .8em {\@date}% - \end{center} - \par - \vskip .5em} - -%% PAGE STYLE: - -\pagestyle{myheadings} -\if@twoside - \markboth{Documentation for fancybox.sty}% - {Version \fileversion, \thefiledate}% -\else - \markright{fancybox.sty, Version \fileversion} -\fi - -%% PAGE PARAMETERS: - -% Paragraphs are marked by large space rather than indentation: -\parindent 0pt -\parskip 7pt plus 1pt minus 1pt - -\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt} -\setlength{\headheight}{12pt} % height of running head -\setlength{\headsep}{30pt} % distance between header and text -\setlength{\textheight}{8.2in} % height of text on page - -%% TABLE OF CONTENTS - -\newskip\myskip - -\def\tableofcontents{% - \par\vfill - \begin{quote} - \begin{center} \Large\bf Contents \end{center} - \def\numberline##1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 1em}}% - \let\oldaddvspace\addvspace - \def\addvspace##1{% - \myskip##1\relax - \oldaddvspace{.5\myskip}} - \@starttoc{toc}% - \end{quote} - \thispagestyle{empty} - \vfill - \clearpage} - - -%% VERBATIM HACKS: - -\VerbatimFootnotes - -% Short meta (works in verbatim. Can't use < for other purposes. -\catcode`\<=13 \def<#1>{{\rm\it #1\/}} % <meta> (works in verbatim) - -% Short verbatim. " can appear in verbatim environments. -\def\temp{\Verb"} -\expandafter\def\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter{\dospecials\do\"} -\catcode`\"=13 -\let"\temp - -% Verbatim item: -\newcommand{\vitem}{\SaveVerb[{\def\bf{}\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]}]{\MyTemp}} - -%% EXAMPLES: - -\setlength{\fboxsep}{6pt} - -\begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.ex1} -% 1. Save example verbatim to \jobname.tmp, -% 2. Input verbatim with \catcode`\"=14 (" is a comment). -% 3. Input again with \catcode\`"=9 (" is ignored). - -\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{} - -\renewcommand{\EveryVerbOutLine}[2]{} - -\newcommand{\BeginExample}{% - \VerbatimEnvironment\begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.tmp}} - -\newcommand{\EndExample}{% - \end{VerbatimOut}%. - \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}{}% - \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimCodes}{\catcode`\"=14}% - \LVerbatimInput{\jobname.tmp}% - \catcode`\"=9} - -\newenvironment{example}{\BeginExample}{\EndExample - \begin{center}\input{\jobname.tmp}\end{center}} - -\newenvironment{example*}{\BeginExample}% - {\EndExample \input{\jobname.tmp}} - -\newenvironment{example**}{\BeginExample}% - {\EndExample \globaldefs=1 \input{\jobname.tmp}} - -\end{VerbatimOut} - -\input{\jobname.ex1} - -%% END PREAMBLE: -\makeatother - -\begin{document} -\setcounter{page}{0} -\maketitle -\begin{quote} -"fancybox.sty", together with its documentation, gives extensive answers to -and solutions for many questions about how to frame or rotate this or that in -\LaTeX. It also contains commands for shadow, double and oval frames. -\end{quote} - -\tableofcontents - -\section{Fancy frames} - -"fancybox.sty" has five variants of \LaTeX's "\fbox" command: -\begin{quote}\raggedright -"\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" (with "\thinlines") and "\Ovalbox" -(with "\thicklines"). -\end{quote} -Here are examples:\footnote{In this documentation, the default value of -"\fboxsep" has been changed from 3pt to 6pt.} -\begin{example} - \shadowbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch} -\end{example} -\begin{example} - \doublebox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch} -\end{example} -\begin{example} - \ovalbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch} -\end{example} -\begin{example} - \Ovalbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch} -\end{example} - -The distance between the box and the frame is "\fboxsep", as with \LaTeX's -"\fbox" command. The commands use other parameters as well: -\begin{description} -\vitem"\shadowbox" The width of the frame is "\fboxrule" (the same as with -"\fbox"). The width of the shadow is "\shadowsize" (default: "4pt"). - -\vitem"\doublebox" The width of the inner frame is .75"\fboxrule", and the -width of the outer frame is 1.5"\fboxrule". The distance between the two -frames is 1.5"\fboxrule" plus .5pt. - -\vitem"\ovalbox" The width of the frame is set by the "\thinlines" -declaration. The diameter of the corner arcs is set with the "\cornersize" -command. -\begin{LVerbatim} - \cornersize{<num>} -\end{LVerbatim} -sets the diameter of the corners arcs to <num> times the lessor of the width -and height of the box. -\begin{LVerbatim} - \cornersize*{<dim>} -\end{LVerbatim} -sets the diameter of the corner arcs to <dim>. This is all approximate, -because \LaTeX\ has a limited range of arc sizes to choose from. The default -is -\begin{LVerbatim} - \cornersize{.5} -\end{LVerbatim} - -\vitem"\Ovalbox" This is like "\ovalbox", except that the width of the lines -is set by the "\thicklines" declaration. -\end{description} - -There are no analogs to \LaTeX's "\framebox" command, which has various -optional arguments not supported by "\fbox". You can get the exact same -functionality by putting the argument of the above framing commands in a -"\makebox". - -There is also a variant "\fancyoval" of \LaTeX's "\oval" picture object. The -difference is that "\oval" always makes the diameter of the corner arcs as -large as possible, and "\fancyoval" uses the "\cornersize" command to set the -diameter. - -\section{A short course on boxes} - -\begingroup\sloppy -The "\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" and "\Ovalbox" commands described -in the previous section are examples of LR-box commands, meaning that their -argument is processed in LR mode. \LaTeX\ LR-box commands include "\mbox", -"\makebox", "\fbox", "\framebox", "\sbox" and "\savebox". All the PSTricks -commands whose argument is text are LR-box commands, including, e.g, the -framing, rotating, scaling and positioning commands, and some of the node -commands. Any rotation command is an LR-box command. - -\endgroup - -The purpose of the rest of this documentation is to provide answers to, and -solutions for, frequently asked questions about using LR-box commands with -\LaTeX. I will use "\fbox" for the leading example of a box framing -command,\footnote{In the examples using "\fbox", be aware that the default -value of "\fboxsep" has been changed in this documentation from 3pt to 6pt.} -and "\rotateleft" for the leading example of a box rotation command. -("fancybox.sty" does not contain a "\rotateleft" command, as this must be -implemented via "\special"'s, but there are numerous box-rotation style files -around.) However, most of what is said here applies to any LR-box command. - -In each LR-box command, the text is processed in restricted horizontal mode, -which is referred to as ``LR-mode'' in Lamport's {\em \LaTeX: User's Guide and -Reference Manual}. In restricted horizontal mode, the input, consisting of -regular characters and boxes, is made into one (long or short) line. There is -no line-breaking, nor can there be vertical mode material such as an entire -displayed equation. However, the fact that you can include another box means -that this isn't really a restriction. - -For one thing, alignment environments such as \LaTeX's "tabular" are just -boxes, and thus present no problem. Picture environments and the LR-box -commands themselves are also just boxes. Entire paragraphs or other vertical -mode material such as displayed equations can be nested in a "\parbox" or -"minipage". - -\section{Defining LR-box environments} - -To frame a "minipage", you have to write -\begin{LVerbatim} - \fbox{% - \begin{minipage}{3in} - blah - \end{minipage}} -\end{LVerbatim} -You might want to define an environment "fminipage" that frames its contents, -but you can't use -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newenvironment{fminipage}% - {\fbox{\begin{minipage}}% - {\end{minipage}}} -\end{LVerbatim} -because the braces are not balanced in the definition. - -"fancybox.sty" contains an "Sbox" environment that makes it easy to define -your own LR-box environments. It is a variant of \LaTeX's "\sbox" command that -saves the contents of the environment in a storage bin that can be retrieved -with the command "\TheSbox".\footnote{The difference between -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{Sbox} - blah - \end{Sbox} - \TheSbox -\end{LVerbatim} -and -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newsavebox{\mybox} - \sbox{\mybox}{blah} - \usebox{\mybox} -\end{LVerbatim} -is that "Sbox" saves the contents globally, and "\TheSbox" erases the contents -globally.} -For example, here is a framed minipage: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{Sbox} - \begin{minipage}{3in} - blah - \end{minipage} - \end{Sbox} - \fbox{\TheSbox} -\end{LVerbatim} -and here is an "fminipage" environment that works: -\begin{example**} - \newenvironment{fminipage}% - {\begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}}% - {\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}\fbox{\TheSbox}} -\end{example**} -Let's see that it really works: -\begin{example} - \begin{fminipage}{2in} - Since the former doesn't use braces to delimit - the contents of the box, $\ldots$ - \end{fminipage} -\end{example} - - -\section{Math} - -In-line math, or pieces of a displayed equation (as opposed to a whole -equation), are horizontal mode material, but most LR-box commands switch out -of math mode when they occur in math mode. Thus, you have to explicitly switch -back in to math mode when desired.\footnote{This is {\em not} true for the -PSTricks LR-box commands.} -For example: -\begin{example} - $x + y = \fbox{$\Omega$}$ -\end{example} - -You also have to explicitly write -\begin{quote} - "\scriptstyle", "\scriptscriptstyle" or "\displaystyle" -\end{quote} -if you want one of these special math styles. For example, here I will frame -an equation, but not the equation number: -\begin{example*} - \begin{equation} - \fbox{$\displaystyle - \int_{\Omega_0} \zeta(\omega) d\omega - \geq \bar{r}$} - \end{equation} -\end{example*} - -Entire displayed equations or "eqnarray" environments work differently because -they are vertical mode material. Thus, they have to go inside a "\parbox" or -"minipage". E.g., -\begin{example*} - \newlength{\mylength} - \[ - \setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt} - \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth} - \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep} - \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule} - \fbox{% - \parbox{\mylength}{ - \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt} - \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt} - \begin{equation} - x + y = z - \end{equation}}} - \] -\end{example*} -The outer "\[" "\]" are just used to display the boxed equation, rather than -actually switch into math mode. Note how I set the width of the "\parbox" so -that the displayed box would exactly have width "\linewidth".\footnote{That is -what "\mylength" is for. It is better to define a single scratch length that -you reuse rather than creating a new one each time.} - - I also set the display skips to "0pt" and increased the size of "\fboxsep" so -that I would have the same distance all around between the equation and the -frame. - -This is again a mouthful, and so I might instead define:\footnote{The reason -for using "\minipage" instead of "\begin{minipage}", and so on, is that with -AmS-\LaTeX, "\begin" and "\end" cannot appear in the definition of a new -equation environment.} -\begin{example**} - \newenvironment{FramedEqn}% - {\setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt} - \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}% - \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}% - \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}% - \Sbox - \minipage{\mylength}% - \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}% - \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}% - \equation}% - {\endequation\endminipage\endSbox - \[\fbox{\TheSbox}\]} -\end{example**} -"fancybox.sty" doesn't bother defining any such environments, because there -are too many possible designs. But let's see if the one above works: -\begin{example*} - \begin{FramedEqn} - \Rightarrow P\sim\xi(P_\gamma)- \frac{1}{3} - \end{FramedEqn} -\end{example*} - -"fancybox.sty" contains a "Beqnarray" environment, which is like the -"eqnarray" environment but it is not vertical mode material. Instead, it -produces a box just large enough to hold all the equations. For example: -\begin{example} - \fbox{% - \begin{Beqnarray*} - x & = & y\\ - y & > & x \\ - \int_4^5 f(x)dx & = & \sum_{i\in F} x_i - \end{Beqnarray*}} -\end{example} -The unstarred version produces standard equation numbers on the right (even -with the "leqno" style option and AmS-\LaTeX). It might not work with special -equation numbering macros. - - -\section{Floats}\label{floats} - -A common mistake is to put a whole "table", "figure" or other float -environment inside an LR-box command. Instead, you should put everything that -is {\em inside} the environment (including the "\caption", if you want that -boxed too) inside a "minipage" of the desired width, and then put the -"minipage" inside the LR-box command. - -For example: -\begin{example*} - \begin{table}[h] - \begin{center} - \fbox{% - \begin{minipage}{.8\textwidth} - \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{rl} - foo & bar - \end{tabular} - \end{center} - \caption{A table of foo and bar.} - \end{minipage}} - \end{center} - \end{table} -\end{example*} -Note how I had to use "center" twice: once to center the framed box, and again -to center the stuff inside the box. - -That is a mouthful, and so I might define a "FramedTable" environment like the -following, which sets the size of the "minipage" so that the framed box is -exactly the width of the page (no need for the first "center" environment this -time): -\begin{example**} - \newenvironment{FramedTable}% - {\begin{table}[h] - \begin{Sbox}% - \setlength{\mylength}{\textwidth}% - \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}% - \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}% - \begin{minipage}{\mylength}}% - {\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}\fbox{\TheSbox}\end{table}}% -\end{example**} -Now let's see if it works: -\begin{example*} - \begin{FramedTable} - \begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{rl} - foo & bar - \end{tabular} - \end{center} - \caption{A table of foo and bar.} - \end{FramedTable} -\end{example*} - -The most common reason to want to rotate an entire float, caption and all, is -to put it on a page by itself in landscape mode, centered both horizontally -and vertically. Compared to the table framing we did above, we just have to -replace "\fbox" by our box rotation command (e.g., "\rotateleft" or whatever), -set the width of the minipage to "\textheight" (if you want to use the full -size of the page), and use the float position specifier "[p]". "fancybox.sty" -contains an environment, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{landfloat}{<float>}{<rotation command>} - ... - \end{landfloat} -\end{LVerbatim} -that automates this. It has two arguments: the name of the floating -environment, and your rotation command. For example, if "\rotateleft{foo}" -rotates "foo" by 90 degrees, and you want a landscape mode "table", then try -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{landfloat}{table}{\rotateleft} - ... - \end{landfloat} -\end{LVerbatim} -If the whole document is in landscape mode, then "landfloat" gives you a -portrait-mode float---good for a table that is too tall to fit in landscape -mode. - -If you don't add a caption to a float, it doesn't matter much what floating -environment you use (e.g., "table", "figure" or whatever). Thus, you can put -anything in a landscape float. For example, suppose I have a very wide -equation. Then I can write: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{landfloat}{table}{\rotateleft} - \begin{equation} - ... - \end{equation} - \end{landfloat} -\end{LVerbatim} -"fancybox.sty" defines a generic caption, "\GenericCaption", that doesn't -affect the numbering of floats, doesn't make an entry in a list of floats, and -doesn't add anything to the argument you give. I could have used this if I -wanted to add a caption to the previous example. - -\section{Center, flushleft and flushright} - -There are two ways to box a "center", "flushleft" or "flushright" environment. -If you have long lines and you want \TeX\ to do the line breaking, then put -the environment inside a "minipage".\footnote{List and other such environments -work best inside a "minipage" environment rather than a "\parbox".} If you -have short lines and you want the frame to adjust itself to the size of the -longest line, then use "fancybox.sty"'s -\begin{quote} - "Bcenter", "Bflushleft" or "Bflushright" -\end{quote} -environment instead. - -These are basically just "tabular" environments with a single column, and so -each line should end with "\\", or "\\["<dim>"]" to insert extra space, and -the text on each line must be balanced. Also, each line is sitting in its own -group, and so, e.g., if you want to change the font for the whole environment, -you should do this before the environment rather than after. -Like the "tabular" environment, the box that is produced has the baseline at -the center, unless you include an optional argument "[t]" to align the box -with the top line or "[b]" to align the box with the bottom line. - -For example: -\begin{example} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{10pt}% - \fbox{% - \begin{Bcenter} - Love of life\\ - and other short stories\\ - by Policarpa Salabarrieta - \end{Bcenter}} -\end{example} -Compare this with: -\begin{example} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{10pt}% - \fbox{% - \begin{minipage}{6cm} - \begin{center} - Love of life and other short stories - by Policarpa Salabarrieta - \end{center} - \end{minipage}} -\end{example} - -In either case, if we want the resulting framed box centered, we have to -include it inside another "center" environment. - -Here is another example: -\begin{example} - My list: \fbox{% - \begin{Bflushleft}[b] - Galanga root\\ - Coconut\\ - Tempeh - \end{Bflushleft}} -\end{example} - - -\section{Lists} - -There are again two ways to box a list environment such as -\begin{quote} - "itemize", "enumerate" or "description". -\end{quote} -You can put it in a "minipage" of pre-determined size and let \TeX\ do the -line breaking, or you can use -\begin{quote} - "Bitemize", "Benumerate" or "Bdescription" -\end{quote} -instead, and let the box adjust to the size of the longest line. - -For example. -\begin{example} - \fbox{% - \begin{Bitemize} - \item Groceries - \item Clean hamster cages - \item Pick up Peter - \end{Bitemize}} -\end{example} - - Most of the usual list parameters are irrelevant except for "\itemsep" and -"\labelsep". These environments are also based on the "tabular" environment, -and so each item should be balanced text. You can't write "\vspace{4pt}" -either, but you can insert an extra amount of space before an item by writing -"\item(4pt)" (or "\item(4pt)[label]" if you have a label). Also, you can break -lines within an item using "\\" or "\\[<dim>]". For example: -\begin{example} - \fbox{% - \begin{Bdescription} - \item[David] Groceries - \item[Eli] Hamster cages\\ - Surreal numbers - \item(3pt)[Doris] Pick up Peter - \end{Bdescription}} -\end{example} - -These environments also have an optional argument, "[t]" to align the box with -the top line, and "[b]" to align the box with the bottom line. -\begin{example} - To do: - \fbox{\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}% - \begin{Benumerate}[t] - \item Groceries - \item Hamster cages - \item Pick up Peter - \end{Benumerate}} -\end{example} - -There is also a generic "\Blist" command that is analogous to \LaTeX's -"\list". It has the same two obligatory arguments, plus a third optional -"[t]" or "[b]" argument for changing the alignment. - -\section{Superimposing boxes} - -The command -\begin{LVerbatim} - \boxput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff1>}{<LR stuff2>} -\end{LVerbatim} -puts <LR stuff1> either behind (the default) or in front of (with the "*") <LR -stuff2>.\footnote{You will only notice the difference between "\boxput" and -"\boxput*" if you are using color implemented by "\special"'s} The resulting -box has the dimensions of <LR stuff2>. - -The coordinates "(<x>,<y>)" determine where the center of <LR stuff1> is -positioned. For example, "(0,0)" puts it at the center of <LR stuff2>, "(0,1)" -puts it at the center-top, and "(-1,-1)" puts it in the bottom-left corner. - -More generally, the origin of the coordinate system is at the center of <LR -stuff2>, one unit in the vertical direction is half the vertical size of <LR -stuff2>, and one unit in the horizontal direction is half the width of <LR -stuff2>. Thus, <x> and <y> should always be numbers (without units such as -"pt" or "cm"), with one exception: If <y> is "b" or "B", <LR stuff1> is -positioned vertically at the baseline of <LR stuff2>. "(<x>,<y>)" is -optional---the default is "(0,0)". - -Except for the funny coordinate system, "\boxput" is like the "\put" command -in a "picture". In particular, you can use "\makebox" in <LR stuff1> to -fine-tune the positioning, and <LR-stuff1> can contain a "picture" -environment. - -You might use "\boxput" to put a ``water mark'' in the background of a box, or -to put a label next to a box, when you don't want this label to take up any -space. Here is a lazy example: -\begin{example} - \boxput{\makebox(0,0){\Huge Censored!}}{\parbox{3in}{% - The origin of the coordinate system is at the center of - {\em LR stuff2}, and one unit in the x-direction - is half the width of {\em LR stuff2}.}} -\end{example} - -This would be a lot more interesting using PSTricks, with ``Censored!'' in the -foreground, rotated 30 degrees, and red: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \boxput*{\rput{30}{\Huge\red Censored}}{\parbox{3in}{% - blah blah}} -\end{LVerbatim} - -Here is another example using PSTricks: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newcommand{\titledframe}[2]{% - \boxput*(0,1){\psframebox*{#1}}% - {\psframebox[framesep=12pt]{#2}}} -\end{LVerbatim} -\newcommand{\titledframe}[2]{% - \boxput*(0,1){#1}% - {\fboxsep=12pt \fbox{#2}}} -The following example illustrated roughly how it works, but ``My title'' does -not blot out the frame behind it because this documentation does not use -PSTricks. \begin{example} - \titledframe{My title}{% - \parbox{2in}{The title is superimposed - on the top part of the frame.}} -\end{example} - -\section{Framing a whole page} - -The commands -\begin{LVerbatim} - \fancyput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff>} - \thisfancyput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff>} -\end{LVerbatim} -are pretty much like "\put" commands in a \LaTeX\ picture environment whose -origin is 1 inch down and to the right from the top left corner of the -page.\footnote{Don't blame me for \TeX's peculiar 1 inch margins.} The only -differences are that (i) that any LR-mode material is permitted (including -\LaTeX\ "picture" environment, of course), (ii) the coordinate is optional -"(0pt,0pt)" is substituted by default), and (iii) if the coordinate is -included, you {\em must} specify the units. - -"\thisfancyput" affects only the current page, and is a global declaration -(analogous to "\thispagestyle"). - -If you include the optional "*", then the command adds to, rather than -replaces, other things that have been inserted with "\fancyput" or -"\thisfancyput". - -These commands are particularly useful for framing a page, because you can get -a frame that is, e.g., 1 inch from each side of the physical page without -having to worry about what margins you are using for the document. Here is an -example: -\begin{example*} - \thisfancyput(3.25in,-4.5in){% - \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}\fancyoval(7,9.5)} -\end{example*} -You could also use "\fancyput" to add some kind of ``watermark'' or background -image (e.g., a light gray ``DRAFT''). - -There are other commands that directly frame or in some other way box the page -of text: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \fancypage{<cmds1>}{<cmds2>} - \thisfancypage{<cmds1>}{<cmds2>} -\end{LVerbatim} - -Each finished page, before adding the headers and footers, (and thus having -width and height "\textwidth" and "\textheight", is boxed with -\begin{LVerbatim} - <cmds1>{<pagebox>} -\end{LVerbatim} -Thus, <cmds1> should be, or should end with, a command whose argument can be a -box, such as "\fbox" or "\rotateleft". - -Then the headers and footers are added, using the new width of the page, and -this is boxed with -\begin{LVerbatim} - <cmds2>{<pagebox>} -\end{LVerbatim} -The same rules apply to <cmds2> as to <cmds1>. - -Here is an example: -\begin{example*} - \thisfancypage{% - \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}% - \setlength{\shadowsize}{8pt}% - \shadowbox}{} -\end{example*} - -{\bf Warning:} The commands described in this section change \LaTeX's output -routine, and may not work with document styles that do the same. Also, bad -arguments can cause serious errors with uninformative error messages. - -\section{Switching to landscape mode midstream} - -The most common reason to switch to landscape mode midstream is to rotate a -float, such as a table or figure. This was discussed in Section \ref{floats}. - -If you want to rotate one or more pages, without rotating the headers and -footers, use the -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{LandScape}{<cmd>} - ... - \end{LandScape} -\end{LVerbatim} -environment. <cmd> should be the command for rotating the page 90 degrees to -the left or right. (E.g., "\rotateleft", or "\rotate[l]".) - -If you want to rotate the headers, footers and margins as well, use the -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{Landscape}{<paperwidth>}{<paperheight>}{<cmd>} - ... - \end{Landscape} -\end{LVerbatim} -environment (the small "s" makes the difference) to rotate the pages left -(counterclockwise), and use the "Landscape*" environment (same arguments) to -rotate the pages right (clockwise). The three arguments are the width of the -paper, the height of the paper, and the rotation command you are using. For -example, if I have a portrait mode document using the US 8.5in by 11in paper, -and if "\rotateleft{foo}" rotates "foo" 90 degrees counterclockwise, then I -can write -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{Landscape}{8.5in}{11in}{\rotateleft} -\end{LVerbatim} - -You can use "\LandScape", "\Landscape" and "\Landscape*", rather then the -"LandScape", "Landscape" and "Landscape*" environments, if you want the rest -of the document to be in landscape mode. - -If your document is being printed in landscape mode, then these environments -switch to portrait mode. - -For example, suppose I have a landscape mode document, and I want to switch to -portrait mode for the rest of the document, rotating the pages to the -``right'' with "\rotateright". Then I would write -\begin{LVerbatim} - \Landscape*{11in}{8.5in}{\rotateright} -\end{LVerbatim} - -These environments switch the text width and height, leaving the margins -exactly as they were before. It is quite possible that you want to make other -changes to the page parameters after switching to landscape mode, but as -Lamport points out the \LaTeX\ {\em User's Guide and Reference Manual}, this -generally doesn't work right in the middle of the document. "fancybox.sty" has -a command "\UsePageParameters" which gets around this. It should be used right -after you change the page parameters (and the page parameter changes should -come right after the beginning of the landscape environment, or "\clearpage"). - -{\bf Warning:} The commands and environments described in this section change -\LaTeX's output routine, and may not work with document styles that do the -same. Also, bad arguments can cause serious errors with uninformative error -messages. - -\section{Verbatim} - -If you try to frame some verbatim text by typing -\begin{LVerbatim} - \fbox{% - \begin{minipage}{5cm} - \begin{verbatim} - \My \Program \Listing - if { foo } { bar } fi - \end{verbatim} - \end{minipage}} -\end{LVerbatim} -you will get nonsense at best. This is because the argument to "\fbox" is read -before the "\begin{verbatim}" is processed. But then it is too late for \TeX\ -to go back and interpret the contents of the verbatim environment literally -rather than as special \TeX\ commands and characters. - -One solution is to use the "Sbox" environment: -\begin{example} - \begin{Sbox} - \begin{minipage}{5cm} - \begin{verbatim} - \My \Program \Listing - if { foo } { bar } fi - \end{verbatim} - \end{minipage} - \end{Sbox} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt} - \fbox{\TheSbox} -\end{example} - -"fancybox.sty" also contains a command that ``fixes'' \LaTeX's LR-box commands -for use with verbatim text: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \VerbBox{<cmd>}{<LR stuff>} -\end{LVerbatim} -This is like -\begin{LVerbatim} - <cmd>{<LR stuff>} -\end{LVerbatim} -but <LR stuff> can contain verbatim text.\footnote{Or other tricks that -involve "\catcode" changes, as occurs with some foreign language macros.} For -example: -\begin{example} - \VerbBox{\fbox}{\verb+\foo{bar}+} -\end{example} - -For footnotes, put the command "\VerbatimFootnotes" in the preamble, and then -you can use verbatim commands or environments in the argument of "\footnote". -This is an optional feature because it might conflict with somebody else's -modification of the footnote system. - -If you try to define your own framed verbatim environment with -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newenvironment{FramedVerb}% - {\begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}{5in}\begin{verbatim}} - {\end{verbatim}\end{minipage}\end{Sbox} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}\fbox{\TheSbox}} -\end{LVerbatim} -and then type -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{FramedVerb} - if { foo } { bar } fi - \end{FramedVerb} -\end{LVerbatim} -you will again run into trouble because after the "\begin{verbatim}", \LaTeX\ -is searching for the literal string "\end{verbatim}" as the end of the -verbatim text. It just skips right over the "\end{FramedVerb}" and may well -continue to the end of the file or until it throws up. - -"fancybox.sty" contains some verbatim environments that get around this -problem and that have other advantages for LR-boxing verbatim listings, when -compared to the standard \LaTeX\ "verbatim" environment. Admittedly, many of -their special features have nothing to do with boxes. - -Here are the basic verbatim environments: -\begin{description} - \vitem"Verbatim" Works pretty much like \LaTeX's "verbatim". - \vitem"LVerbatim" Like "Verbatim", but "list" rather than "trivlist" is used -to display the listing, and so it is indented from the left margin. (This is -what I am using for verbatim listings in this document.) - \vitem"BVerbatim[<pos>]" Produces a box with the same width as the longest -verbatim line. The baseline is in the center, unless you include the optional -argument "[t]" for alignment with the top line or "[b]" for alignment with the -bottom line. - \vitem"VerbatimOut{<file>}" Writes the verbatim text to <file>. - \vitem"SaveVerbatim{<cmd>}" Saves the verbatim text as <cmd>. <cmd> is -defined globally, without checking whether <cmd> is already defined. Use -obviously innocuous names like "\MyTemp". -\end{description} - -{\bf Important:} For any of these verbatim environments, or new verbatim -environments you define yourself (see below), nothing should come after -"\begin{Verbatim}" or before "\end{Verbatim}" on the same line --- not even -spaces!% - \footnote{If you need to allow something to come before "\end{Verbatim}", -then you have two options: - \begin{itemize} - \item Put the command "\AltGetVerbatim" in the preamble. This switches to a -scheme where anything preceding "\end{Verbatim}" is simply ignored. This can -cause problems if you do really weird things with active characters or other -commands within the verbatim environment (e.g., active conditionals that are -not balanced within a line of verbatim text), but in this case you are -probably a good enough hacker to use the next option. - \item "\EndVerbatimTokens" is a token register that you can set to the -tokens that should precede "\end{Verbatim}" on the same line, with their -verbatim "\catcode"'s. - \end{itemize}} -If you put something after "\begin{Verbatim}" on the same line, it is simply -ignored. However, if you put something after "\end{Verbatim}" on the same -line, or if you misspell "\end{Verbatim}", you will get an error such as -\begin{LVerbatim} - ! File ended while scanning use of \Verbatim. -\end{LVerbatim} -and the document will end at that point. - -You can define new verbatim environments using "\newenvironment". You just -have to start the definition with -\begin{LVerbatim} - \VerbatimEnvironment -\end{LVerbatim} - For example, here is the framed verbatim environment we tried earlier: -\begin{example**} - \newenvironment{FramedVerb}% - {\VerbatimEnvironment - \begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}{5cm}\begin{Verbatim}}% - {\end{Verbatim}\end{minipage}\end{Sbox} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}\fbox{\TheSbox}} -\end{example**} -Let's give it a try: -\begin{example} - \begin{FramedVerb} - if { foo } { bar } fi - \end{FramedVerb} -\end{example} - -Here are three commands for inputting a whole file verbatim. The file must end -with a new line. -\begin{description} - \vitem"\VerbatimInput{<file>}" Like "\Verbatim". - \vitem"\LVerbatimInput{<file>}" Like "\LVerbatim". - \vitem"\BVerbatimInput[<pos>]{<file>}" Like "\BVerbatim". -\end{description} - -Here are three commands for making use of verbatim text that has been saved to -a command: -\begin{description} - \vitem"\UseVerbatim{<cmd>}" Like "\Verbatim". - \vitem"\LUseVerbatim{<cmd>}" Like "\LVerbatim". - \vitem"\BUseVerbatim[<pos>]{<cmd>}" Like "\BVerbatim". -\end{description} -The "SaveVerbatim" environment and the "\UseVerbatim" commands are useful for -including verbatim text in the argument of "\marginpar", "\fbox" and other -commands. For example, here is another way to define the "FramedVerb" -environment: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newenvironment{FramedVerb}% - {\VerbatimEnvironment - \begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}}% - {\end{SaveVerbatim}% - \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}% - \fbox{\begin{minipage}{5cm}\UseVerbatim{\MyTemp} - \end{minipage}}} -\end{LVerbatim} - -Here are some verbatim commands for short-pieces of (in-line) verbatim text: -\begin{description} - \vitem"\Verb<char> <literal> <char>" \ \\ - Like \LaTeX's "\verb" command, but it will complain if it encounters a new -line in <literal>.\footnote{Be careful that your word processing does not -insert one for you.} For example: -\begin{example*} - "\begin{quote} - The main use for the \Verb+SaveVerbatim+ - environment and the \Verb+\UseVerbatim+ - commands is to include $\ldots$ - "\end{quote} -\end{example*} - \vitem"\UseVerb{<cmd>}" Like "\UseVerbatim", but without any particular -formatting. It is intended for including short pieces of literal text saved -with "\SaveVerb" (below).\footnote{But it can also be used for multiple lines -saved with the "SaveVerbatim" environment if you want to do the formatting -yourself. E.g., try this in a tabbing environment with "\VerbatimTab" -appropriately defined.} - \vitem"\SaveVerb[<whatever>]{<cmd>}<char> <literal> <char>"\ \\ - This is like "\Verb", but it saves <literal> as <cmd>, and then returns to -the optional argument <whatever>. Like the "SaveVerbatim" environment, it -defines <cmd> globally without checking whether <cmd> is already defined. -Without the optional argument, the most common use is for including verbatim -text in a "\marginpar", "\section" or other command argument. - - The optional argument can be used for special tricks. For example, all the -listings of commands in this documentation use "\vitem" in a "description" -environment, where "\vitem" is defined by:\footnote{The braces enclosing the -optional argument of "\SaveVerb" prevent the "]" inside the argument from -being mistaken for the end of the argument.} -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newcommand{\vitem}% - {\SaveVerb[{\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]}]{\MyTemp}} -\end{LVerbatim} -Whereas -\begin{LVerbatim} - \item[\Verb"\foo"] -\end{LVerbatim} -would not work because after "\item" reads its argument it is too late to -interpret "\foo" literally, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \vitem"foo" -\end{LVerbatim} -does work because it is equivalent to -\begin{LVerbatim} - \SaveVerb{\MyTemp}"foo"\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}] -\end{LVerbatim} -\end{description} - - -These environments and commands use various parameters that make it easy to -customize their behavior. However, until you want to find the need for such -customization, you might as well ignore the rest of this section. - -Internally, "fancybox.sty" separates the reading and formatting of verbatim -text. Most of the environments and commands perform both functions, but -"SaveVerbatim" and "\SaveVerb" only read the text, while "UseVerbatim" (and -company) and "\UseVerb" only format the text. "VerbatimOut" gets special -treatment. The parameters that apply to each class of verbatim environment or -command is listed in Table \ref{verbtable}. - -\begin{table} -\begin{center} -\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{0} -\setlength{\tabcolsep}{7pt} -\newcommand{\vs}{& \\[\tabcolsep]} -\newcommand{\VS}{\\ \vs \hline \vs} -\begin{tabular}{|l|l|} -\hline \vs -{\em Where} & {\em What} -\\ \vs \hline -\hline \vs - \begin{Bflushleft} - Environments\\ - that format - \end{Bflushleft} -& - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\VerbatimSpace"\\ - "\VerbatimTab"\\ - "\VerbatimFont"\\ - "\VerbatimFuzz"\\ - "\EveryVerbatimLine"\\ - "\EveryVerbatim"\\ - "\ThisVerb" - \end{Bflushleft} -\VS - \begin{Bflushleft} - Environments\\ - that read - \end{Bflushleft} -& - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\EveryVerbatimCodes"\\ - "\ThisVerbCodes" - \end{Bflushleft} -\VS - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\Verb" and\\ - "\UseVerb" - \end{Bflushleft} -& - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\VerbSpace"\\ - "\VerbTab"\\ - "\VerbFont"\\ - "\EveryVerb"\\ - "\ThisVerb" - \end{Bflushleft} -\VS - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\Verb" and\\ - "\SaveVerb" - \end{Bflushleft} -& - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\EveryVerbCodes"\\ - "\ThisVerbCodes" - \end{Bflushleft} -\VS - \begin{Bflushleft} - "VerbatimOut" - \end{Bflushleft} -& - \begin{Bflushleft} - "\EveryVerbOutCodes"\\ - "\ThisVerbCodes"\\ - "\EveryVerbOutLine"\\ - "\ThisVerb" - \end{Bflushleft} -\\ \vs \hline -\end{tabular} -\caption{Parameters for the verbatim environments and -commands.\label{verbtable}} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -All the parameters, including "\VerbatimFuzz", are ordinary commands, and -should be changed with "\renewcommand". - -Here is a description of each of the parameters for environments that format -the verbatim text: -\begin{description} - \vitem"\VerbatimSpace" The insertion text for spaces. The default is "\ ", -which produces a blank space. Change it to "\ttspace" to get \ttspace. - \vitem"\VerbatimTab" The insertion text for tabs. The default is -\begin{LVerbatim} - \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ -\end{LVerbatim} - \vitem"\VerbatimFont" The font to use for verbatim text. The default is -"\tt" - \vitem"\VerbatimFuzz" This is the amount by which lines can be too long in a -"Verbatim" or "LVerbatim" environment before you get overfull "\hbox" -warnings. This threshold is usually .1pt, but the default definition of -"\VerbatimFuzz" is "2pt" because verbatim lines won't break and are therefore -often too long. - \vitem"\EveryVerbatimLine" This is inserted at the beginning of each line of -verbatim environments or verbatim files. By default it does nothing. I like to -indent each line in the verbatim environment in the input file by 2 spaces, so -I define -\begin{LVerbatim} - \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{} -\end{LVerbatim} -to eat those spaces. (But I have to remember to put in two spaces or space -markers for blank lines too.) You might also use it to number the lines. For -example: -\begin{example} - \newcounter{VerbLineNo} - \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}% - {\makebox[10pt][r]{% - \stepcounter{VerbLineNo}% - \tiny\rm\arabic{VerbLineNo}}% - \hspace{10pt}} - \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatim}% - {\setcounter{VerbLineNo}{0}} - \begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp} - \setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt} - \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth} - \end{SaveVerbatim} - \fbox{\BUseVerbatim{\MyTemp}} -\end{example} - \vitem"\EveryVerbatim" Whatever else you want to say before formatting the -verbatim text. By default, it does nothing. - \vitem"\ThisVerb" This is executed before any of the commands above, and -then its value is cleared. Use this to customize a single verbatim formatting -environment. -\end{description} - -Here is a description of the parameters for environments that read the -verbatim text: -\begin{description} - \vitem"\EveryVerbatimCodes" This command is inserted just before reading the -verbatim text. Use it to play with "\catcode"'s (see the {\em \TeX book}). For -example, I might type -\begin{LVerbatim} - \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimCodes}{\catcode`\"=14} -\end{LVerbatim} -if I want to use \Verb+"+ as a comment character in verbatim text.% -%% The use of SaveVerbatim and \SaveVerb is not necessary here because -%% \VerbatimFootnotes is in effect. This is just a test. -\begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp} - \def\MyQuote{"} % \MyQuote is now the character ", - \def\temp{\Verb"} % in case I need it. - \catcode`\"=13 % Now " is like a command. - \let"\temp % Now "foo" is like \Verb"foo" - \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand} % Now " can be used in verbatim - \edef\dospecials{\dospecials\do\"} % environments anyway. -\end{SaveVerbatim}\SaveVerb{\Foo}+"+\SaveVerb{\FFoo}+\Verb"foo"+% -\footnote{Here is another "\catcode" trick. We make \UseVerb{\Foo} a short -verbatim command, so that we can say \UseVerb{\Foo foo\Foo} instead of -\UseVerb{\FFoo}: -\LUseVerbatim{\MyTemp}} - \vitem"\ThisVerbCodes" This command is executed before "\EveryVerbCodes", -and then it is cleared. Use this to fool with the "\catcode"`s of a single -verbatim environment. -\end{description} - -The parameters for "\Verb", "\UseVerb" and "\SaveVerb" and the "VerbatimOut" -environment are analogous to the similar commands for other environments. - -Here is an example of the use of "\ThisVerb" to define a variant of "\Verb" -that uses \ttspace\ to mark spaces: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newcommand{\SVerb}{% - \renewcommand{\ThisVerb}% - {\renewcommand{\VerbatimSpace}{\ttspace}}% - \Verb} -\end{LVerbatim} - -Finally, without further comment, here are the definitions of the "example" -and "example*" environments that were used for the examples in this document: -{\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}{}\LVerbatimInput{\jobname.ex1}} - -\section{Changes} -\raggedright - -\paragraph*{Version 0.9, November 23, 1992} First release. - -\paragraph*{Version 0.91, November 25, 1992} -\begin{enumerate} - \item "\shadowsize" is now a length, to be set with "\setlength" or -"\addtolength". - \item "\fancypage" split into "\fancypage" and "\fancyput" -\end{enumerate} - -\paragraph*{Version 0.92, December 20, 1992} -\begin{enumerate} - \item New "\boxput" command for superimposing boxes. - \item New "\VerbatimFootnotes" command. - \item New "\VerbBox" command for verbatim boxes. - \item New "Sbox" environment. Makes "\beginsbox" and "\endsbox" - obsolete, but the latter have been retained for compatibility. -\end{enumerate} - -\paragraph{Version 0.93, January 20, 1993} -\begin{enumerate} - \item New "\EndVerbatimTokens" for tokens that precede "\end{Verbatim}". - \item New "\AltGetVerbatim", to allow any tokens to precede -"\end{Verbatim}". - \item Fixed bug in "\BVerbatimInput" that caused second line to be repeated. - \item New "LandScape" environment, for rotating pages without rotating -headers and footers. - \item Slide frames "Oval", "oval", "shadow" and "double" are defined when -"seminar.sty" v0.93 (and maybe later) is loaded. -\end{enumerate} - -\paragraph{Version 1.0, February 10, 1993} -\begin{enumerate} - \item Fixed bugs in "\boxput". - \item New "Beqnarray" environment. -\end{enumerate} - -\paragraph{Version 1.1, 1997 (D.G./S.R.)} -\begin{enumerate} - \item Minimal adaptations for \LaTeX{} 2e compatibility (macros - "\fancypage", "\thisfancypage", "\fancyput", "\thisfancyput", - "\@Landscape", "\LandScape"). -\end{enumerate} - -\paragraph{Version 1.2, February 27, 1998 (D.G./S.R.)} -\begin{enumerate} - \item Other adaptations for \LaTeX{} 2e. -\end{enumerate} - -\paragraph{Version 1.3, September 19, 2000 (D.G./S.R.)} -\begin{enumerate} - \item Corrections of the output routine for \LaTeX{} 2e compatibility - (from Marcin Wolinski and Heiko Oberdiek). - \item Add a "\ProvidesPackage" command (from Heiko Oberdiek). -\end{enumerate} - -\end{document} -%% END fancybox.doc diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e deleted file mode 100644 index a220dca4561..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -THIS IS A SUPPLEMENTARY READ-ME FOR V1.0e OF THE SEMINAR PACKAGE - -*********************************************************************** -**** "readme" file for the Seminar package, v1.0e, 94/09/12 **** -*********************************************************************** - -COPYRIGHT 1993, 1994 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu - -BUGS: If you have problems using this seminar package with LaTeX2e, - report them to Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu. The problem probably lies - with seminar.cls. You can probably continue to use the seminar - package with LaTeX2e in compatibility mode, while waiting for a bug - fix, by renaming seminar.cls to something else. - -ABOUT V1.0e: - - The V1.0e distribution is identical to v1.0 of 93/04/01, - except for a few changes so that Seminar can work with - NFSS2 and LaTeX2e: - - - semhelv.sty and semlcmss.sty have been modified to work - with NFSS2 and LaTeX2e (but they still work with NFSS). - - - seminar.cls has been added. This is a LaTeX2e document class, - derived from seminar.sty v1.0 by Sebastian Rahtz. - - If you already have have seminar.sty v1.0e, then all you need - are this read-me file plus these files from the inputs - directory: - - seminar.cls semhelv.sty semlcmss.sty - -USING SEMINAR WITH LATEX2E: - - !!! YOU MUST BE USING A LATEX2E RELEASED AFTER 19 FEBRUARY 1994 - - You can either use seminar.sty in compatibility mode: - \documentstyle{seminar} - Or use the seminar.cls document class: - \documentclass{seminar} - - Unless you are using other macros that only work in - compatibility mode, you might as well use the document class. - - You can use the following options with \documentclass{seminar}: - - article slidesonly notes notesonly notesonly* - noxcomment portrait a4 (or a4paper) semhelv semlcmss - semlayer semrot semcolor slidesec - - plus appropriate options for the article document class - (e.g., 11pt) - - NOTE: Use `a4' or `a4paper', not `sem-a4'. - - `seminar.cls' is a minimal modification of seminar.sty. The - next release will take advantage of more of LaTeX2e's special - capabilities. - - -Tim Van Zandt -August 24, 1994 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst deleted file mode 100644 index 8d489f677e7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,204 +0,0 @@ - --------------- - | PSTricks 97 | - --------------- - - - ------------------------------------------------------------------------ -PSTricks is the work of Timothy van Zandt <tvz@nwu.edu> - -PSTricks 97 is edited by Denis Girou <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - and Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@computing-services.oxford.ac.uk> ------------------------------------------------------------------------ - - - -1 - Copyright - --------- - -COPYRIGHT 1993, 1994, 1999 by Timothy Van Zandt, tvz@nwu.edu. - -This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms -of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN -archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt. - -2 - Introduction - ------------ - -This package is a re-release of PSTricks, incorporating all of the -beta releases and bug fixes made up to March 1997. It is *not* -intended as a full new release of PSTricks, but as a consolidation and -cleaned distribution. Because Timothy van Zandt does not currently have -enough time to work on PSTricks, he gave permission for Denis Girou -and Sebastian Rahtz to produce this interim solution. - -No new features have been added in PST97, except the release of the -small pst-fill package for filling (tiling) arbitrary regions and the -various evolving contributions, but we have merged in all the bug fixes -and beta addons which Timothy produced. - -We have renamed some of the files that make up PSTricks, for consistency. - - -3 - Installation - ------------ - -3.1 - (La)TeX files - - a - You have to move all the files from the "generic" subdirectory -to a directory part of your TEXINPUTS environment variable, or to add it -in your TEXINPUTS list of paths. - - b - If you are a LaTeX user (and not only a plain TeX one), you have -to do the same thing for the "latex" subdirectory, which define LaTeX -wrappers for all the PSTricks files. - -3.2 - PostScript header files - - a - If you use the "dvips" DVI to PostScript converter, you have -to move all the files from the "dvips" subdirectory to a directory part -of your DVIPSHEADERS environment variable, or to add it in your DVIPSHEADERS -list of paths. - - b - If you use the Y&Y's "dvipsone" DVI to PostScript converter, -you have to rename generic/dvipsone.con to generic/pstricks.con and to move -all the files of the "dvips" subdirectory to the TeX input folder. - - c - If you use the MicroPress "VTeX" DVI to PostScript converter, -you have to rename generic/vtex.con to generic/pstricks.con and to move -all the files of the "dvips" subdirectory to the TeX input folder. - - d - If you use the "textures" (version 1.7 or 1.8) DVI to PostScript -converter (for Macintosh), you should proceed as follows: - * create a new folder PSTricks97 (for instance) as a subfolder in -Textures' TeX inputs folder, - * copy the "generic", "dvips", "latex" and "contrib" subfolders -from the "pst97" folder to the newly created "PSTricks97" folder, - * open the "generic" folder and remove the file pstricks.con, -then rename the file textures.con to pstricks.con, - * open the "dvips" folder and change the following line in the file -pstricks.pro (courtesy Michael J. Sharpe <msharpe@euclid.ucsd.edu>): -/STV { SDict begin normalscale end STP } def -by -/STV { Mag 72.27 72 div mul dup neg scale STP } def - It was also reported that the `pst-text' package (to put text -along paths) doesn't work with the "textures" driver. - Textures's users must also look at the page kindly maintained -by Michael Sharpe: http://math.ucsd.edu/~msharpe/pst-textures.html - - d - If you use another driver than these four ones, you have to adapt -a pstricks.con file for it, if the one for "dvips" doesn't work for it. -You can also look at the instructions of the old obsolete/src/pstricks.con -file. And if nothing work, ask for help on the PSTricks mailing list, -hopping that somebody on the list has the same configuration than you... - -3.3 - Test of the installation - -The file doc/test-pst.tex allow you to test all your installation and the -various components of PSTricks. It is the concatenation of most of the -examples of the PSTricks chapter of "The LaTeX Graphics Companion". -You must take care (mainly if you are "normally" a user of plain TeX only, -that it require LaTeX and some packages of it distribution (namely `calc', -`ifthen' and `graphicx'). It also require the `random' and `subfigure' -packages, which can be found on CTAN or the TeXLive cdrom - see the README -file of the doc subdirectory). - -3.4 - Known pitfalls - - a - To use the standard `color' package (which is available both -for plain TeX and LaTeX) with PSTricks, you must load the `pstcol' extra -package written by David Carlisle, which interface the two packages, -loading them in the right order, and overriding some small parts of PSTricks -to allow it to use the `color' package system for specifying color. -We strongly recommend that you use the `color' package today. - - b - Don't try to load the `color' package if you use `pst-all' -(it is already loaded in the correct order). - - c - If needed, preferably load the `graphics' / `graphicx' package -after PSTricks, and in this case use the `graphics' syntax of \scalebox -(not the one described in the PSTricks documentation). - - d - If you load `graphics' / `graphicx' before PSTricks, you must use -the PSTricks syntax of \scalebox in all cases (not the one described -in the `grfguide' document). - - e - We have rename some package files for consistency. But the reference -documentation in obsolete/doc subdirectory still refer to the old names. -So, take care that `pst2eps' is now `pst-eps', `charpath' is now `pst-char', -`gradient' is now `pst-grad', `textpath' is now `pst-text' and `pstree' is -now `pst-tree'. - - -4 - Contents - -------- - -4.1 - Subdirectories - -The distribution contain the following subdirectories: - -contrib : various contributions -doc : documentations (up to date ones - the obsolete/doc subdirectory - contain the reference documentation for the version 0.93a and - the additional old Beta material, which is still necessary to use...) -dvips : PostScript header files -generic : TeX generic sources -latex : LaTeX wrappers -obsolete: documentation and sources for the version 0.93a and the - additional old Beta material - -4.2 - PSTricks core files - -The generic subdirectory contain the core files of PSTricks (and the latex -subdirectory contain the corresponding wrapper files). By alphabetic order: - -multido : loop facility for Generic TeX (in fact independant of PSTricks) -pst-3d : 3d projections -pst-char: stroking and filling character paths -pst-coil: coils and zigzags -pst-eps : conversion of PSTricks graphics to EPS files -pst-fill: fillings and tilings -pst-grad: gradients -pst-node: nodes and node connections -pst-plot: plots -pst-text: texts along a path -pst-tree: trees - -In addition, there is a LaTeX package `pst-all' in the latex subdirectory, -which loads all of the PSTricks components, plus `pstcol', in one go -(`pstcol' require also a color.cfg file defined; make sure you do _not_ load -the `color' package by itself). The only reason for _not_ using this is that -it uses extra memory for facilities you might not need. - - -5 - Documentation - ------------- - -There is NOT a complete up to date _reference_ documentation for PSTricks 97. -You must still refer to the reference documentation of the version 0.93a and -the additional old Beta material, available in the obsolete/doc subdirectory -(it was put in the "obsolete" subdirectory to clearly show that it is not up -to date nor supported by actual mainteners). Take care to notice what has -changed in additional old Beta documents (betadoc?.ps files) comparing to the -ones for 0.93a version (pst-usr?.ps files). - -Denis Girou maintain a list of known errors in both version 0.93a and -additional old Beta documentations, in obsolete/doc/pst-doc.err - -A large chapter of "The LaTeX Graphics Companion", by Goossens, Rahtz and -Mittelbach, Addison Wesley 1997, is dedicated to PSTricks, and this -currently forms the only systematic description of the integration of -the basic PSTricks and the beta additions of 1993. The source of all examples -from that book is also on CTAN/info/lgc and most of them in the doc/lgc -subdirectory of the PST97 distribution. - -There is also a supporting set of Web pages, actually maintained -by Denis Girou, on http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks with various -pointers and examples classified by categories. - -And there is also a mailing list devoted to discussions on PSTricks usage. -The informations to subscribe to this list and to consult the archives can -be found on the Web page. - --- -Denis Girou and Sebastian Rahtz (updated May 5, 1999) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me deleted file mode 100644 index ba972a2bf62..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me +++ /dev/null @@ -1,294 +0,0 @@ -------------------------------------------------------- -IMPORTANT NOTE - -With the agreement of Timothy Van Zandt (now Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu), -the distributions conditions on seminar are now relaxed to: - - This package may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public - License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution. - Either version 1.0 or, at your option, any later version. - -This overrides any conditions listed below. - -June 3rd 1999 (last updated September 2005) -Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk> -Denis Girou <denis.girou@idris.fr> - -(Tim's helpers on earth) -------------------------------------------------------- - -%% BEGIN sem-read.me -*********************************************************************** -**** "readme" file for seminar.sty package, v1.0, 93/04/01 **** -*********************************************************************** - -COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt - -DESCRIPTION: - - seminar.sty is a LaTeX document style for typesetting slides or - transparencies, and accompanying notes. It has many advantages over - SliTeX. Here are some of the style's special features: - * It is a LaTeX style, rather than another format. - * It is compatible with AmS-LaTeX. - * You can use any fonts that work with LaTeX, including PostScript - fonts and AmSFonts. - * Slides can be landscape and portrait within the same file. - * Color is supported through PostScript. - * The slides can have a frame and a colored background. - * The magnification can be changed with a single command. - * Overlays can be produced from a single slide environment. - * Accompanying notes, such as the text of a presentation, can be put - outside the slide environments. The slides, notes or both together - can then be typeset in a variety of formats. - Some of these features require a PostScript output device. - -FILES: - - Inputs: - seminar.sty : The main style file. - sem-page.sty : Page parameters. - semlayer.sty : The semlayer style option (overlays and color layers). - semhelv.sty : The semhelv style option . - semlcmss.sty : The semlcmss style option. - semcolor.sty : The semcolor style option. - semrot.sty : THe semrot style option. - slidesec.sty : The slidesec style option. - sem-a4.sty : The sem-a4 style option. - xcomment.sty : The macros for omitting notes. - 2up.tex : Macros for printing documents two-up. - 2up.sty : The same as 2up.tex, but with .sty extension. - npsfont.sty : Macros for defining new PostScript fonts with the NFSS. - fancybox.sty : Box tips and tricks for LaTeX. - - Documentation: - sem-user.tex : User's guide for seminar.sty. - sem-user.ind : Index for sem-user.tex. - semsamp1.tex : A sample document for seminar.sty. - semsamp2.tex : Another sample document for seminar.sty. - 2up.doc : Documentation for 2up.tex. - fancybox.doc : Documentation for fancybox.sty. - tvz-hax.sty : For typesetting sem-user.tex and sem-code.tex. - tvz-code.sty : For typesetting sem-code.tex. - tvz-user.sty : For typesetting sem-user.tex. - sem-read.me : This file. - read-me.pst : The read-me file for the PSTricks package. - - Sources: - seminar.doc : Documented code for seminar.sty. - semlayer.doc : Documented code for semlayer.sty. - xcomment.doc : Documented code for xcomment.sty. - sem-make.tex : For extracting code from seminar.doc and semlayer.doc. - sem-code.tex : For typesetting seminar.doc and semlayer.doc. - xc-make.tex : For extracting code from xcomment.doc. - xcomment.tex : For typesetting xcomment.doc. - -GETTING STARTED: - - 1. Put the input files in a directory where your TeX looks for inputs. - - 2. Typeset and print sem-user.tex. - - 3. Read the preface "Getting Started", and then the appendices. - - 4. Typeset semsamp1.tex and semsamp2.tex. - - 5 If upgrading from v0.92, see the changes listed at the end of this - file. If upgrading from v0.91 or earlier, good luck. - -HACKERS: - - The files seminar.doc, semlayer.doc and xcomment.doc contain the - documented code, using Frank Mittelbach's doc system. - See sem-code.tex and xcomment.tex for instructions on typesetting - these files. - See sem-make.tex and xc-make.tex for instruction on extracting - stripped input (.sty) files from these .doc files. - -MORE ABOUT THE SUPPLEMENTAL STYLES AND MACROS: - - The following styles and macros are not specifically for use - with seminar.sty, and hence are not described in detail in - the seminar.sty User's Guide. You do not need to read the - documentation of these files in order to use seminar.sty. - If you have versions on your system that are older than the - ones distributed with seminar.sty, be sure to replace these. - - FANCYBOX.STY: - fancybox.sty is a LaTeX style option with tips and tricks for LR-box - commands. The documentation, fancybox.doc, is extensive. - - 2UP.TEX: - 2up.tex/2up.sty contains macros for typesetting documents in a - two-up format. seminar.sty's \twoup command provides an interface. - 2up.doc is the documentation for 2up.tex. - - NPSFONT.STY: - npsfont.sty contains macros for defining new PostScript fonts - with the New Font Selection Scheme. The documentation is in - npsfont.sty itself. - - XCOMMENT.STY: - xcomment.sty, a LaTeX style option, permits one to typeset only - selected environments, omitting input outside these environments. - See xcomment.tex if you want to typeset the documentation. - - SLIDESEC.STY - slidesec.sty is an experimental file contains sectioning commands - for slide type documents. The documentation is in slidesec.sty - itself. - - -SEMINAR.STY AND PSTRICKS.TEX: - - pstricks.tex is a collection of PostScript macros that is compatible - with most TeX macro packages, including Plain TeX and LaTeX. Included are - macros for color, graphics, rotation, overlays, nodes and much more. - - seminar.sty, combined with the semcolor option, the PSTricks package, - and your favorite macros for including EPS files, make a complete - TeX presentation software package. - - You can probably obtain the PSTricks package from wherever you got - the Seminar package, or try - Princeton.EDU:/pub or Princeton.EDU:/pub/tvz - - You must install the PSTricks package before using the semcolor option. - - seminar.sty will work with pstricks.tex v0.92, and maybe later - versions. - - -ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: - - The author is thankful to Frank Mittelbach for his documentation system. - - Thanks to Sebastian Rahtz for bits of advice, and many users for - comments and bug reports. - -BUGS: - - Too many to list, and who knows what they are anyway. These files are all - preliminary and unstable. Not responsible for neck injuries. - - - Thanks. - -CHANGES: - - v1.0: Included sem-a4.sty file, as a way to let the default papersize - be A4 (The a4 option still works). Added \epsfslidesize to make - it easier to set the slide of eps files with epsf.sty. Fixed bug - which caused the width of second pages of a multi-page slide to - end up too small if the page only contained a quote or similar - environment with reduced margins. - - v0.93a: Fixed bugs so that slides would come out properly with the - 2-up,article and portrait options (together), and so that - slides would be positioned correctly with the portrait style - option. - - v0.93: - - INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES: - - ! Use the a4 option instead of sem-a4. There is not longer a - separate file for a4. - - ! No more \fewnotes, \nonotes. Use \slideplacement instead. - - ! No more \layerstyle, \overlaystyle. - - ! Slide styles are now "left" and "bottom". - - ! No more \ifslides. Use \ifarticle\else. - - ! You must now use the semlayer option to use overlays (in addition - to the semcolor option). - - ! No "down" slide rotation (only "none", "left" and "right". - - ! portrait option is no longer a separate file. - - ! \paperwidth and \paperheight are now ordinary commands, to be set - with \renewcommand. - - ! \slidefonts is now always invoked in slide environments, and never in - the preamble. (But semhelv.sty and semlcmss.sty have changed to - reflect this.) - - ! Method for customizing the slide frames has changed. - \slideframecolor, \slideframearc, \slidefillcolor and - \slideshadowcolor are obsolete. - - ! \landscape command replaced by \printlandscape to avoid conflict with - other style files. (E.g., \def\printlandscape{\special{landscape}}). - - NEW FEATURES: - - + A slide environment can have multiple `pages'. \extraslideheight{len} - controls page cutting. See user's guide for details. - - + \centerslidestrue (default) causes the contents of partially full - slides to be vertically centered in the slide. \centerslidesfalse - causes it to be flush top. - - + New \raggedslides[len] command, for setting - whether right margin in slides is ragged or justified. Default is - \raggedslides. \raggedslides[0pt] gives justified slides. - - + \slideplacement - - + \onlynotestoo - - + \slideskip and \slideshrink for added control over interline space. - - - + New: \slideleftmargini, \slideleftmarginii, \slideleftmarginiii, - \slidelabelsep, \slideitemsep, \slidepartopsep, - \slideparskip, \slideparindent, \slidefootins, \slidefootnotesep, - \slidedisplayskips, \theslidefootnote - - + \input and \endinput now supported for the slidesonly selection. - - + New conditional: \ifportrait - - + \newslideframe - - + \leftsliderotation, \rightsliderotation. - - + New \slidetopmargin, \slidebottommargin, \slideleftmargin, - \sliderightmargin. - - + New notesonly* selection. - - + New \slidesclearpagetrue - - + New \semcm and \semin. - - + New note environment and \noxcomment command, as an alternative - to treating everything outside slide environments as notes. - - - BACKWARDS-COMPATIBLE CHANGES: - - * \maketitle now uses LaTeX's default from article.sty in notes. - - * Bug in article option with the \twoup command fixed. - - * \topmargin in sem-a4 changed from -.75in to 1in. - - * \slidefontsizes is obsolete (but still works). Use \ptsize instead. - - * Page parameters are now in a separate file sem-page.sty. sem-a4.sty - has been changed to reflect this. - - v0.92: - Mostly bug fixes, plus some extra options. The PSTricks package - is no longer distributed with seminar.sty. - - Pre v0.91: - Entirely rewritten. Too many changes to list. Note especially - that system of formats and selections has changed. - -%% END sem-read.me diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind deleted file mode 100644 index 9ce562b55c9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind +++ /dev/null @@ -1,189 +0,0 @@ -\begin{theindex} - - \item {\tt 2up} (option), \main{13} - - \indexspace - - \item {\tt a4} (option), \main{37} - \item \verb*+\addtoartlength+, \main{18} - \item \verb*+\addtoslidelength+, \main{6} - \item \verb*+\addtoslidelist+, \main{17} - \item \verb*+\addtoslidereset+, \main{12} - \item {\tt allversions} (environment), \main{17} - \item {\tt allversions*} (environment), \usage{16}, \main{17}, - \usage{26} - \item {\tt article} (option), \usage{7}, \main{13}, \usage{13, 14}, - \usage{18}, \usage{25}, \usage{28}, \usage{33} - \item \verb*+\articlemag+, \main{13}, \usage{14}, \usage{18} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\centerslidesfalse+, \main{2} - \item \verb*+\centerslidestrue+, \main{2} - \item \verb*+\colorlayers+, \main{21} - \item counters: - \subitem {\tt overlay}, \main{22} - \subitem {\tt slide}, \main{12} - \item \verb*+\currlayer+, \main{22} - - \indexspace - - \item environments: - \subitem {\tt allversions*}, \usage{16}, \main{17}, \usage{26} - \subitem {\tt allversions}, \main{17} - \subitem {\tt note}, \main{16}, \usage{16, 17} - \subitem {\tt slide*}, \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1} - \subitem {\tt slide}, \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1} - \item \verb*+\espfslidesize+, \main{25} - \item \verb*+\everyslide+, \main{15} - \item \verb*+\extraslideheight+, \main{3} - - \indexspace - - \item {\tt fancybox} (option), \usage{10, 11} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\ifarticle+, \usage{19}, \main{27} - \item \verb*+\ifnotes+, \main{27} - \item \verb*+\ifnotesonly+, \main{27} - \item \verb*+\ifportrait+, \main{27} - \item \verb*+\ifslidesonly+, \main{27} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\landscapeonly+, \main{1} - \item \verb*+\layerframe+, \main{23} - \item \verb*+\layerlabel+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\layerpagestyle+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\layersfalse+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\layerstrue+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\leftsliderotation+, \main{36} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\newpagestyle+, \main{26} - \item \verb*+\newslide+, \main{3}, \usage{12} - \item \verb*+\newslideframe+, \main{10} - \item {\tt note} (environment), \main{16}, \usage{16, 17} - \item {\tt notes} (option), \main{15}, \usage{18, 19} - \item {\tt notesonly} (option), \main{15}, \usage{18, 19} - \item {\tt notesonly*} (option), \main{19} - \item \verb*+\notslides+, \main{12} - \item \verb*+\noxcomment+, \main{16}, \usage{17} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\onlynotestoo+, \main{16}, \usage{31} - \item \verb*+\onlyslides+, \main{12}, \usage{31} - \item options: - \subitem {\tt 2up}, \main{13} - \subitem {\tt a4}, \main{37} - \subitem {\tt article}, \usage{7}, \main{13}, \usage{13, 14}, - \usage{18}, \usage{25}, \usage{28}, \usage{33} - \subitem {\tt fancybox}, \usage{10, 11} - \subitem {\tt notesonly*}, \main{19} - \subitem {\tt notesonly}, \main{15}, \usage{18, 19} - \subitem {\tt notes}, \main{15}, \usage{18, 19} - \subitem {\tt portrait}, \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1}, - \usage{13, 14}, \usage{18, 19} - \subitem {\tt semcolor}, \usage{10, 11}, \usage{20}, \usage{27}, - \usage{31}, \usage{35}, \main{36}, \usage{36, 37} - \subitem {\tt semhelv}, \main{33} - \subitem {\tt semlayer}, \main{20}, \usage{20}, \usage{31}, - \usage{35}, \usage{37} - \subitem {\tt semlcmss}, \main{33} - \subitem {\tt semrot}, \main{36}, \usage{36} - \subitem {\tt slidesonly}, \main{15}, \usage{26} - \subitem {\tt slides}, \usage{18} - \item \verb*+\overlay+, \main{21}, \usage{21} - \item {\tt overlay} (counter), \main{22} - \item \verb*+\overlayframe+, \main{23} - \item \verb*+\overlaylabel+, \usage{22} - \item \verb*+\overlaypagestyle+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\overlaysfalse+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\overlaystrue+, \main{22} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\paperheight+, \usage{5} - \item \verb*+\paperwidth+, \usage{5} - \item {\tt portrait} (option), \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1}, - \usage{13, 14}, \usage{18, 19} - \item \verb*+\portraitonly+, \main{1} - \item \verb*+\printlandscape+, \main{35} - \item \verb*+\ptsize+, \main{8}, \usage{32} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\raggedslides+, \main{2}, \usage{2}, \usage{24} - \item \verb*+\renewpagestyle+, \main{26} - \item \verb*+\rightsliderotation+, \main{36} - \item \verb*+\rotateheadersfalse+, \main{36} - \item \verb*+\rotateheaderstrue+, \main{36} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\semcm+, \usage{5}, \main{6} - \item {\tt semcolor} (option), \usage{10, 11}, \usage{20}, - \usage{27}, \usage{31}, \usage{35}, \main{36}, - \usage{36, 37} - \item {\tt semhelv} (option), \main{33} - \item \verb*+\semin+, \usage{5}, \main{6} - \item {\tt semlayer} (option), \main{20}, \usage{20}, \usage{31}, - \usage{35}, \usage{37} - \item {\tt semlcmss} (option), \main{33} - \item {\tt semrot} (option), \main{36}, \usage{36} - \item \verb*+\setartlength+, \main{18} - \item {\tt slide} (counter), \main{12} - \item {\tt slide} (environment), \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1} - \item {\tt slide*} (environment), \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1} - \item \verb*+\slidearraystretch+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slidebottommargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5} - \item \verb*+\slideclearpagetrue+, \main{19} - \item \verb*+\slidefonts+, \main{15} - \item \verb*+\slidefootfont+, \main{20} - \item \verb*+\slidefootnotesep+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slideframe+, \main{10}, \usage{10, 11} - \item \verb*+\slideframesep+, \usage{5}, \main{10} - \item \verb*+\slideframewidth+, \usage{5}, \main{10} - \item \verb*+\slidefuzz+, \usage{4} - \item \verb*+\slideheadfont+, \main{20} - \item \verb*+\slideheight+, \main{2}, \usage{5}, \usage{14} - \item \verb*+\slideitemsep+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slidelabel+, \main{14}, \usage{14} - \item \verb*+\slidelabelsep+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slideleftmargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5} - \item \verb*+\slideleftmargini+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slideleftmarginii+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slideleftmarginiii+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slidepagestyle+, \main{16} - \item \verb*+\slideparindent+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slideparskip+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slidepartopsep+, \main{8} - \item \verb*+\slideplacement+, \main{18} - \item \verb*+\slidereset+, \main{12} - \item \verb*+\sliderightmargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5} - \item \verb*+\sliderotation+, \main{36} - \item {\tt slides} (option), \usage{18} - \item \verb*+\slidesep+, \main{19}, \usage{19} - \item \verb*+\slideshrink+, \main{9}, \usage{9} - \item \verb*+\slideskip+, \main{9}, \usage{9} - \item \verb*+\slidesmag+, \main{6}, \usage{14}, \usage{24} - \item {\tt slidesonly} (option), \main{15}, \usage{26} - \item \verb*+\slidestretch+, \main{8}, \usage{9}, \usage{24} - \item \verb*+\slidestyle+, \main{14} - \item \verb*+\slidetopmargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5} - \item \verb*+\slidewidth+, \main{2}, \usage{5}, \usage{14} - - \indexspace - - \item \verb*+\thelayer+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\theoverlay+, \main{22} - \item \verb*+\theslide+, \main{12}, \usage{12} - \item \verb*+\theslidefootnote+, \main{12} - \item \verb*+\truepagenumbers+, \main{25} - \item \verb*+\twoup+, \main{13}, \usage{13, 14}, \usage{25}, - \usage{32} - -\end{theindex} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2227746eae3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 7b0fb3c480e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1935 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN sem-user.tex -\def\FileDate{93/04/01} -\def\FileVersion{1.0} -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Copying of part or all of any file in the seminar.sty package -%% is allowed under the following conditions only: -%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the files. Please -%% include the documentation when you do so. -%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of any file, but only for personal -%% use or use within an organization. -%% (3) You may copy fragments from the files, for personal use or for use -%% in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given -%% where credit is due. -%% -%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of -%% these files or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for -%% a nominal charge for copying etc. -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% This LaTeX file prints the User's Guide for seminar.sty. -%% You must have my tvz-hax.sty, tvz-user.sty, and fancybox.sty, -%% which are distributed with seminar.sty. -%% -%% This is distributed with the index file sem-user.ind. -%% To make an new index, run, e.g.: -%% makeindex sem-user.idx -%% -%% STYLE OPTIONS: -%% `a4' : For A4 paper. -%% `twoside' : For two-sided printing. -%% `2up' : For two-up printing. (Uses non-standard font magnifications. -%% See 2up.doc for details.) -%% - -\documentstyle[12pt]{tvz-user} - -\makeindex - -% Used with twoside option: -\def\theheadertitle{seminar.sty: User's Guide} - -% No headers, 1in top margin -\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt} -\setlength{\headheight}{0pt} -\setlength{\headsep}{0pt} -\setlength{\textheight}{8.75in} -\setlength{\footskip}{.625in} -\papersizeadjust - -% Change part environment: -\renewcommand{\part}[1]{% - \clearpage - \refstepcounter{part} - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}% - \hrule height 1pt\relax - \vskip 1ex - \hbox to\columnwidth{\strut\huge\bf\thepart\hfil#1}% - \vskip 1ex - \hrule height 1pt\relax - \vskip 3ex} - -\def\MainFont{\tt} % For macro definitions. - -\ShortVerb -\ShortMeta - -\let\filedate\FileDate - -\begin{document} - -\thispagestyle{empty} - -\null -\vfill - -\begin{center} - {\huge\bf seminar.sty}\\[9pt] - {\LARGE\bf A \bLaTeX\ style for slides and notes}\\[14pt] - {\LARGE\bf User's Guide}\par - \vskip 1.5em - \large - \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}} - Timothy Van Zandt\\ - {\normalsize\tt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu} - \vskip 1em - \thefiledate\\ Version \FileVersion\par -\end{center} -\par -\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm} -\thicklines -\centerline{\lower.8in\hbox{% -\begin{picture}(0,0) -\put(2,-11){\framebox(4,2){}} -\put(2,-11){\line(-2,3){1}} -\put(2,-9){\line(-2,3){1}} -\put(6,-9){\line(-2,3){1}} -\put(1,-9.5){\line(0,1){2}} -\put(1,-7.5){\line(1,0){4}} -\put(5.8,-8.7){\line(0,1){2}} -\put(5.0,-6.7){\oval(1.6,1.6)[tr]} -\put(5.0,-5.9){\line(-1,0){.7}} -\put(3.1,-6.4){\framebox(1.2,1){}} -\put(3.1,-6.4){\line(-1,2){.3}} -\put(3.1,-5.4){\line(-1,3){.3}} -\put(4.3,-5.4){\line(-1,3){.3}} -\put(2.8,-5.8){\line(0,1){1.3}} -\put(2.8,-4.5){\line(1,0){1.2}} -\put(0,6.2){\oval(14,10)} -\put(.02,6.18){\oval(14,10)} -\thinlines -\put(2.8,-5.8){\line(-4,3){9.6}} -\put(2.8,-4.5){\line(-3,5){9.35}} -\put(4,-4.5){\line(1,6){2.6}} -\put(6.8,1.4){\line(-1,-3){2.5}} -\end{picture}}} -\par -\bigskip -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em\relax -\parshape=20 -0cm 2.3cm -0cm 2.9cm -0cm 3.5cm -0cm 4.1cm -0cm 4.7cm -0cm 5.3cm -0cm 5.9cm -0cm 6.5cm -0cm 7.1cm -0cm 7.7cm -0cm 8.3cm -0cm 8.3cm -0cm 8.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -0cm 7.3cm -seminar.sty is a \LaTeX\ style for typesetting slides or -transparencies, and accompanying notes. Here are some of its special features: -It is compatible with \AmS-\LaTeX, and you can use PostScript and \AmS{} -fonts. Slides can be landscape and portrait. There is support for color and -frames. The magnification can be changed easily. -Overlays can be produced from a single slide environment. Accompanying notes, -such as the text of a presentation, can be put - outside the slide environments. The slides, notes or both together - can then be typeset in a variety of formats. - -\vfill - -\twosideclearpage -\pagenumbering{roman} -\tableofcontents - -\twosideclearpage - -\section*{Getting Started} -\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Getting Started} -\markboth{Getting Started}{Getting Started} - -"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX{} document style for typesetting slides, and more. - -You should know how to use \LaTeX, as described in Leslie Lamport's \LaTeX: -{\em User's Guide and Reference Manual}. - -Let's get started: -\begin{enumerate} -\item If you are installing "seminar.sty", read the the accompanying read-me -file, and put the input files where your \TeX\ looks for inputs. - -\item Typeset the sample file, "semsamp1.tex", to see that everything is -working. You can use \LaTeX\ or \AmS-\LaTeX. - -\item Read Appendix \ref{short-fonts}, on page \pageref{short-fonts}. - -\item To start making landscape slides, use -\begin{LVerbatim} - \documentstyle{seminar} - \begin{document} - \begin{slide} - foo - \end{slide} - \end{document} -\end{LVerbatim} -and print out your document in landscape mode. - -\item To start making portrait slides, include the \o{portrait} style option, -and use the \e{slide*} environment instead of \e{slide}: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \documentstyle[portrait]{seminar} - \begin{document} - \begin{slide*} - foo - \end{slide*} - \end{document} -\end{LVerbatim} - -\item If you have used \SliTeX, see Section \ref{slitex}. - -\item For A4 paper, use the "a4" style option. - -\item When you are ready to explore "seminar.sty"'s special features, skim the -{\em User's Guide}, including the appendices. - -\item Play around with the sample file "semsamp2.tex" to try out some of -"seminar.sty"'s special features. - -\item When you run into problems, look for help in Part \ref{Help}. - -\end{enumerate} - -\twosideclearpage - -\pagenumbering{arabic} - -\part{Just slides} - -\section{Landscape and portrait slides} - -"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX\ (or \AmS-\LaTeX) document style. Thus, begin your -document with -\begin{LVerbatim} - \documentstyle{seminar} -\end{LVerbatim} - -The slide environments are\MainEnvIndex{slide}\MainEnvIndex{slide*}% -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{slide} ... \end{slide} - \begin{slide*} ... \end{slide*} -\end{LVerbatim} -\e{slide} is for landscape slides and \e{slide*} is for portrait slides. - -By default, the document is typeset in landscape mode, but if you include the -\O{portrait} style option, the document is typeset in portrait mode. -Typesetting the document in landscape mode is different from printing it in -landscape mode; you may have to take care of the latter when printing with -your dvi driver (see Appendix \ref{S-landscape}). - -If you have both landscape and portrait slides in your file, there are two -ways to print the slides: -\begin{itemize} - \item If you dvi driver supports rotation, then you can print all the slides -at once. See Appendix \ref{S-landscape} for details. - \item You can first print your landscape slides by putting the command -\begin{MD} - \landscapeonly -\end{MD} -in the preamble, and then print the portrait slides by inserting instead the -command -\begin{MD} - \portraitonly -\end{MD} -and including the \o{portrait} style option. -\end{itemize} - -\section{The height and width of slides\label{slidedim}} - -The dimensions of the slides are set by the lengths -\begin{MD} - \slidewidth\\ - \slideheight -\end{MD} -The ``width'' refers to the width of a slide when looking at it in landscape -orientation, whether it is a landscape or portrait slide (and the same goes -for ``height''). The default width is 8.5 inches and the default height is 6.3 -inches. - -The slide environments have an optional argument that lets you change the -dimensions of a single slide, as in -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{slide*}[7.5in,6in] -\end{LVerbatim} -The first dimension is the slide's ``width'', and the second dimension is the -slides ``height''. If you remember what we said about what ``width'' and -``height'' mean, you will see that the above example begins a portrait slide -that is 7.5 inches high and 6 inches wide. - - -\section{Margins within a slide} - -When a slide is not full, the material is vertically centered within the -slide. The command -\begin{MD} - \centerslidesfalse -\end{MD} -cause the material to be flush to the top, instead. The command -\begin{MD} - \centerslidestrue -\end{MD} -switches back to vertical centering. - -The right margin in slides is ragged by default. You can change this with the -command -\begin{MD} - \raggedslides[len] -\end{MD} -<len> should be the maximum space between the end of the line and the right -margin. The argument is optional; \n\raggedslides\ is equivalent to -\begin{LVerbatim} - \raggedslides[1fil] -\end{LVerbatim} -which gives a ragged right margin, as in \LaTeX's "flushleft" environment (the -default). On the other hand, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \raggedslides[0pt] -\end{LVerbatim} -gives a justified margin, and -\begin{LVerbatim} - \raggedslides[2em] -\end{LVerbatim} -gives a semi-ragged margin. Note that as a margin becomes less ragged, -hyphenation becomes more likely and more material fits on a slide. - -\section{Page breaking within a slide environment\label{S-pagebreak}} - -A slide environment can contain more than one ``page'' of slides; \TeX\ will -break slides into pages automatically. - -If the mere idea disturbs you, put the command -\begin{LVerbatim} - \extraslideheight{10in} -\end{LVerbatim} -in your document. You can then divide slides into pages yourself by starting -new slide environments or using the -\begin{MD} - \newslide -\end{MD} -command within a slide environment. And you need read this section no further. - -If instead you use the command -\begin{LVerbatim} - \extraslideheight{0pt} -\end{LVerbatim} -then \TeX\ will break pages the way you would expect. This is a quick and -dirty way to break a whole paper or a long proof into slides. - -However, dividing material into slides is usually too delicate a matter to be -left up to \TeX, and ultimately you will make all the page breaks yourself. On -the other hand, automatic page breaking can still be helpful at the early -stages, letting \TeX\ find preliminary page breaks for you. - -Setting the "\extraslideheight" to "0pt" doesn't give you much flexibility -about where to put the page breaks. Of course, you can always put a page break -earlier than the one found by \TeX, but occasionally you will prefer to let a -slide overflow by a small amount rather than rewrite the whole slide. - -Therefore, by default, "seminar.sty" uses\MainIndex{\extraslideheight}% -\begin{LVerbatim} - \extraslideheight{10pt} -\end{LVerbatim} -This adds on an extra "10pt" to the target slide height (as determined by -"\slideheight" for landscape slides and "\slidewidth" for portrait slides) -{\em for the purpose of page-breaking only}. - -If the resulting slide exceeds the slide height, you will get a message like -\begin{LVerbatim} - LaTeX Error: Slide 3 overfull by 9pt. -\end{LVerbatim} -"seminar.sty" then tries to reduce the slide to its maximum height by -squeezing out rubber vertical space (e.g., tightening up the interline -spacing). If the slide is still too full, you will get another warning like: -\begin{LVerbatim} - Overfull \vbox by 4.4pt while output was active. -\end{LVerbatim} -You can go back and look for a way to make the slide shorter, or you can -insert a "\newslide" command to change the page-break, or you can just ignore -these warnings. - -The recommended value to give in the argument of "\extraslideheight" is the -largest length by which you might be willing to let a slide overflow. - -After you have decided on the page breaks, you can shut up the warnings about -overfull slides and "\vbox"'s with -\begin{LVerbatim} - \renewcommand{\slidefuzz}{1in} -\end{LVerbatim} -The value of \n\slidefuzz\ (which should be length, even though \n\slidefuzz\ -is an ordinary command sequence) is the threshold above which "seminar.sty" -gives a warning about an overfull slide. The default definition is "2pt". - - -\section{Margins on the page\label{S-slidemargins}} - -After "seminar.sty" makes a slide (or a slide page) as described above, it -(optionally) frames the slide. This is described in Section \ref{S-frames}. -For making and framing the slide, "seminar.sty" does not need to know anything -about the paper you are printing on, or the margins you want. Hence, none of -\LaTeX's standard page parameters are relevant within a slide environment. -(However, for the sake of consistency, "seminar.sty" sets "\textwidth" to the -width of the slide and "\textheight" to the height of the slide within a slide -environment.) - -Now "seminar.sty" has to do something with the finished slide. As you read -this User's Guide, you will find that there are various options. However, -right now we are making slides for printing on transparencies, and so we have -to position the slide on the transparency and add headers and footers. -"seminar.sty" does not use \LaTeX's page parameters for this either. Instead, -it uses the following parameters: -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{lc} - {\em Parameter:} & \em Default:\\ - \N\slideleftmargin & .5in\\ - \N\sliderightmargin & .5in\\ - \N\slidetopmargin & .5in\\ - \N\slidebottommargin & .5in - \end{tabular} -\end{center} -There are commands, to be set with "\renewcommand".\footnote{The only true -length parameters (meaning that thay should be set with "\setlength") in -"seminar.sty" are \n\slidewidth, \n\slideheight, \n\slideframewidth, -\n\slideframesep, \n\semin, and \n\semcm.} - -\begin{figure} -\hrule height 1pt\relax -\begin{center} -\setlength\unitlength{.7cm} -\begin{picture}(13,11.5)(-1,-1.5) -\thicklines -\put(0,0){\framebox(11,8.5){\Huge My slide}} -\put(5.5,4.25){\fancyoval(8.5,6){}} - -\thinlines -\put(0,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}} -\put(.75,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}} -\put(.5,8.8){\vector(1,0){.25}} -\put(.5,8.8){\vector(-1,0){.5}} -\put(.375,9.1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\n\slideleftmargin}} - -\put(10.25,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}} -\put(11,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}} -\put(10.75,8.8){\vector(1,0){.25}} -\put(10.75,8.8){\vector(-1,0){.5}} -\put(10.625,9.1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\n\sliderightmargin}} - -\put(0,-.15){\line(0,-1){.3}} -\put(11,-.15){\line(0,-1){.3}} -\put(5.5,-.3){\vector(1,0){5.5}} -\put(5.5,-.3){\vector(-1,0){5.5}} -\put(5.5,-.6){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\n\paperheight}} - -\put(-.15,0){\line(-1,0){.3}} -\put(-.15,.75){\line(-1,0){.3}} -\put(-.3,.5){\vector(0,1){.25}} -\put(-.3,.5){\vector(0,-1){.5}} -\put(-.6,.375){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\n\slidebottommargin}} - -\put(-.15,8.5){\line(-1,0){.3}} -\put(-.15,7.75){\line(-1,0){.3}} -\put(-.3,8){\vector(0,1){.5}} -\put(-.3,8){\vector(0,-1){.25}} -\put(-.6,8.125){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\n\slidetopmargin}} - -\put(11.15,0){\line(1,0){.3}} -\put(11.15,8.5){\line(1,0){.3}} -\put(11.3,4.25){\vector(0,1){4.25}} -\put(11.3,4.25){\vector(0,-1){4.25}} -\put(11.6,4.25){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\n\paperwidth}} - -\put(.75,7.75){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{Here is my header}} -\put(10.25,7.75){\makebox(0,0)[br]{9/30/99}} -\put(.75,.75){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{Here is my footer}} -\put(10.25,.75){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{7-9}} -\end{picture} - -\caption{Slide margins.\label{SlideMargins}} -\end{center} -\hrule height 1pt\relax -\end{figure} - -Look at Figure \ref{SlideMargins}. Note that the headers and footers lie {\em -inside} the top and bottom margins, respectively. The slide is then centered -horizontally and vertically between the margins. - - -\section{Magnification and lengths} - -"seminar.sty" changes \TeX's magnification so that the output is larger than -when typesetting an article. This means, for example, that if you paste some -input from a paper you are writing with \LaTeX\ into a slide, it will look -pretty much the same in the slide, except that it is magnified. For example, -"\vspace{.5in}" produces a space that gets bigger along with the fonts and -everything else. Of course, it won't look identical, since "seminar.sty" uses -its own spacing parameters and margins. - -\TeX's standard magnifications are in magsteps. $n$ magsteps means a -magnification of $1.2^n$. "seminar.sty"'s default magnification is 4 magsteps, -but you can change this with the command -\begin{MD} - \slidesmag{n} -\end{MD} -<n> should be an integer between $-5$ and 9. - -As noted above, lengths grow with the magnification. For spacing, like the -parameter "\parindent" or using "\\[2pt]" to add a little extra space between -lines, this is great, because it is easier to think in unmagnified dimensions. -Setting "\parindent" to ".5cm" will look the same (relative to everything -else) whatever the magnification. - -However, if you want to set the unit in a "picture" environment to 1cm, {\em -as it appears on the slide}, use -\begin{LVerbatim} - \setslidelength{\unitlength}{1cm} -\end{LVerbatim} -"\setslidelength" is like \LaTeX's "\setlength", but it scales the size down -so that the resulting size after magnification is, in this example, 1cm (in -the process, it removes any stretch from rubber lengths).% -\footnote{If you know what {\tt true} dimensions are, you may be wondering why -they haven't been mentioned. These are not recommended because you will not be -able to print the slides two-up or use the {\tt article} format.} -There is also a -\begin{MD} - \addtoslidelength{cmd}{len} -\end{MD} -command. - -"seminar.sty" also provides the lengths -\begin{MD} - \semin\\ - \semcm -\end{MD} -which are equal to an inch and a centimeter, scaled down to ``before -magnification'' size. For example, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \rule{1pt}{4\semcm} -\end{LVerbatim} -makes a line 4 centimeters long on the transparency,.\footnote{Suppose you -want to use another unit, such as millimeters, instead of centimeters. Then -try this: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newcommand{\semmm}{\semcm} - \renewcommand{\semcmlength}{1mm} - \setslidelength{\semmm}{1mm} -\end{LVerbatim}} - -"\textwidth", "\textheight", "\columnwidth" and "\linewidth" all have the -expected values in slides. (But "\slidewidth" and "\slideheight" do not.) -Thus, this would -\begin{LVerbatim} - \rule{1pt}{.5\textwidth} -\end{LVerbatim} -make a line that is 1/2 the width of the slide. - -For help getting an EPS file to be the right size, see page \pageref{EPS}. - -Finally, there are some parameters that "seminar.sty" scales for you, and -hence you can (and should) set them at their magnified values (the actual size -on transparencies): -\begin{itemize} - \item "\slidewidth" and "\slideheight" - \item "\slideframewidth" and "\slideframesep" (see Section \ref{S-frames}). - \item The slide margin parameters (see Section \ref{S-slidemargins}). - \item The \LaTeX\ page parameters, {\em when they are set in the -preamble}.\footnote{The \LaTeX\ page parameters are listed on page 163 of -Lamport's {\em \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual}. They are used for -notes (see Section \ref{S-notes}) and the \o{article} option (see Sections -\ref{S-twoup} and \ref{S-article}), but not for printing slides onto -transparencies. Lamport warns that resetting page parameters in the middle of -the document is tricky; here it is more so, because you do have to worry about -scaling them. But you can use "\setslidelength" for this.} -\end{itemize} - -Note that the warnings about overfull slides (see Section \ref{S-pagebreak}) -report unmagnified dimensions. - - -\section{Font sizes} - -The "\slidesmag" command lets you change the magnification of your document. -You can effectively fine tune the magnification by using the "11pt" and "12pt" -style options. For example, instead of increasing the magnification from 4 to -5, you can switch to the "12pt" style option. There are differences---e.g., -magnification affects the space you get from "\hspace{1in}"---but the fonts -will at least be roughly the same size either way. The "11pt" option gives a -half-step, somewhat like "\slidesmag{4.5}", if the latter were permitted. - -Sometimes you want to use smaller font sizes for a single slide, in order to -fit in that little bit of extra material, or to use larger font sizes, so that -the few things you have to say on a slide don't look too lonely. You can't -changing the magnification in the middle of the document, but you can change -the size of the fonts with the command -\begin{MD} - \ptsize{n} -\end{MD} -This switches to the font sizes that are in effect when you use the "<n>pt" -option. Actually, <n> can be 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14 or 17, whether you have -"art<n>.sty" or not. - - -\section{Spacing parameters\label{S-spacing}} - -\begin{figure} -\hrule height 1pt -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{llc} -{\em Command:} & {\em Initializes:} & {\em Default} \\[2pt] -\N\slideparskip & "\parskip" & "1ex minus .2ex"\\ -\N\slideparindent & "\parindent" & "0pt"\\ -\N\slidefootnotesep & "\footnotesep" & "1.2ex"\\ -\N\slideleftmargini & "\leftmargini" & "1.8em" \\ -\N\slideleftmarginii & "\leftmarginii" & "1.4em" \\ -\N\slideleftmarginiii & "\leftmarginiii" & "1em" \\ -\N\slidelabelsep & "\labelsep" & ".5em" \\ -\N\slideitemsep & "\itemsep" & ".8ex minus .2ex" \\ -\N\slidepartopsep & "\partopsep" & "1ex minus .2ex" \\ -\N\slidestretch & "\baselinestretch" & "1.2"\\ -\N\slidearraystretch & "\arraystretch" & "1.2" -\end{tabular} - -\caption{Slide spacing parameters.\label{SpacingDefaults}} -\end{center} -\hrule height 1pt -\end{figure} - -The commands in Figure \ref{SpacingDefaults} are used to initialize some of -the spacing parameters at the beginning of each slide environment and when -"\ptsize" is used in a slide environment. These are spacing parameters that -should depend on the size of fonts and that in \LaTeX's "article" style would -be set in "art10.sty", etc. These commands should all be changed with -"\renewcommand", even though, except for the "stretch" parameters, their -values should be lengths. -Note that "ex" and "em" units are used because these are the units that depend -of font sizes. - -Outside a slide environment, redefine the commands on the left if you want to -change these spacing parameters. Within a slide environment, reset the -parameters directly, or redefine the commands on the left and then use the -"\ptsize" command. - -In other \LaTeX\ styles, the extra distance between lines that is inserted -when "\baselinestretch" exceeds 1 is eaten up by tall or deep lines. E.g., if -the line contains a table or a large math operator, there is probably no -extra space at all. The advantage of this system is that the distance between -baselines does not fluctuate with every tilde. The disadvantage is that lines -can end up too close. - -In "seminar.sty", on the other hand, fraction -\begin{MD} - \slideskip -\end{MD} -of the extra space cannot be eaten, but up to fraction -\begin{MD} - \slideshrink -\end{MD} -of this extra space that cannot be eaten can be removed if there is too much -material on the slide. This gives you added flexibility about how much -material to include on a slide. Both \n\slideskip\ and \n\slideshrink\ can be -set with "\renewcommand" to a number between 0 and 1. The default value of -\n\slideskip\ is ".75" and the default value of \n\slideshrink\ is ".25". Set -\n\slideskip\ to "0" to revert to \LaTeX's usual behavior, as described above. - -For example, suppose you are using a 10pt font, \n\slidestretch\ is "1.2", -\n\slideskip\ is ".75", and \n\slideshrink\ is ".25". The "\baselineskip" for -a 10pt font is normally 12pt, leaving a little space between the lines. Then -"\baselineskip" is set to -\begin{center} - "\slidestretch" $\times$ "12pt" $=$ 1.2$\times$12pt $=$ 14.4pt -\end{center} -The extra space between lines that is inserted is thus 2.4pt, and -\begin{center} - "\slideskip" $\times$ 2.4pt $=$ .75$\times$2.4pt $=$ 1.8pt -\end{center} -of this cannot be eaten by tall or deep lines. However, the space between -lines can be reduced by up to -\begin{center} - "\slideshrink" $\times$ 1.8pt $=$ .25$\times$1.8pt $=$ .45pt -\end{center} -if the slide would otherwise be too long. - - -\section{Slide frames\label{S-frames}} - -Slides can be framed. The command -\begin{MD} - \slideframe[commands]{style} -\end{MD} -specifies the frame style to use. Valid frame styles are "none" and "plain", -unless you use macros that define additional styles. For example, the -\o{fancybox} style option defines the frames "shadow", "double", "oval" and -"Oval" (corresponding to the "\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" and -"\Ovalbox" commands defined in that style option). The \o{semcolor} - option defines the styles "scplain", "scdouble", and "scshadow". - -All the frame styles use the lengths -\begin{MD} - \slideframewidth\\ - \slideframesep -\end{MD} -which are the (magnified) width of the line (default 4pt) and the distance -between the slide and the frame (default .4in), respectively. - -\n\slideframe's optional argument is for commands that you want to use to -customize the slide frame style. For example: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \slideframe[\setlength{shadowsize}{12pt}]{shadow}\\ - \slideframe[\psset{fillstyle=gradient}]{scplain} -\end{LVerbatim} - -If you want to build your own custom slide frame, use the command -\begin{MD} - \newslideframe{style}[commands]{frame command} -\end{MD} -<style> is the name of the frame, "[<commands>]", which is optional, will be -inserted before the frame command and before the <commands> given by -"\slideframe"'s optional argument. These commands can be used to set some -default parameter values. Then the final argument should frame "#1". - -For example, if "\myframe{foo}" frames "foo", and if "\myframe" uses the -length "\baldness" as a parameter, then you might write -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newslideframe{wildframe}[\setlength{\baldness}{.2cm}]% - {\myframe{#1}} -\end{LVerbatim} -You can still override the default value of "\baldness", as in -\begin{LVerbatim} - \slideframe[\setlength{\baldness}{.1cm}]{wildframe} -\end{LVerbatim} - -There is a starred version of \n\slideframe\ that adds the frame to previously -specified frames.\footnote{If using color or PostScript images, note that each -frame gets added to the background.} This can be used for special tricks. For -example, if you are using the \o{fancybox} and \o{semcolor} options, then -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newslideframe{draft}% - {\boxput{\rput{30}{\Huge\gray DRAFT}}{#1}} - \slideframe{draft} - \slideframe*{scdouble} -\end{LVerbatim} -puts the word ``DRAFT'' in the background of each slide, gray and rotated 30 -degrees, and then adds a double frame.\footnote{Use "\boxput*" to put "DRAFT" -in the foreground. See "fancybox.doc" for details.} - - -\part{Advanced Features} - -\section{Counters} - -The counter for slides is \C{slide}. The default definition of \N\theslide\ is -"\arabic{slide}". You can use "\label" and "\ref" to cross-reference slides, -and the page number in slide environments is set to -\n\theslide.\footnote{However, these page or slide cross-references are not -always accurate when you let \TeX\ break pages for you within a slide.} Thus, -you can write, for example, -\begin{LVerbatim} - See equation (\ref{foo}) on Slide \pageref{foo}. -\end{LVerbatim} - -You may want some counters, such as equation counters, to be reset with each -new slide environment or \n\newslide\ command. By default, only the "footnote" -counter is reset this way, but you can specify your own (comma-separated) list -of counters to be reset with the command -\begin{MD} - \slidereset{list} -\end{MD} -If you want to reset additional counters, rather than replace the list -entirely, use -\begin{MD} - \addtoslidereset{list} -\end{MD} - -There is another way in which the footnote counter gets special treatment. The -command -\begin{MD} - \theslidefootnote -\end{MD} -is used for the counter text instead of "\thefootnote". The default definition -is -\begin{LVerbatim} - \alph{footnote} -\end{LVerbatim} - -\section{Selectively including or excluding slides} - -The commands -\begin{MD} - \onlyslides{list}\\ - \notslides{list} -\end{MD} -can be used to include or exclude only those slides in the given list. The -argument should expand to a comma-separated list of numbers or ranges. The -numbers do not need to be in order, the list can contain numbers that do not -correspond to any slide, and there can be duplicate numbers. Negative numbers -should be enclosed in curly braces. Since the argument is first expanded, you -can use the "\ref" command in the argument. For example, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \onlyslides{{-2},\ref{dp}-10,\ref{chart},0,17-999} -\end{LVerbatim} -is legal. If "\label{dp}" appears in slide 5 and "\label{chart}" appears in -slide 12, this is equivalent to: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \onlyslides{{-2},5-10,12,0,17-999} -\end{LVerbatim} - -\section{Printing your slides two-up\label{S-twoup}} - -Printing your slides two-up is useful both for previewing slides and for -making hard copies to distribute or for proofreading. - -One way to print your slides two-up is to include the \O{article} style -option. This is described further below. - -Another way is to include the command -\begin{MD} - \twoup[n] -\end{MD} -in the preamble. This inputs "2up.tex", which contains generic macros for -two-up printing, and sets the parameters to values that are likely to work. -Including the optional argument "[<n>]" increases the two-up magnification by -$n$ magsteps. $n$ can be a positive or negative integer. If you are not able -to get the right layout, then include the \O{2up} style option, read the -documentation of "2up.tex", and set the parameters yourself, rather than using -the \n\twoup\ command. - -The \o{article} style option is also called the article {\em format} (as -opposed to the slides format). In the article format without the \o{portrait} -option, the slides are centered horizontally and vertically, two to a page (if -they fit---landscape slides do fit by default). With the portrait option, the -slides are printed side-by-side, two to a page. In the \o{article} format, you -can mix landscape and portrait slides with different orientations, but this -does not work well with the \o{portrait} option. - -You can change the article format's magnification with -\begin{MD} - \articlemag{n} -\end{MD} -This command works like the "\slidesmag" command (page \pageref{+slidesmag}). -The default is -\begin{LVerbatim} - \articlemag{0} -\end{LVerbatim} -Increase the article magnification if the slides look too lonely; decrease it -if they are not coming out two-up. - -The size of the slides depends on the {\em difference} between the -magnifications in the slides and article format. E.g., since the default -slides magnification is 4 magsteps, the slides are scaled down in the article -format by 4 magsteps. When you change the slides magnification with -\n\slidesmag, you also have to change the article magnification with -\n\articlemag\ by the same amount if you want the size of the slides in the -article format to remain the same. However, when the article magnification in -magsteps is negative , you will be using non-standard font magnifications -(which will produce terrible results if you cannot generate the needed -fonts---see Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for advice). - -Whether or not landscape slides (or rotated portrait slides) come out two-up -in the article format without the \o{portrait} option depends on (i) the -difference between the slides and article magnification, (ii) the values of -\n\slidewidth\ and \n\slideheight\, (iii) the size of the slide frame, and -(iv) the article format's page parameters. With the default values of -(ii)--(iv), the slides will still come out two-up if you change the difference -between the slides and article magnification to 3 (e.g., increase the value of -\n\articlemag\ by 1). Try this if you want the slides to be larger. - -If you use the \o{article} option {\em and} the \n\twoup\ command, then your -slides should be printed four-up! - -You will notice labels on the side or bottom of each slide in the \o{article} -format. The command -\begin{MD} - \slidestyle{style} -\end{MD} -determines where these labels go. There are three predefined slide styles: -\begin{description} -\item[\tt empty] No captions or labels are used. -\item[\tt left] The labels go on the left of each slide (the default when the -\o{portrait} option is not used). -\item[\tt bottom] The labels go on the bottom (the default with the -\o{portrait} option). -\end{description} -The label you get is the value of \N\slidelabel. The default definition of -\n\slidelabel\ is -\begin{LVerbatim} - \bf Slide \theslide -\end{LVerbatim} - -\section{Notes\label{S-notes}} - -In addition to slides, you can include a few comments following each slide to -remind you of what to say, or even the entire text of your presentation for -your own benefit or to be distributed to others. These comments or text, -referred to in this documentation as ``notes'', do not go inside any special -environment. However, a slide cannot go in the middle of a paragraph of notes. - -To include notes this way, you have to use one of the following style options, -which determine what is printed: -\begin{quote} - \begin{tabular}{ll} - \O{slidesonly} & Only the slides are printed.\\ - \O{notes} & Both notes and slides are printed.\\ - \O{notesonly} & Only the notes are printed.\\ - \end{tabular} -\end{quote} -These style options are referred to as {\em selections} in this documentation. - -The pages of notes following slide 5 are numbered 5.1, 5.2, etc. - -You can use the "portrait" option to print out your notes, even if you don't -use this option when printing the slides. - -With the "notesonly" selection, the slides are not printed, but they are -processed. This means that one can still refer in the notes to slides or to -equations in slides. - -The fact that various spacing parameters are initialized at the beginning of -each slide (see Section \ref{S-spacing}) means that when you reset these -parameters outside a slide environment, only the notes are affected. This lets -you use different values for notes and slides. The command \N\slidefonts\ can -be used for any special font commands that should apply only to slides. Also, -the command \N\everyslide\ is executed at the beginning of every slide, and -you can use this for any other customizations you want to include. - -You can also use the "11pt" or "12pt" style option for your notes, without -changing the size of the fonts in the slides, by using the "\ptsize" command -to set the font sizes for slides. For example, suppose that the "12pt" -document style option is used, but the preamble contains the command -\begin{LVerbatim} - \ptsize{11} -\end{LVerbatim} -and the second slide begins with the command -\begin{LVerbatim} - \ptsize{9} -\end{LVerbatim} -Then the notes use the "12pt" font size declarations, all the slides but the -second one use the "11pt" font size declarations, and the second slide uses -the "9pt" font size declarations. - -Notes are typeset using \LaTeX's standard output routines, and \LaTeX's -standard page parameters. - - Finally, it is even possible to use a different page style for notes and -slides. The page style for notes is set by the "\pagestyle" and -"\thispagestyle" commands. The command -\begin{MD} - \slidepagestyle{style} -\end{MD} -sets a different page style for the slides. If the argument is empty, then the -page style for slides reverts to the one for notes.\footnote{There is no -"\thisslidepagestyle" command.} - -With the command -\begin{MD} - \onlynotestoo -\end{MD} -the "\onlyslides" and "\notslides" commands apply to the notes as well. - - -\section{How notes are omitted\label{omit}} - -In the previous section, it was stated that notes are not enclosed in a -special environment. "seminar.sty" omits notes using special -macros\footnote{Defined in {\tt xcomment.sty}} that comment out everything -{\em outside} the slide environments (and a few other environments mentioned -below). Global declarations that should be processed even when slides are -omitted go in \e{allversions*} environments, described below. - -"seminar.sty" also let you use a more conventional approach to notes. If you -put the command -\begin{MD} - \noxcomment -\end{MD} -in the preamble, then the notes go inside \E{note} environments, and you can -put all the global declarations outside any environment. "xcomment.sty" is -used to make \e{note} a comment environment when note should be omitted, and -otherwise the \e{note} environment does nothing. This mode of operation is -more robust than omitting everything outside the slide environments, but -remembering to insert the -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{note} ... \end{note} -\end{LVerbatim} -is more tedious. - -Here are a few technicalities that have to do with "xcomment.sty" and that -apply whether or not you use \n\noxcomment. -\begin{enumerate} -\item The text that follows the beginning of a slide environment (when not -using \n\noxcomment) or the end of a \e{note} environment {\em must have -balanced curly braces}. -\item "\input" and "\include" commands are followed, even when found in -omitted notes, but you must use the \LaTeX\ syntax "\input{<file>}" (as -opposed to \verb*+\input <file> +), and the inputted file must end with -"\endinput" (this is a good practice anyway). -\item In omitted text, "%" is still a comment character (hence it is possible -to comment out a slide or note environment). -\item A temporary file, "\jobname.tmp", is created (this is of no -consequence---just in case you wanted to know where it comes from). -\end{enumerate} - -The rest of this section deals with special considerations when omitting -everything outside the slide environments. - -If you might want to make a global change to one of the slide parameters after -the document preamble, you cannot include it in a slide environment because -the change will be local, and you cannot include it in the notes because the -change won't be processed when the notes are omitted. - -To get around this problem, an environment \E{allversions*} is provided. It is -processed even when notes are omitted, and any parameter changes or command -definitions made within the environment are global. Don't generate any output -within this environment. - -On a rare occasion you might want to include some text that should be typeset -even when the other notes are omitted (e.g., a list of the slides, or a cover -page). The \E{allversions} environment is provided for this purpose. - -If you do any serious hacking, you might want to add to the list of -environments that should be included with the "slidesonly" selection. Do this -with the command -\begin{MD} - \addtoslidelist{list} -\end{MD} -where <list> is a comma separated list of environments, without spaces. - -\section{The article format\label{S-article}} - -The \o{article} style option was described in Section \ref{S-twoup} as a way -to print your slides two-up. This option is also a good way to print your -notes. - -The \o{article} option gets its name because your document is typeset somewhat -like it would be with \LaTeX's "article" style. (It uses \LaTeX's standard -page parameters, but some of the default values are different.) It is also -called the article {\em format}; the slides format is what you get without the -\o{article} option. - -You probably don't want to use the \o{portrait} style option with the -\o{article} format except when you are only printing portrait slides. But you -are welcome to experiment. - -With the \o{notesonly} selection, you can make the notes as big as you want -using the \n\articlemag\ command (e.g., for easy reading while giving a -presentation). Just as in the \o{slides} format, the page parameters are -scaled at the beginning of the document so that they can be set with their -true dimensions in the preamble. - -The commands -\begin{MD} - \setartlength{cmd}{len}\\ - \addtoartlength{cmd}{len} -\end{MD} -are analogous to "\setslidelength" and "\addtoslidelength", but they scale the -lengths so that they end up at the specified size after magnification in the -"article" format. You never would use such a command in slide environments or -to set slide parameters, but you might use these in the notes if you were -planning on typesetting your notes with the "article" format rather than the -"slides" format. - -You can change the placement of slides in the \o{article} format using the -\begin{MD} - \slideplacement{name} -\end{MD} -command. Here are the valid placement names: -\begin{description} - \item[float] The slides are floated. This is the default with the \o{notes} -selection and the \o{portrait} option. - \item[float*] Like "float", but if the notes are printed in a two-column -format the slides extend across both columns (e.g., like "table" versus -"table*"). This is the default with the \o{notes} selection without the -\o{portrait} option. - \item[onepercol] Each slide is centered horizontally and vertically within a -single column. This is the default when only slides are printed and the -\o{portrait} option is used. - \item[twopercol] Each slide is centered horizontally, two or one per column, -depending on how many fit. This is the default when only slides are printed -and the \o{portrait} option is not used. - \item[here] Each slide is centered horizontally, separated from adjoining -text or other slides by the rubber length \N\slidesep. The default value of -\n\slidesep\ is "\intextskip". This is useful with the \o{notes} selection -when you want the slides to precede accompanying comments and when you do not -mind large spaces at the bottom of pages. - \item[here*] This is like "here*", but with "here*" the length \n\slidesep\ -is not lost when it falls at the beginning of a page or after a slide. -\end{description} - -If you want each slide environment to begin a new page (with any of the -selections), put the command -\begin{MD} - \slideclearpagetrue -\end{MD} -in the preamble. - -The \o{notesonly} selection has a starred version, \O{notesonly*}, which -produces a slide marker for each slide environment, like this one: -\begin{center} -\leavevmode -\vbox{% -\hrule height 1pt -\kern 8pt -\hbox to \linewidth{\hss \LARGE\bf Slide 4 \hss}% -\kern 8pt -\hrule height 1pt} -\end{center} - - -Commands that are irrelevant in the "article" format are simply ignored. The -idea is that it should be possible to switch back and forth between the two -formats without making any other changes in the document. However, this is not -entirely possible. Changing "\parindent" or "\textwidth" in the preamble -affects both formats. You can get around this using the \n\ifarticle\ -conditional. For example, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \ifarticle - blah blah - \else - blee blee - \fi -\end{LVerbatim} -The "\else" part is optional. - - -\section{Page styles} - -The page styles "empty", "plain", "headings" and "myheadings" work like in -\LaTeX's article style. There is also a page style "align" which puts "+" -signs in the corners, like in \SliTeX.\footnote{See question \ref{Pagestyle} -in Section \ref{tips} for suggestions on defining new page styles.} You can -change the size of the fonts used in headers and footers in the slides format -by setting the commands -\begin{MD} - \slideheadfont\\ - \slidefootfont -\end{MD} -to the desired size, using "\renewcommand" (but any explicit font declarations -in a page style override these commands). The default definition of these -commands is "\scriptsize". - - -\section{Other style options\label{options}} - -The style options described so far, "portrait", "article", "slidesonly", -"notes", and "notesonly", were designed specifically for "seminar.sty". There -are other such style options described elsewhere in this documentation: -"semrot" (page \pageref{o+semrot}), \o{semlayer} (page \pageref{o+semlayer}). -\o{semcolor} (page \pageref{o+semcolor}), "semhelv" (page -\pageref{o+semhelv}), "semlcmss" (page \pageref{o+semlcmss}), and "a4" (page -\pageref{o+a4}). - -Here are two more style options that are part of the "seminar.sty" package, -but that can be used with other document styles: -\begin{description} -\item[fancybox] "fancybox.sty" is specific to slides, but it contains commands -and documentation that are useful for making slides. - -\item[slidesec] This sets up some sectioning/heading commands for slides, and -lets you print a list of slides or a table of contents. See the file -"slidesec.sty" for details. -\end{description} - -It is impossible to predict, much less describe, the consequences of using all -the other available \LaTeX{} style option with each selection and format. -Since this document style is an extension of \LaTeX's "article" style, style -options and commands that do not work with \SliTeX{} may well work here. Just -about any style option that works with \LaTeX's "article" style will work with -the "article" format. When unsure of the effect of an option, just try it and -see for yourself what happens. - -\section{Overlays\label{S-overlays}} - -For overlays, you must use both the \O{semlayer} and \o{semcolor} style -options (see page \pageref{o+semcolor}). - -Overlays have two purposes. First, you can use overlays to gradually add -layers of information on a slide during a presentation. Second, you can use -overlays to make color layers; each layer is printed in black-on-white on -paper, and then you use some kind of color copying service to put each layer -on a transparency in a different color. This is not nearly as nice as having a -color printer or using a color printing service, but it's the next best thing. - -"seminar.sty" lets you make both types of overlays (and the main slide) from a -single slide environment. The command\footnote{You can also write -\begin{Ex} - "\begin{overlay}{<n>}" $\ldots$ "\end{overlay}" -\end{Ex}} -\begin{MD} - \overlay{n} -\end{MD} -puts whatever is in its scope (\TeX\ group) on overlay $n$, where -$n=0,\ldots,9$. Actually, overlay 0 refers to the main slide, but you might -use "\overlay{0}" because overlay commands can be nested. As implemented by -the "semcolor" style option, these overlay commands can be used just about -anywhere, including in math mode, tables, and around an included graphics file -(if it is a conforming EPS file, at least). Also, it is all right to use -non-consecutive overlay numbers. - -For color layers, you have to start by defining some colors using the command -\begin{MD} - \colorlayers{colors} -\end{MD} -<colors> should be a comma separated list of color names, without spaces, as -in -\begin{LVerbatim} - \colorlayers{red,green,blue} -\end{LVerbatim} -Then you can use the command "\red" just like the command \n\overlay"{<n>}"; -everything in its scope goes on a red color layer. - -The "\colorlayers" command obeys the usual rules on scope. You can use this -command any time, including in a slide environment. The command is cumulative, -meaning that previously defined color layers continue to exist. The command -was purposely defined so that it does not complain when a color name is -already defined; this makes it easier to switch from some other color system -to a layer system. However, you should be careful not to inadvertently -redefine some command that you need. Fortunately, there are no \TeX{} -primitives whose names are the names of colors. - -When you print out the slides, the main slide is printed, followed by each of -the color layers (if any) for the main slide. Then each of the overlays is -printed, together with each of its color layers. Only overlays or color layers -that are actually used (i.e., that are not empty) are printed. - -You can turn overlays and color layers on and off with the commands -\begin{MD} - \overlaystrue\\ - \overlaysfalse\\ - \layerstrue\\ - \layersfalse -\end{MD} -These commands can be used at any time, and they obey the usual scoping rules. -The default is for overlays to be active in the "slides" format and suppressed -in the "article" format. - -The counter \C{overlay} keeps track of the overlays. The default definition of -\N\theoverlay\ is: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \theslide-\alph{overlay} -\end{LVerbatim} -Overlays can be cross-referenced. - -The command \N\currlayer\ is set to the name of the current color layer. -\N\thelayer\ makes a label for layers; its default definition is: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \theoverlay-\currlayer -\end{LVerbatim} -Color layers cannot be cross-referenced. - -For example, if slide 7 has overlays 1 and 2 and colors "red" and "green", -then the main slide is numbered 7, followed by layers 7-red and 7-green, -followed by overlay 7-a, followed by layers 7-a-red and 7-a-green, followed by -overlay 7-b, followed by layers 7-b-red and 7-b-green. - -The caption used in the slide styles is \n\overlaylabel\ for overlays and -\N\layerlabel\ for layers. The defaults are, respectively, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \bf Overlay \theoverlay - \bf Layer \thelayer -\end{LVerbatim} - -By default the overlays and layers use the same page styles in the "slides" -format as their ``owner.'' You can specify special page styles with the -commands: -\begin{MD} - \overlaypagestyle{style}\\ - \layerpagestyle{style} -\end{MD} - -Finally, by default the overlays and layers use the same frame style as their -``owner.'' You can specify special frame styles with the commands: -\begin{MD} - \overlayframe[commands]{style}\\ - \layerframe[commands]{style} -\end{MD} - - -\part{Help\label{Help}} - -Road map: -\begin{itemize} - \item If you just want to figure out how to do something, check Section -\ref{tips}, ``Tips and tricks.'' - \item If you are trying to decipher an error message, check Section -\ref{errors}, ``Errors.'' - \item If you are trying to solve some system-dependent problem that has -arisen, check Section \ref{trouble}, ``Troubleshooting.'' - \item To convert \SliTeX\ files, see Section \ref{slitex}, ``Converting -\SliTeX\ files''. -\end{itemize} - -\section{Tips and tricks\label{tips}} - -\faq{How can I fit more material in the slides?} - -Or alternatively, make the little material you have fill up the slide. - -Let us count the ways: -\begin{enumerate} -\item Change the magnification with \n\slidesmag"{<n>}" (affects all the -slides). -\item Change the height and/or width of one or all the slides. -\item Use "\ptsize{<n>}". -\item Change \n\slidestretch. -\item Use the \n\raggedslides\ command, which changes the propensity to -hyphenate. -\end{enumerate} - -\faq{How do I include an Encapsulated PostScript figure?\label{EPS}} - -The only thing tricky about including EPS files is getting the size right. For -example, suppose the you want to include a postscript file in a slide using -the "epsf.sty" macros, and you want it to be 6 inches wide. Then this will do -the trick: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \setslidelength{\epsfxsize}{6in} - \epsffile{mypic.eps} -\end{LVerbatim} - -If you include the command -\begin{MD} - \espfslidesize -\end{MD} -(e.g., in the preamble), then "epsf.sty" will take care of scaling the size -for you, and so you can just set "\epsfxsize" and "\epsfysize" to their -magnified sizes (using "\setlength" rather than "\setslidelength"). Or you can -not set these parameters at all, and then the eps file appears at its natural -size on the slide. - -Either way, this will have the expected effect: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \setlength{\epsfysize}{.8\textheight} - \epsffile{mypic.eps} -\end{LVerbatim} - -"psfig.tex" does not handle magnification properly. By using magnified -dimensions, without "\setslidelength", as in -\begin{LVerbatim} - \psfig{file=mypic.eps,width=6in} -\end{LVerbatim} -the picture should appear correctly within a slide, but then it will not scale -properly if you try to use the \o{article} option or the \n\twoup\ command. -The solution, if using Rokicki's "dvips", is to use "epsf.sty" (written by the -man himself). - -\faq{How can I print just selected overlays, layers or pages of notes in the -{\tt slides} format?} - -The "\onlyslides" and "\notslides" commands affect only slides. If a slide is -omitted, so are all its overlays and color layers. To be more selective, you -have to use your dvi driver to select the pages to be printed. - -In the "slides" format, the page numbers recognized by dvi drivers correspond -to the numbers of the slides. This means that a slide and all the overlays, -layers and notes that correspond to that slide have the same page number. Some -drivers allow one to select occurrence $n$ of a page number. E.g., with -"dvips", -\begin{LVerbatim} - dvips -p2.1 -l2.4 myslides -\end{LVerbatim} -will print the first through fourth page of overlays or notes that follow -slide 2. - -If your dvi driver does not support such selection, and you would prefer that -the driver recognize physical page numbers, then put the command -\N\truepagenumbers\ in the preamble. - - -\faq{How do I define custom page styles?} -\label{Pagestyle} - -There is nothing special about defining new page styles in "seminar.sty". -However, to make it easier to do this in the preamble, the commands -\begin{MD} - \newpagestyle{style}{header}{footer}\\ - \renewpagestyle{style}{header}{footer} -\end{MD} -are provided.\footnote{% - You can also use the macros in "fancyheadings.sty", which is available from -various archives. However, you have to set the pagestyle {\em after} -"\begin{document}". -Otherwise, the dimensions get screwed up. If using the \o{slidesonly} -selection, then you also need to enclose the "\pagestyle" command in -an \e{allversions*} environment. E.g., -\begin{LVerbatim} - \begin{allversions*} - \pagestyle{fancy} - \end{allversions*} -\end{LVerbatim}} - -<style> is the name of the page style, and <header> is the header, and -<footer> is the footer. These can only be used for simple page styles that are -the same for odd and even pages, and that do not do anything special with -section marks. - -Headers and footers are set in an "\hbox" the width of the page -("\textwidth"). You can use stretchable space such as "\hspace*{\fill}" or -"\hfil" to center some information or put it flush against the margins. See -the definitions of page styles in "latex.tex" and "article.sty" for examples. - -Here is an example: Professor Starr wants lots of information in the headers -and footers for the slides, and so she defines the page style -"mypagestyle":\footnote{{\tt\string\thedate} is set with the {\tt\string\date} -command.} -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newpagestyle{mypagestyle}% - {\sl Big U \hfil \thedate \hfil \thepage}% - {\hfil File \jobname.tex; printed \today\hfil} -\end{LVerbatim} -Prof.\ Starr wants to use the standard "headings" page style for notes and the -"mypagestyle" page style for slides, and she wants overlays to just have the -overlay number. Therefore, she defines another page style for the overlays: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newpagestyle{myoverlays}{\hfil \thepage}{} -\end{LVerbatim} -and she puts -\begin{LVerbatim} - \pagestyle{headings} - \slidepagestyle{mypagestyle} - \overlaypagestyle{myoverlays} -\end{LVerbatim} -in the preamble. - -\faq{How do I change a parameter only for the {\tt slides} format?} -\label{conditionals} - -The conditionals -\begin{MD} - \ifarticle\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\ - \ifslidesonly\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\ - \ifnotes\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\ - \ifnotesonly\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\ - \ifportrait\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi" -\end{MD} -allow one to select for what versions material is to be processed. "\ifnotes" -is true if and only if the "notes" selection is in effect, and so on. The -"\else" clause is optional. See {\em The \TeX book}, Chapter 20, for more -information about using conditionals. - -For example, the first line below sets the slide rotation to "right" in the -"article" format only. The second line changes the page style for the "notes" -and "notesonly" selections and "article" format: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \ifarticle\sliderotation{right}\fi - \ifarticle\ifslidesonly\else\pagestyle{myheadings}\fi\fi -\end{LVerbatim} - -\faq{Why does extra space get inserted at the top of a slide when I begin the -slide with a color or overlay command (when using the \o{semcolor} option)?} - -Color and overlay commands with the "semcolor" option use "\special"'s. \TeX{} -adds the space "\parskip" between the "\special"'s and the first material in -the slide. - -Here is the workaround: If that material is an ordinary paragraph, put the -command "\leavevmode" just after the color or overlay command. In other cases, -if you are sure this is the problem, put "\vskip-\parskip" just before the -color or overlay command. - -\section{Errors\label{errors}} - -There are several errors that identify themselves as being from "seminar.sty", -but the error messages are so self-explanatory that that there is no need to -describe them here. Instead, this section explains a few especially cryptic -\TeX{} error messages that can arise when using "seminar.sty". These errors -may also arise for reasons that are not particular to the "seminar.sty" -macros. See your favorite \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} manuals for more help in -debugging your documents. - -\error"! File ended while scanning use of \next." - -You are missing an "\end{document}" on the main file or an "\endinput" on a -file that is input. - - -\error"! File ended within \read." - -You may have an unmatched curly brace following "\begin{slide}" on the same -line. See Section \ref{omit}. - - -\error"! Paragraph ended before \begin@slide was complete." - -You have not specified the optional argument for the "slide" or "slide*" -environment correctly (see Section \ref{slidedim}), or the first character in -a slide environment is a "[" (put a pair "{}" of braces before the "["). - -\section{Troubleshooting\label{trouble}} -\setcounter{faq}{0} - -\faq{A few slides do not come out two-up with the \o{article} option.} - -First, read Section \ref{S-twoup} carefully. If the slides still do not come -out twoup, it might be that there is extraneous output between the slides. Try -putting the commands -\begin{LVerbatim} - \slideplacement{here*} - \setlength{\slidesep}{8pt plus 1fill} -\end{LVerbatim} -in the preamble ("8pt" should be one-half the minimum distance between -slides). If this solves the problem, look for the extraneous output, or just -leave those commands in the preamble. - - -\faq{What kind of incompatibilities are there between {\tt seminar.sty} and -other macros?} - -Of course, whenever you load macros that are not part of the standard \LaTeX{} -distribution and that were not designed to work with "seminar.sty", problems -may arise because of name conflicts. What are listed here are changes made to -\LaTeX{} commands that may conflict with other macros that also redefine these -command. The problems listed here are very unlikely to occur, however, unless -you have a habit of seriously hacking the standard \LaTeX{} macro files. - -\begin{enumerate} -\item This style modifies the definitions of the \LaTeX{} primitive -"\document". It generally will not be upset by, nor will it void, -modifications to "\document" made before "seminar.sty" is input. However, -subsequent modifications of "\document" may cause problems. - -\item "xcomment.sty", which is input by "seminar.sty" with the "slidesonly" -selection, modifies the definition of "\end" within included environments. -This is generally compatible with modifications to "\end" made outside -environments, but may conflict with modifications to "\end" made inside -environments. -\end{enumerate} - -\faq{Why are the landscape slides displayed sideways and the portrait slides -displayed upside down on my previewer?} - -This document style makes frequent use of landscape mode. Some DVI-to-PS -converters, such as older versions of Rokicki's "dvips", use their own -PostScript macros to print a landscape document, rather than simply -instructing PostScript to use landscape mode. -If the PostScript output of such a converter is viewed using a PostScript -previewer that does not allow you to choose the orientation of the display, -the output will be positioned correctly on the page, but the page will always -be displayed in portrait mode. When viewing slides without the "portrait" -option, the landscape slides will be sideways, and the portrait slides will be -upside-down! - -There is nothing this style can do to coerce the page to be displayed in -landscape mode. There are various ways to minimize neck strain, however: -\begin{enumerate} -\item The direction in which the portrait slides are rotated can be reversed, -so that they end up right-side-up. Just put -\begin{LVerbatim} - \sliderotation{right} -\end{LVerbatim} -before the beginning of the document (assuming that you are using rotation -macros). -\item You can also get the portrait slides to be displayed right-side-up by -using the "portrait" style option (Section \ref{options}). -\item In the "article" format, the document is typeset in portrait mode -(unless the "portrait" option is used), and so the landscape slides are -right-side-up. You can use this format when composing and proof-reading the -slides. -\end{enumerate} - -\faq{Why is my dvi driver soooo slow?} - -Probably it cannot find the right font bitmaps, and so it is either -automatically generating new ones, or it is scaling the ones it can find. -Either way, as long as you can somehow generate the missing font bitmaps, this -problem is transitory. See Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for details. - -\faq{Why does \TeX{} complain about missing circle fonts?} - -Older versions of the NFSS use the names "circle10" and "circlew10" for the -\LaTeX circle fonts, instead of the otherwise standard names "lcircle10" and -"lcirclew10". You can copy your ".pk" and ".tfm" files to the new names, or -get a new version of the NFSS. - -\section{Converting \SliTeX\ files}\label{slitex} - -"seminar.sty" can do everything \SliTeX\ can do, and much -more\footnote{However, color layers and overlays require PSTricks and a -PostScript printer.} Here is a brief and incomplete description of how to do -with "seminar.sty" what you can do with \SliTeX, and how to convert \SliTeX\ -files. - -\begin{itemize} - \item Use "seminar" as your document style, instead of "slides". - - \item Run \LaTeX\ or \AmS-\LaTeX, instead of \SliTeX. - - \item With "seminar.sty", the preamble and slides can all go in the same -file. - - \item The default in "seminar.sty" is to get landscape slides. If you want -to convert a \SliTeX\ file containing portrait slides, add the "portrait" -style option, and replace your "slide" environments by "slide*" environments. - - \item With "seminar.sty", notes do not need to go in a separate environment. -To convert a \SliTeX\ file containing "note" environments, define a note -environment that does nothing: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \newenvironment{note}{}{} -\end{LVerbatim} - - \item For color layers: - \begin{itemize} - \item Use the "\colorlayers" command instead of the "\colors" command. - \item Delete the argument to the "slide" and "slide*" environments that -lists the color layers. - \item Include the \o{semlayer} style option. - \end{itemize} - - \item "seminar.sty" does not use separate environments for overlays: - \begin{itemize} - \item Remove the "overlay" environments. - \item Replace "\invisible" commands by "\overlay{1}", "\overlay{2}", etc. - \item Include the \o{semlayer} style option. - \end{itemize} - - \item To actually produce the overlays and color layers, you have to have -PSTricks and a PostScript printer, and you must include the \o{semcolor} style -option. - - \item Use \n\onlyslides"{<list>}" and \n\onlynotestoo\ instead of -"\onlynotes". -\end{itemize} - - -\begingroup -\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{}% -\def\thepart{Appendices:} -\part{Configuration} -\endgroup -\begingroup -\def\thepart{} -\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices:\hspace{1em}Configuration} -\endgroup -\appendix - -Before reading this appendix, you should follow the installation instructions -in the file "sem-read.me" that is distributed with "seminar.sty". - -\section{The short story about fonts}\label{short-fonts} - -"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX{} style, and you can use whatever fonts that are -compatible with \LaTeX\ (or \AmS-\LaTeX). However, you are likely to want to -use special fonts with "seminar.sty"; see Appendix \ref{fonts} for help. -Furthermore, you are likely to want to use fonts in sizes that are larger than -the standard sizes; see Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for help. - -But if you don't want to read these appendices, you can just use whatever -\LaTeX\ fonts you know how to use (e.g., the standard Computer Modern fonts). -To be sure you need only standard font magnifications:\footnote{This is not a -consideration if you are using only PostScript or other scalable fonts.} -\begin{itemize}\label{font-res} - \item Don't use the "11pt" or "12pt" style options (or the \n\ptsize{} -command). - \item Don't change the document magnification (or only use 0--4 magsteps). - \item Don't use any font size larger than "\large". - \item Don't use the \n\twoup\ command. -\end{itemize} - -\section{Choosing fonts\label{fonts}} - -So that you can use different fonts for the notes and the slides (if you -want), the command "\slidefonts" is invoked at the beginning of every slide -environment. Define it to set up any special fonts for the slides. - -Here are the font configurations that come ready-to-use with "seminar.sty". -You might also use these as a starting point for your own configurations. -\begin{enumerate} -\item You can just use the regular old Computer Modern fonts that you probably -grew up on. For this, you don't have to do anything at all. Ain't that easy? -But see the next section about font bitmaps. - -\item The \O{semhelv} style option sets up the PostScript Helvetica text fonts -for the slides. The Computer Modern fonts are still used for math and for the -notes with the \o{article} format. You need a PostScript printer, a dvi-to-ps -driver that supports PostScript fonts (e.g., Rokicki's "dvips"), and the New -Font Selection Scheme. You should also check the font file names used in -"semhelv.sty", and change them if necessary to match the names on your system. - -This combination of fonts is highly recommended because sans serif fonts look -good for slides, Helvetica is a resident font in just about all PostScript -printers, and the fonts are scalable and thus there is no problem of needing -new bitmaps. - -\item The \O{semlcmss} style option sets up the \SliTeX\ sans serif fonts for -the slides, and uses the Computer Modern fonts for notes with the \o{article} -format. The \SliTeX\ fonts are ugly, but they might be the only usable sans -serif font you have on your system and you are really dying for that kind of -font. Also, they usually come ready for printing magnified documents, and so -you won't need too many new font bitmaps. You must have the New Font Selection -Scheme. "semlcmss" uses -\begin{LVerbatim} - \slidesmag{4} - \ptsize{10} -\end{LVerbatim} -Deviating from this will increase the need for new font bitmaps. -\end{enumerate} - -The New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS) mentioned above is a macro package for -\LaTeX{} that greatly simplifies using non-standard fonts. The NFSS was -written by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf, and is available from various -archives, including: -\begin{center} -"ftp.uni-stuttgart.de" -\end{center} -It is far easier to take the 10 minutes or so that are required (in theory, at -least) to install the NFSS, than it is to try to muck around with \LaTeX's -font primitives. - - -\section{Font bitmaps\label{bitmaps}} - -If you are only using PostScript or other scalable fonts, or if you obey the -restrictions listed on page \pageref{font-res}, then you can ignores this -appendix. - -To use "seminar.sty", you may need font bitmap sizes that are not currently -found on your system. This section describes how to avoid this and what to do -about it. First, a few paragraphs about magnification and font bitmaps. - -\TeX's Metafont fonts are designed for a type size, such as 5pt. Most font -families are available at least in the sizes 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt and 10pt. -Some are also available in the sizes 12pt and 17pt (and others), but often any -size above 10pt is obtained by scaling the 10pt fonts. Table \ref{font-mag} -lists the possible magnifications for fonts, depending on which option you are -using ("10pt", "11pt" or "12pt"), and depending on the \LaTeX{} type size -declaration that is in effect (e.g., "\small"). The magnifications are given -in magsteps, which is \TeX's standard unit for font magnifications. $n$ -magsteps means a magnification of $1.2^n$. - -\begin{table} -\hrule height 1pt\relax -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{l|c|c|c|} -\multicolumn{1}{l}{size} & -\multicolumn{1}{c}{default (10pt)} & - \multicolumn{1}{c}{11pt option} & - \multicolumn{1}{c}{12pt option}\\ -\cline{2-4} "\tiny" & 0 & 0 & 0\\ -\cline{2-4} "\scriptsize" & 0 & 0 & 0\\ -\cline{2-4} "\footnotesize" & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ -\cline{2-4} "\small" & 0 & 0 & 1/2 \\ -\cline{2-4} "\normalsize" & 0 & 1/2 & 1 \\ -\cline{2-4} "\large" & 1 & 1 & 2 \\ -\cline{2-4} "\Large" & 2 & 2 & 3 \\ -\cline{2-4} "\LARGE" & 3 & 3 & 4\\ -\cline{2-4} "\huge" & 4 & 4 & 5\\ -\cline{2-4} "\Huge" & 5 & 5 & 5\\ -\cline{2-4} -\end{tabular} - -\caption{Font magnification in magsteps ($n$ means a magnification of $1.2^n$) -for a font that is available in 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt and 10pt -sizes.\label{font-mag}} -\end{center} -\hrule height 1pt\relax -\end{table} - -Both the "article" and the "slides" formats may also magnify the document. By -default, the magnification of the "slides" format is 4 magsteps, and the -magnification of the "article" format is 0. To find the total font -magnification, add the magnification listed in the table to the magnification -of the document. E.g., in the "slides" format with the "12pt" option (or the -command "\ptsize{12}" at the beginning of a slide), the "\large" command may -invoke fonts that have a magnification of up to 7 magsteps. - -Most systems have font bitmaps for 0, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 magsteps. If you -obey the restrictions listed on page \pageref{font-res}, then you will only -need fonts in these standard magnifications. However, if you want to use other -font magnifications, then check with your system administrator to determine -which of the following applies to you (or just plunge ahead and see what -happens): -\begin{enumerate} -\item If you have Metafont and "dvips" or some other driver that automatically -generates font bitmaps as needed, and if this feature is enabled, then you -will simply notice that it takes a long time to print documents at first, -because the driver has to wait for the new font bitmaps to be made. -Eventually, you will have generated all the extra bitmaps you need, and this -delay will go away. -\item If you have Metafont, but your dvi driver does not automatically -generate needed bitmaps, then you just need to keep track of what font bitmaps -you are missing as you use "seminar.sty" and occasionally run Metafont to make -them. You will also notice a delay when a font bitmap is missing, because your -driver will probably scale the closest bitmap it finds, and this can take time -on some systems. -\item If you do not even have Metafont, then you have to try to get by without -the extra bitmaps. Scaled fonts look lousy, but an occasional scaled font in a -heading is not so bad. -\end{enumerate} - -Of course, PostScript and other scalable fonts do not present any problem, and -so it is a good idea to use these as much as possible. The Computer Modern -fonts are available from Blue Sky Research in PostScript Type I format. If you -do not have PostScript versions of the CM fonts, and you instead use other -PostScript fonts for text, then you are likely to still need bitmapped fonts -for mathematics. However, since mathematics is usually set at "\normalsize" or -smaller, this is not a big problem. - -If you are installing "seminar.sty" on a multi-user system, then hopefully you -will make the needed fonts available. - -\section{Color} - -You can use whatever color commands you ordinarily use with \LaTeX. You might -try the \o{semcolor} style option, which lets you use the PSTricks color -commands for printing on a color PostScript printer. The \o{semcolor} option -combined with the \o{semlayer} option (see Section \ref{S-overlays}) lets you -print color layers. - -\section{Landscape printing and slide rotation\label{S-landscape}} - -If your dvi driver supports a "\special" for landscape printing, then you can -define \N\printlandscape\ in the preamble of your document to invoke this -command. E.g., for "dvips" put the line -\begin{LVerbatim} - \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\special{landscape}} -\end{LVerbatim} -in the preamble. Otherwise, "seminar.sty" will display a message reminding you -to print your document in landscape mode, when appropriate. - -You can print both landscape and portrait slides in one shot if you can rotate -the portrait slides when printing in landscape mode or the landscape slides -when printing in portrait mode. If you are using a PostScript printer, you -probably are using a dvi driver that supports rotation; otherwise, you -probably are not. Here are suggestions for setting up rotation: -\begin{itemize} -\item The \o{semcolor} option provides an interface to the rotation macros in -PSTricks (see Appendix \ref{S-semcolor}); it works with many popular dvi-to-ps -drivers. - -\item If you are using Rokicki's "dvips" and want rotation but do not want to -load the entire PSTricks package, then use the \O{semrot} option instead of -the \o{semcolor} option. - -\item If the \o{semcolor} and \o{semrot} options do not work for you, but you -have your own rotation macros, then you have to define the commands -\begin{MD} - \leftsliderotation\\ - \rightsliderotation -\end{MD} -so that they rotate something left and right, respectively. For example, -\begin{LVerbatim} - \renewcommand{\leftsliderotation}[1]{\rotateleft{#1}} -\end{LVerbatim} -\end{itemize} - -In any case, you can determine the direction of rotation using -\begin{MD} - \sliderotation{direction} -\end{MD} -where valid directions are "none", "left" and "right". The default is "left". - -By default, the headers and footers aren't rotated, but you can switch between -rotating and not rotating the headers with the commands: -\begin{MD} - \rotateheaderstrue\\ - \rotateheadersfalse -\end{MD} - -\section{The semcolor style option\label{S-semcolor}} - -The \O{semcolor} option sets up an interface between "seminar.sty" and the -PSTricks package. PSTricks is a collection of PostScript macros for \TeX. It -works with Rokicki's "dvips", and several other dvi-to-ps drivers. You can -probably get the PSTricks package from wherever you obtained "seminar.sty", or -check the archives listed in the PSTricks read-me file, "read-me.pst", which -is distributed with "seminar.sty". - -What the \o{semcolor} style option gives you, compared to just using the -PSTricks package, is: -\begin{description} -\item[Color] A small patch to make the PSTricks color commands more robust in -slides. -\item[Rotation] The rotations "left" and "right" are defined. "left" is the -default. -\item[Framing] The frame styles "scplain" (using "\psframebox"), "scdouble" -(using "\psdblframebox") and "scshadow" (using "\psshadowbox"). -\item[Overlays] Overlays and layers, when used in conjunction with the -\o{semlayer} option. -\end{description} - -\section{A4 and other paper sizes\label{S-papersizes}} - -Use the \O{a4} option when using A4 paper. Note that this option does not -correspond to an independent file. - -If you want to configure seminar.sty for A4 paper by default (without having -to include style options), then you can do one of the following: -\begin{enumerate} - - \item Add the following line to "seminar.con" (see Appendix -\ref{S-configfile}): -\begin{LVerbatim} - \input{sem-a4.sty} -\end{LVerbatim} - - \item Add the following lines to "seminar.con" (these lines are just the -contents of "sem-a4.sty"): -\begin{LVerbatim} - \def\paperwidth{210mm} - \def\paperheight{297mm} - \input sem-page.sty - \slidewidth 222mm - \slideheight 152mm -\end{LVerbatim} - - \item Create a file such as "mysem.sty", to be used as a document {\em -style} (rather than style {\em option}), with the following lines: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \def\paperwidth{210mm} - \def\paperheight{297mm} - \input seminar.sty - \slidewidth 222mm - \slideheight 152mm -\end{LVerbatim} - -\end{enumerate} - -For other paper sizes, you can create a style option by modifying -"sem-a4.sty". Then any of the options described above is available to you, -(with the appropriate parameter values). However, this will give satisfactory -results only for paper sizes that are close to A4 or 8.5in by 11in. - -Note that for any paper size, even 8.5in by 11in, the page parameters that are -set this way are just suggested defaults, and most people will want to -customize them. Because of the variety of ways in which "seminar.sty" -documents can be printed, this is a little more complex than with most -document styles. Examine "sem-page.sty" to see what page parameters need to be -set, and when. - -\section{Configuration file\label{S-configfile}} - -You can put customizations to "seminar.sty" in a file named "seminar.con". -This file is optional. It is loaded by "seminar.sty" if it exists, {\em -before} loading the style option files. E.g., "seminar.con" might contain the -following lines: -\begin{LVerbatim} - \input semhelv.sty - \input semcolor.sty - \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\special{landscape}} - \endinput -\end{LVerbatim} - -\clearpage -\PrintUserIndex - -\end{document} -%% END sem-user.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 365e26d5b85..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN semsamp1.tex -% -% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later). -% -% Try this with and without the article option: - -\documentstyle[fancybox,article]{seminar} - -\def\printlandscape{\special{landscape}} % Works with dvips. - -\articlemag{1} - -%\twoup % Try me. - -\newpagestyle{327}% - {Economics 327 \hspace{\fill}\rightmark \hspace{\fill}\thepage}{}% -\pagestyle{327} - -\markright{Choice under uncertainty} - -\slideframe{Oval} - -\newcommand{\heading}[1]{% - \begin{center} - \large\bf - \shadowbox{#1}% - \end{center} - \vspace{1ex minus 1ex}} - -\newcommand{\BF}[1]{{\bf #1:}\hspace{1em}\ignorespaces} - -\begin{document} - - -\begin{slide} -\heading{A heading} - -One thing this example illustrates is how the {\tt article} style option is -good for printing slides two-up, for distribution to a seminar audience or -class, or just for proofreading. - -\BF{Definition} -$p$ (weakly) first-order stochastically dominates $q$ if for every $\bar z\in -Z$, -\[ - p(z\leq \bar z) \leq q(z\leq \bar z) -\] -\end{slide} - - -\begin{slide} -\heading{Problems with stochastic dominance as a DT} - -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{|r|l|}\hline - $z$ & $p(z)$\\ \hline - \$999 & .01\\ \hline - \$1,000,000 & .99 \\ \hline - \end{tabular}% - \hspace{1cm}% - \begin{tabular}{|r|l|}\hline - $z$ & $q(z)$\\ \hline - \$1,000 & 1\\ \hline - \end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{slide} - -\begin{slide} -\heading{Candidate Theory \#3: Expected utility} - -Let $Z$ be an arbitrary set of outcomes. Let $u:Z\rightarrow R$ be a utility -representation of the DM's preferences over the elements of $Z$ as certain -outcomes. (I.e., $u(y)\geq u(z)$ iff $y \geq z$.) - -\end{slide} - - -\begin{slide} -\heading{Expected utility \& the St.\ Petersburg Paradox} - -This can get around even St.\ Petersburg Paradox, because we don't require -that utility be linear in money: - -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular}{r|c|c|c|c|c}\cline{2-6} - Prize & \$2 & \$4 & \$8 & \$16 & $\ldots$\\ \cline{2-6} - $u(z)=\log_2(z)$ & 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & $\ldots$ \\ \cline{2-6} - Prob. & 1/2 & 1/4 & 1/8 & 1/16 & $\ldots$\\ \cline{2-6} - \end{tabular} -\end{center} - -Expected utility is $\sum_{k=1}^\infty k/2^k = 2$, and so lottery gives same -expected utility as getting \$4 for sure. -\end{slide} - - -\end{document} -%% END semsamp1.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 2d54fa570db..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,285 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex -% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later). -% -% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides. -% Choose one of the following to print them out: -% - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option. -% - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option. -% - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble. -% To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and -% put \portraitonly in the preamble. -% -% -\documentstyle[% - slidesonly,% Try notes or notesonly instead. - %notes,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes. - %notesonly,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides. - %semcolor,% Try me if using PSTricks. - %semrot,% Try me if using Rokicki's dvips. - %semhelv,% Try me if using a PostScript printer. - %article,% Try me. - %portrait,% Try me. - %sem-a4,% Try me if using A4 paper. - semlayer% This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to - ]{seminar} % actually see the overlays. - -\slidesmag{5} -\articlemag{1} - -%\twoup % Try me for twoup printing. - -%\portraitonly % To print only portrait slides -%\landscapeonly % To print only landscape slides - -%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: The slides are omitted. -%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: Only these slides are included. -%\onlynotestoo %Try me: For selecting notes as well. - -\colorlayers{red,blue} % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option, - % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color. - -%\overlaysfalse % Suppress overlays with semcolor option. -%\layersfalse % Suppress color layers with semcolor option. - -\rotateheaderstrue % Try this out if using rotation macros. - - -\title{Example for seminar.sty} -\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta} -\date{July 21, 1991} - -\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}} -\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}} - -\newpagestyle{MH}% - {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{} -\pagestyle{MH} - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect. - -\begin{slide} - \ifslidesonly % Title slide only for slidesonly selection. - \maketitle - \addtocounter{slide}{-1} - \slidepagestyle{empty} - \fi -\end{slide} - -This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the -features of seminar.sty. - - The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone. -Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for -graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information -overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top) - - A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of -information overload. More generally, information overload always means too -much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean? -(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all -the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim -that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about -informaton overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by -some criterion. - -\begin{slide}\label{too_much}% -\begin{center} - \large\bf - Information overload = ``Too much'' information -\end{center} -\smallskip - -\begin{verse} \bf\tt - You have 134 unread messages:\\ - Do you want to read them now? -\end{verse} - -\begin{enumerate} - {\overlay2 - \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.} - \item People {\em should} receive less information. - \end{enumerate} -\end{slide} - - In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses. -(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is -overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can -process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if -there is some mechanism that makes the senders and/or receivers better off by -restricting the flow of information. This latter notion of information -overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by -``better off.'' - -\begin{slide*}\label{overload} -\ptsize{12} - -\begin{itemize}{\overlay1 - \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is -some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders -and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.' - - \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism -that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers -better off by restricting the flow of information. -\end{itemize} - -\end{slide*} - -(\sref{questions}) - The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in -a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders -better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts -communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders -and receivers depends on the cost of communication. - - Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process. -But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information -than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every -article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused -and ruffling through the papers. - - -\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions} -\heading{Questions} - -\begin{itemize} - {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?} - \item What mechanims make the receivers and senders better off? - \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the -cost of communication? -\end{itemize} -\end{slide} - - -However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find -that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common -for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may -incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is -valuable to us. - -More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much -information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when -we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their -contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the -first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the -important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed. - -\begin{slide} \label{informed} -\begin{center} - {\bf Being more informed} \par - \smallskip - is always better,\par - \medskip - \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par - \smallskip - {\bf receiving more information}} -\end{center} -\end{slide} - - Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I -present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to -ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most -want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with -information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that -sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the -sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes. -But when there are more senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the -messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't -take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may -collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar}) - -There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited -capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we -receive more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons. -(\sref{akbar}) - -\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt} - {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support -$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for -$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.} -\medskip - - {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium -for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt} -\begin{enumerate} - \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports -$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$. - \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports -$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and - \begin{enumerate} - \item $n=2$; or - \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct -$i,j,k$; or - \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$. -\end{enumerate} -\end{enumerate}} -\end{slide} - - If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages, -then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the -flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers -to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the -messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the -receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers, -then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the -receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off. - - The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24) -= 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks -described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the -Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1 -\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be -the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using $q$ processors in -$c$ cycles that have the following properties: - -\begin{slide*}\label{architectures} -\heading{Architecture} - -\begin{center} -\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in} -\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0) -\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,6.5){1} -\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,6.0){2} -\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(3.6,6.0){3} -\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}} -\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,5.5){4} -\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.6,6.0){5} -\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}} -\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.6,5.5){6} -\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}} -\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(3.6,5.5){7} -\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,5.0){8} -\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\end{picture} -\end{center} -\end{slide*} - -Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I -present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to -ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most -want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with -information. - -Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will -prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has -an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more -senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other -senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost -into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the -receiver. (\sref{architectures}) - -\end{document} -%% END semsamp2.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty deleted file mode 100644 index eff544ef555..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,280 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN tvz-code.sty -%% 93/04/01 -%% Tim Van Zandt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Lousy hacks for typesetting the documented code for the -%% seminar.sty and PSTricks packages. - -\input tvz-hax.sty -\input doc.sty % Tested with v1.7k -\input art11.sty - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAGE PARAMETERS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Paragraphs are marked by space rather than indentation: -\parindent 0pt -\parskip 4pt plus 1pt minus 1pt - -% Textwidth just wide enough for 78 characters of code. -\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\small\tt f} -\textwidth 78\wd\@tempboxa -\oddsidemargin\paperwidth\relax -\advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth -\divide\oddsidemargin 2 -\advance\oddsidemargin -1in -\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\tiny 999\ } -\advance\oddsidemargin\wd\@tempboxa -\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin - -\if@twoside - \advance\oddsidemargin .3in - \advance\evensidemargin -.3in -\fi - -% No headers, 1in top margin -\topmargin 0pt -\headheight 0pt -\headsep 0pt - -% Total bottom margin 1in, text height 9in -\textheight 9in -\footskip .625in - -% Now adjust for different paper size: -\@tempdima=\paperheight -\advance\@tempdima-11in -\divide\@tempdima 2 -\advance\topmargin \@tempdima - -% Marginal notes always on left. -\marginparwidth 3.5cm -\marginparsep .5cm -\reversemarginpar - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MACROCODE PATCH FOR SHORT META %%%%%%%%%%% - -\expandafter\def\expandafter\macrocode\expandafter{% - \expandafter\DeleteShortMeta - \macrocode} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DOC PREAMBLE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\newbox\junkbox -\def\DocInput#1{% - \MakePercentIgnore - \setbox\junkbox=\hbox\bgroup - \input{#1}% - \MakePercentComment} -\let\EndDocPreamble\egroup - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% VERBATIM %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Use fancybox.sty's LVerbatim environment. Each line should contain -% percent plus three spaces (or other char), including blank lines. E.g., -% \begin{LVerbatim} -% foo -% bar -% \end{LVerbatim} - -\def\EveryVerbatimLine#1#2#3#4{} -\begingroup - \catcode`\%=12 - \catcode`\ =\active - \global\EndVerbatimTokens{% } -\endgroup -\AltGetVerbatim - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INDEXING %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Things are faster without \MakeIndex - -\def\MakeIndex{\makeindex\EnableCrossrefs} -\DisableCrossrefs - -% Use \codelabel[int]{foo} to label last line of code plus int. -% E.g., to label first and then last line of some code: -% \codelabel[1]{foo} -% \begin{macrocode} -% foo -% bar -% \end{macrocode} -% \codelabel{foo} - -\def\codelabel{\@ifnextchar[{\@codelabel}{\@codelabel[0]}} -\def\@codelabel[#1]#2{% - \@bsphack - \begingroup - \advance\c@CodelineNo #1 - \def\@currentlabel{\the\c@CodelineNo}% - \label{#2}% - \endgroup - \@esphack} - -% Definitions in code are indexed by page number, but other occurences -% are indexed by the line of code. - -\CodelineIndex -\def\SpecialMainPageIndex#1{% - {\let\special@index\index\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}} -\renewcommand{\theCodelineNo}{{\rm\tiny\arabic{CodelineNo}}} - -% Index numbers for main definitions are set in bold rather than underlined. - -\def\main#1{{\bf #1}} - -% two column index - -\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} - -% Customize index prologue: - -\def\index@prologue{% - \section*{Index}\markboth{Index}{Index}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}% - The {\bf bold} numbers denote the pages where the entries are defined, - and all other numbers indicate the {\em lines of code} where - the entries are used.} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MACRO %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% A change to the macro environment; prints macro names within the margins -% of the text, instead of as marginal notes. Use one \macro command, -% with comma separated macro names. - -\newif\iffirst@macroname -\newif\ifnestedmacro - -\def\macro{% - \ifnum\macro@level=\z@ - \def\next{\MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@}% - \else - \def\next{\@latexerr{Nested \string\begin{macro}}\@eha - \endgroup\end{macro}\macro@level=\z@\begin{macro}} - \fi - \next} -\def\m@cro@#1{% - \first@macronametrue - \m@@cro@@#1,\@nil,} -\def\m@@cro@@#1,{% - \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{\@nil}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \let\next\finishm@@cro@@ - \else - {\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne\SpecialMainPageIndex{#1}\nobreak}% - \DoNotIndex{#1}% - \iffirst@macroname - \edef\saved@macronames{\string#1}% - \first@macronamefalse - \else - \def\comma{\noexpand\comma}% - \edef\saved@macronames{\saved@macronames\comma\string#1}% - \fi - \let\next\m@@cro@@ - \fi - \next} -\def\finishm@@cro@@{% - \advance\macro@level\@ne - \def\comma{{\rm, }}% - \ListMacroNames{\saved@macronames}} - -\let\endmacro\relax - -\def\ListMacroNames{% - \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.25ex plus -.5ex minus-.2ex}% - {1.3ex plus.2ex}{\csname reset@font\endcsname\large\tt}*} - -\MacroIndent 0pt - -\def\MacroFont{\small\tt} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DoNot Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\DoNotIndex{\ ,\!,\[,\\,\],\^,\`,\{,\},\~} -\DoNotIndex{\@warning,\active} -\DoNotIndex{\begingroup,\catcode,\char,\csname,\def,\do} -\DoNotIndex{\docdate,\dospecials,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endgroup} -\DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\filedate,\fileversion} -\DoNotIndex{\gdef,\if,\ifcat} -\DoNotIndex{\ifx,\immediate,\lccode,\let} -\DoNotIndex{\lowercase,\next,\noexpand} -\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\the} -\DoNotIndex{\toks@,\typeout,\write} -\DoNotIndex{\@M,\@arabic,\@author,\@auxout,\@bsphack,\@car,\@date} -\DoNotIndex{\@dblarg,\@dblfloat,\@eha,\@empty,\@esphack,\@evenfoot} -\DoNotIndex{\@evenhead,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@gtempa,\@ifnextchar} -\DoNotIndex{\@ifundefined,\@ixpt,\@latexerr,\@listI,\@listi,\@listii} -\DoNotIndex{\@listiii,\@listiv,\@listv,\@listvi,\@makefnmark,\@mkboth} -\DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\@mne,\@nil,\@normalsize,\@oddfoot} -\DoNotIndex{\@oddhead,\@tempa,\@tempb,\@tempc,\@tempd} -\DoNotIndex{\@tempdima,\@testfalse,\@testtrue,\test@member} -\DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@title} -\DoNotIndex{\@topnum,\@viiipt,\@viipt,\@vipt,\@vpt,\@xiipt} -\DoNotIndex{\@xipt,\@xpt,\@xivpt,\@xviipt,\@xxpt,\@xxvpt} -\DoNotIndex{\addcontentsline} -\DoNotIndex{\advance,\aftergroup,\baselinestretch,\begin} -\DoNotIndex{\belowdisplayshortskip,\belowdisplayskip,\bf,\bgroup} -\DoNotIndex{\box,\c@@page,\c@page,\c@secnumdepth,\clearpage,\columnsep} -\DoNotIndex{\columnwidth,\copy,\dimen@,\dimen@i,\dimen@ii,\divide} -\DoNotIndex{\dp,\ds@article,\ds@notes,\ds@notesonly} -\DoNotIndex{\ds@slidesonly,\egrou,\end,\end@dblfoloat,\end@float} -\DoNotIndex{\endinput,\fnsymbol,\footheight,\footnotesep,\footskip} -\DoNotIndex{\global,\globaldefs,\hbox,\headheight,\headsep,\hfil} -\DoNotIndex{\hrule,\hskip,\hss,\ht,\Huge,\huge} -\DoNotIndex{\if@filesw,\if@test,\if@twocolumn,\if@twoside} -\DoNotIndex{\ifcase,\ifdim,\ifvmode,\ignorespaces} -\DoNotIndex{\input,\interlinepenalty,\itemsep,\ixpt,\label} -\DoNotIndex{\labelsep,\labelwidth,\LARGE,\large,\Large} -\DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftmargin,\leftmargini,\leftmarginii} -\DoNotIndex{\leftmarginiii,\leftmarginiv,\leftmarginv} -\DoNotIndex{\leftmarginvi,\leftmark,\leftskip,\lineskip} -\DoNotIndex{\magstep,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\markboth} -\DoNotIndex{\markright,\medbreak,\multiply,\newbox,\newcount} -\DoNotIndex{\newcounter,\newdimen,\newif,\newlabel,\newpage} -\DoNotIndex{\newtoks,\nobreak,\nointerlineskip,\normallineskip} -\DoNotIndex{\normalsize,\null,\number,\numberline,\oddsidemargin} -\DoNotIndex{\offinterlineskip,\or,\par,\parbox,\parskip,\partopsep} -\DoNotIndex{\prevdepth,\protect,\ref,\refstepcounter,\rightmrk} -\DoNotIndex{\rm,\scriptsize,\section,\sectionmark,\setbox,\setcounter} -\DoNotIndex{\sl,\small,\stepcounter,\string,\textheight,\textwidth} -\DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thepage,\thesection,\thesubsection} -\DoNotIndex{\thispagestyle,\tiny,\topmargin,\topsep,\uppercase} -\DoNotIndex{\vbox,\vfill,\viiipt,\viipt,\vipt,\vpt,\vskip,\vss} -\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xcommentloaded@,\xdef,\xiipt,\xipt,\xivpt,\xpt} -\DoNotIndex{\xviipt,\xxpt,\xxvpt,\z@} -\DoNotIndex{\abovedisplayskip,\abovedisplayshortskip,\@currentlabel} -\DoNotIndex{\@dottedtocline,\@ne\@setsize,\@starttoc,\@tempboxa,\@} -\DoNotIndex{\arraystretch,\centerline,\egroup,\end@dblfloat} -\DoNotIndex{\evensidemargin,\footnotesize,\ifnum,\parindent,\parsep} -\DoNotIndex{\rightmark,\@afterindenttrue,\@ne,\if@specialpage.\long} -\DoNotIndex{\fboxrule,\fboxsep,\@for,\vfil} -\DoNotIndex{\@@fortmp,\@@tempa,\@@tempb,\@ehd,\@for,\@fortmp,\@m} -\DoNotIndex{\@mparswitchfalse,\@mparswitchtrue,\@nnil,\@spaces} -\DoNotIndex{\@specialstyle,\@temptokena,\@twosidefalse,\@twosidetrue} -\DoNotIndex{\@whilenum,\alph,\arabic,\count@,\errhelp,\errmessage} -\DoNotIndex{\fbox,\index,\minipage,\newcommand,\overfullrule} -\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\raggedright,\ref@stepcounter,renewcommand} -\DoNotIndex{\semcolor@loaded,today,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\trivlist,\t,\p} -\DoNotIndex{\today,\item,\@colht,\@currenvir,\@thefoot,\@thehead} -\DoNotIndex{\@totalleftmargin,\allowbreak,\@captype,\@footnotetext} -\DoNotIndex{\@listdepth,\@minipagefalse,\@minipagetrue,\@mpfn,\@mpfootins} -\DoNotIndex{\endtrivlist,\everypar,\hsize,\ifvoid,\lastskip} -\DoNotIndex{\linewidth,\skip,\thempfn,\thempfootnote,\topskip,\unvbox} -\DoNotIndex{\@@input,\@@par,\@acci,\@accii,\@acciii,\@cclv,\@height} -\DoNotIndex{\@maxdepth,\@tempdimb,\@tempg,\@temph,\@texttop,\@twocolumnfalse} -\DoNotIndex{\@xfloat,\addvspace,\alloc@,\bigskipamount,\botmark,\chardef} -\DoNotIndex{\closein,\closeout,\count,\countdef,\dimen,\glossary,\goodbreak} -\DoNotIndex{\insc@unt,\intextsep,\kern,\mag,\marginpar,\maxdepth,\medskip} -\DoNotIndex{\moveleft,\newinsert,\newskip,\onecolumn,\openin,\openout} -\DoNotIndex{\read,\renewcommand,\repeat,\rightskip,\strut,\vfuzz,\voffset} -\DoNotIndex{\vsize} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\endinput - -%% END tvz-code.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 9be6a984267..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,255 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN tvz-hax.sty -%% 93/04/01 -%% Tim Van Zandt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% These are some lousy hacks for typesetting the code -%% and User's Guide in the Seminar and PSTricks packages. - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAPER SIZES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Default paper size is 8.5in by 11in. -% Just include the `a4' style option for A4 paper size. -% For other paper sizes, define \paperwidth and \paperheight -% before the \documentstyle command. - -\@ifundefined{paperwidth}{\def\paperwidth{8.5in}}{} -\@ifundefined{paperheight}{\def\paperheight{11in}}{} -\@namedef{ds@a4}{\def\paperwidth{210mm}\def\paperheight{297mm}} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INPUTS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\newif\iftwoup -\@namedef{ds@2up}{\input 2up.tex \twouptrue} - -\input article.sty -\input fancybox.sty % Version 0.93 or later. - -\iftwoup - \if@twoside - \targetlayout{twosided} - \fi -\fi - -\if@twoside - \def\twosideclearpage{% - \clearpage - \ifodd\c@page\else - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \null\leavevmode - \clearpage - \fi} -\else - \let\twosideclearpage\clearpage -\fi - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MISC %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\def\arraystretch{1.2} - -\hfuzz 1pt - -% Just in case I'm using AmS-LaTeX. -\def\makeatother{\catcode`\@=12\relax} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SHORT META %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Works in verbatim environments, unless specially designed. -\begingroup - \catcode`\<=\active - \gdef\ShortMeta{% - \catcode`\<=\active - \def<##1>{{\MetaFont ##1\/}}} -\endgroup -\def\DeleteShortMeta{\catcode`\<=12\relax} -\def\MetaFont{\sl} % For meta arguments. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FILE VERSIONS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% \GetVersion{file} scans first ten lines of <file> for -% \filedate and \fileversion definitions. -% -% \CheckVersion{file} scans <scans> file for \filedate and \fileversion -% and then compares these witha \FileDate and \FileVersion. -% -\def\GetVersion#1{% - \immediate\openin1=#1 - \count@=0 - \let\fileversion\relax - \let\filedate\relax - \@testtrue - \loop - \if@test - \advance\count@1 - \immediate\read1 to \@tempa - \@tempa - \ifnum\count@=10 - \@latexerr{Couldn't find fileversion}\@eha - \@testfalse - \else - \ifx\fileversion\relax - \@testtrue - \else - \ifx\filedate\relax - \@testtrue - \else - \@testfalse - \fi - \fi - \fi - \repeat} - -\def\CheckVersion#1{% - \GetVersion{#1} - \ifx\FileVersion\fileversion - \ifx\FileDate\filedate\else - \@latexerr{Doc date (\FileDate) and file date (\filedate) - do not match}\@eha - \fi - \else - \@latexerr{Doc version (\FileVersion) and file version (\fileversion) - do not match}\@eha - \fi} - -% This expands the date, as defined in \filedate. - -\def\expanddate#1/#2/#3/{% - \number#3{} - \month=#2 - \ifcase\month\or - January \or February \or March \or April \or May \or June \or - July \or August \or September \or October \or November \or December - \fi - 19#1} -\def\thefiledate{\expandafter\expanddate\filedate/} -\date{\thefiledate} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% LOGOS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\def\AmS{{\protect\the\textfont\tw@ - A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125em S}} - -\def\b@LaTeX{% - \begingroup - \csname reset@font\endcsname - \rm\bf - L\kern-.32em - \raise.36ex\hbox{% - \ifx\@currsize\Huge\LARGE\else - \ifx\@currsize\huge\Large\else - \ifx\@currsize\LARGE\large\else - \ifx\@currsize\Large\normalsize\else - \ifx\@currsize\large\small\else - \ifx\@currsize\normalsize\footnotesize\else - \ifx\@currsize\small\scriptsize\else - \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize\scriptscriptsize - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \bf A}% - \kern-.15em - T\kern-.1667em - \lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125em - X% - \endgroup} -\def\bLaTeX{\b@LaTeX} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAGE STYLE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% The `docheadings' page style uses footers rather than headers. - -\def\ps@docheadings{% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\@oddhead{}% - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead% - \def\@oddfoot{% - \small\sf - \rightmark - \hfil - \thepage}% - \def\@evenfoot{% - \small\sf - \thepage - \hfil - \theheadertitle}% - \def\sectionmark##1{\markright {##1}}}% -\pagestyle{docheadings} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Tighten up spacing in TOC: - -\newskip\tempskip -\def\TOCshrink{.5} -\def\TableOfContents{% - \begin{quote} - \begin{center} \Large\bf Contents \end{center} - \def\numberline##1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 1em}}% - \let\oldaddvspace\addvspace - \def\addvspace##1{% - \tempskip##1\relax - \oldaddvspace{\TOCshrink\tempskip}} - \@starttoc{toc}% - \end{quote}} -\def\tableofcontents{% - \clearpage - \markright{Table of contents}% - \TableOfContents - \clearpage} - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% code and examples %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% `Ex' is an environment for putting samples of code. -% It is a variant of -% \begin{quote}\tt ... \end{quote}. -% It is NOT verbatim. - -\def\NotNested{% - \def\begin##1{% - \@latexerr{Bad nesting of environments. - Perhaps missing \end{\@currenvir}}\@eha - \end{\@currenvir}% - \begin{##1}}} - -\def\Ex{% - \NotNested - \list{}{}\item[]% - \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi - \leftskip\@totalleftmargin - \rightskip\z@ - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ - \parfillskip\@flushglue - \hfuzz 1pt - \@@par - \global\@inlabelfalse} -\def\endEx{\endlist} - -% Various things to make it easier to write code and examples: - -\begingroup - \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12 - \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2 - \catcode`\+=0 \catcode`\\=12 - +gdef+|(\) % \| = character \ - +gdef+{({) % \{ = character { - +gdef+}(}) % \} = character } -+endgroup -\def\Backslash{\protect\|} - -% Define some functional font commands: - -\def\MainFont{\tt} % For macro definitions. -\def\UsageFont{\tt} % For in-line macro names. -\def\InlineFont{\tt} % For other in-line snipets of code. -\def\DisplayFont{\tt} % For displayed code. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\endinput -%% END tvz-hax.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 2a3a8ca04aa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,204 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN tvz-user.sty -%% 93/04/01 - -\input tvz-hax.sty - -\def\papersizeadjust{% - \@tempdima=\paperwidth\relax - \advance\@tempdima-8.5in - \divide\@tempdima 2 - \advance\oddsidemargin\@tempdima - \advance\evensidemargin\@tempdima - \@tempdima=\paperheight - \advance\@tempdima-11in - \divide\@tempdima 2 - \advance\topmargin\@tempdima} - -\begingroup - \catcode`\"=\active - \gdef\ShortVerb{% - \catcode`\"=\active - \def"{\Verb"}}% - \gdef\DeleteShortVerb{\catcode`\"=12\relax} -\endgroup - -% Paragraphs are marked by large space rather than indentation: -\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -\setlength{\parskip}{7pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} - -% Reduce \topsep: -\def\@listI{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@ - %\topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@ - \topsep 5\p@ plus2\p@ minus2\p@ - \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@} -\let\@listi\@listI -\@listi -\def\@listii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginii - \labelwidth\leftmarginii - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - %\topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@ - \topsep 2\p@ plus.5\p@ minus\p@ - \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@ - \itemsep \parsep} -\def\@listiii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginiii - \labelwidth\leftmarginiii - \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - %\topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@ - \topsep 1\p@ plus.2\p@ minus.2\p@ - \parsep \z@ - \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@ - \itemsep \topsep} - -\skip\footins 20pt plus 4pt minus 2pt - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special hacks for User's Guides %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% Listing questions -\newcounter{faq}[section] -\def\thefaq{\arabic{faq}} -\let\l@faq\@gobbletwo -\def\faq{\@startsection{faq}{2}{\z@}% - {3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\faqfont}} -\def\faqfont{\normalsize\sf} -\def\faqmark#1{} -%% -%% Listing errors -\def\error{\vskip 2ex\noindent} -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\@ifundefined{AmSTeX} - {\def\AmSTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal A\kern-.2em\lower.376ex% - \hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.2em\cal S$-\TeX}}}{} -\@ifundefined{BibTeX} - {\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em% - T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}}{} -\@ifundefined{SliTeX} - {\def\SliTeX{{\rm S\kern-.06emL\kern-.18em\raise.32ex\hbox - {\sc i}\kern -.03em\TeX}}}{} -\@ifundefined{PlainTeX}{\def\PlainTeX{{\sc Plain}\kern2pt\TeX}}{} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special indexing for User's Guides %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% -\@ifundefined{actualchar}{\def\actualchar{@}}{} -\@ifundefined{quotechar}{\def\quotechar{"}}{} -\@ifundefined{levelchar}{\def\levelchar{!}}{} -\@ifundefined{encapchar}{\def\encapchar{|}}{} -\@ifundefined{verbatimchar}{\def\verbatimchar{+}}{} -%% -%% These are the indexing commands: -%% -%% Commands: \MainIndex \UsageIndex -%% Environments: \MainEnvIndex \UsageEnvIndex -%% Style options: \MainOptionIndex \UsageOptionIndex -%% Counters: \MainCntIndex \UsageCntIndex -\def\@Index#1{\@bsphack\index{#1}\@esphack} -\def\Index#1#2{% - \@bsphack - \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#2\actualchar\string - \verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#2\verbatimchar - \encapchar #1}} -{\catcode`\!=0 !catcode`!\=12!gdef!special@gobble#1{!if\#1!else#1!fi}} -\def\MainIndex{\Index{main}} -\def\UsageIndex{\Index{usage}} -\def\SpecialIndex#1#2#3{% - \@Index{#3\actualchar{\tt #3} (#1)\encapchar #2}% - \@Index{#1s:\levelchar{\tt #3}\encapchar #2}} -\def\MainEnvIndex{\SpecialIndex{environment}{main}} -\def\UsageEnvIndex{\SpecialIndex{environment}{usage}} -\def\MainOptionIndex{\SpecialIndex{option}{main}} -\def\UsageOptionIndex{\SpecialIndex{option}{usage}} -\def\MainCntIndex{\SpecialIndex{counter}{main}} -\def\UsageCntIndex{\SpecialIndex{counter}{usage}} -%% -%% Font for index page numbers: -\def\main#1{{\bf #1}} -\def\usage#1{{#1}} -%% -%% These combine various functions: -%% -%% Commands: \Main \Usage -%% Environments: \MainEnv \UsageEnv -%% Style options: \MainOption \UsageOption -%% Counters: \MainCnt \UsageCnt -%% -%% The "Main" ones -%% * Index argument. -%% * Print argument with \MainFont -%% * Create label +foo, e+foo or o+foo. -%% -%% The "Usage" ones -%% * Index argument. -%% * Print argument with \UsageFont. -%% -\def\SpecialLabel#1#2+{\label{+#2}} -\def\LabelIndex#1{\MainIndex{#1}\expandafter\SpecialLabel\string#1+} -\def\Main#1{% - \MainIndex{#1}% - \expandafter\SpecialLabel\string#1+% - {\MainFont\string#1}} -\def\Usage#1{\UsageIndex{#1}{\UsageFont\string#1}} -\def\MainEnv#1{% - \MainEnvIndex{#1}% - \label{e+#1}% - {\MainFont #1}} -\def\UsageEnv#1{\UsageEnvIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}} -\def\MainOption#1{% - \MainOptionIndex{#1}% - \label{o+#1}% - {\MainFont #1}} -\def\UsageOption#1{\UsageOptionIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}} -\def\MainCnt#1{% - \MainCntIndex{#1}% - \label{c+#1}% - {\MainFont #1}} -\def\UsageCnt#1{\UsageCntIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}} -%% -%% These are abbreviations. -%% -\def\N{\Main} -\def\n{\Usage} -\def\E{\MainEnv} -\def\e{\UsageEnv} -\def\O{\MainOption} -\def\o{\UsageOption} -\def\C{\MainCnt} -\def\c{\UsageCnt} -%% -%% This is for listing commands in a description environment. -\def\xitem#1{\item[\Main{#1}]} -%% -%% -\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{} -\VerbatimFootnotes - -%% User's guide and documented code have different index prologue. -\def\PrintUserIndex{{\let\ps@plain\@empty\@input{\jobname.ind}}} - -\begingroup - \catcode`\<=1 \catcode`\>=2 - \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12 - \catcode`\[=13 - \gdef\@MD<% - \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12 \catcode`\[=13 - \def{##1}<\{<\MetaFont ##1\/>\}>% - \def[##1]<\string[<\MetaFont ##1\/>]>> -\endgroup -\def\MD{% - \NotNested - \Ex - \begingroup - \@MD - \def\end{\par\endgroup\end}% - \def\\{\@centercr\Main}% - \MainFont - \Main} -\def\endMD{\endEx} - -\endinput -%% END tvz-user.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty deleted file mode 100644 index ec109716932..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3 +0,0 @@ -\ProvidesPackage{2up}[1998/03/13 package wrapper for 2up.tex] -\input 2up.tex -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 51b72e80116..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,371 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN 2up.tex/2up.sty -%% -\def\fileversion{1.2} -\def\filedate{93/01/28} -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1992, 1993 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% DESCRIPTION: -%% 2up.tex/2up.sty provides two-up printing for Generic TeX (e.g., -%% Plain, LaTeX, AmSTeX and AmS-LaTeX). It produces a standard dvi file, -%% and does not involve an additional dvi or PostScript filter. It has a -%% flexible interface for specifying paper size and layout. -%% -%% INSTALLATION: -%% Put this file where your TeX looks for inputs, under the name 2up.tex. -%% Name a copy 2up.sty to use as a LaTeX style option, or create a file -%% 2up.sty with the lines: -%% \input 2up.tex -%% \endinput -%% -%% DOCUMENTATION: -%% Input 2up.tex, or include 2up as a LaTeX style option. There is a -%% good chance you will get the desired layout. (But you will probably -%% need to generate new font bitmaps to get high quality output.) See -%% 2up.doc, which might be appended to this file, for detailed -%% documentation. -%% -%% CODE: -% -\csname TwoUpLoaded\endcsname -\let\TwoUpLoaded\endinput -% -\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@} -\catcode`\@=11\relax -\message{\space\space v\fileversion\space\space \filedate\space\space <tvz>} -% -% Parameter registers: -\newdimen\@targetwidth -\newdimen\@targetheight -\newdimen\@sourcewidth -\newdimen\@sourceheight -\newdimen\pageseplength -\newdimen\pagesepwidth -\newdimen\pagesepoffset -\newif\if@sidebyside -\@sidebysidetrue -\newif\if@twosided -% -% Registers used by output routine. -\newif\if@leftpage -\@leftpagetrue -\newbox\@leftpage -\newbox\@rightpage -\newcount\@physicalpage -% -% Since pages are shipped out half as often: -\multiply\maxdeadcycles by 2 -% -% Registers used only for booklet layout: -\begingroup - \let\newcount\relax - \gdef\booklet@registers{% - \newcount\bookletpage - \bookletpage=0 - \newcount\leftpagenumber - \newcount\rightpagenumber - \multiply\maxdeadcycles by 20} -\endgroup -% -% A useful extension of the \magstep macro. -\def\magstepminus#1{% - \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax} -% -% \@targetwidth and \@targetheight are set to the *unmagnified* dimensions -% of the target page. \inv@targetmag is the inverse of the target -% magnification. -{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12\gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}} -\def\target#1#2#3{% - \mag #1\relax - \@targetwidth=1000pt - \divide\@targetwidth by #1\relax - \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@targetwidth\inv@targetmag - \@targetwidth=#2\relax - \@targetwidth=\inv@targetmag\@targetwidth - \@targetheight=#3\relax - \@targetheight=\inv@targetmag\@targetheight} -% -% Like \target, but for the source: -\def\source#1#2#3{% - \@sourcewidth=1000pt - \divide\@sourcewidth by #1\relax - \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@sourcewidth\inv@sourcemag - \@sourcewidth=#2\relax - \@sourcewidth=\inv@sourcemag\@sourcewidth - \@sourceheight=#3\relax - \@sourceheight=\inv@sourcemag\@sourceheight} -% -% \targetlayout does a loop that reads the comma separated arguments. -% There can be no extraneous spaces. -\def\targetlayout#1{\process@targetlayout#1,stop,} -\def\process@targetlayout#1,{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\next\csname target@#1\endcsname - \ifx\next\relax - \begingroup - \errhelp{Valid target layouts are "topbottom", "twosided", - "booklet", "Booklet" and "dvidvi".}% - \errmessage{`#1' is invalid 2up target layout - ignored.}% - \endgroup - \expandafter\process@targetlayout - \else - \next - \fi} -\def\target@stop{} -\def\target@booklet{% - \booklet@registers - \def\ship@@@leftpage{\save@booklet\@leftpage}% - \def\ship@@@rightpage{\save@booklet\@rightpage}% - \@leftpagefalse - \def\twoup@eject{\twoup@eject@booklet}% - \expandafter\process@targetlayout} -\def\target@Booklet{% - \def\booklet@@loop{\Booklet@@loop}% - \target@booklet} -\def\target@twosided{% - \@twosidedtrue - \expandafter\process@targetlayout} -\def\target@topbottom{% - \def\make@@halfpage{\make@@halftopbottom}% - \def\make@fullpage{\make@fulltopbottom}% - \@sidebysidefalse - \expandafter\process@targetlayout} -\def\target@dvidvi{% - \def\ship@@@leftpage{\ship@dvidvi\@leftpage}% - \def\ship@@@rightpage{\ship@dvidvi\@rightpage}% - \expandafter\process@targetlayout} -% -% TeX's \shipout primitive is saved as \&normal@shipout, and then \shipout -% is defined to save each page to \@leftpage or \@rightpage and to print out -% every two. With the twosided layout, filler pages are added when needed. -\expandafter\let\csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\shipout -\def\shipout{% - \if@leftpage - \global\@leftpagefalse - \def\next{\afterassignment\ship@leftpage\global\setbox\@leftpage=}% - \if@twosided - \ifodd\count\z@ - \global\setbox\@leftpage=\hbox{}% - \make@@halfpage\@leftpage\ship@@@leftpage - \def\next{\shipout}% - \fi - \fi - \else - \global\@leftpagetrue - \def\next{\afterassignment\ship@rightpage\global\setbox\@rightpage=}% - \if@twosided - \ifodd\count\z@ - \else - \global\setbox\@rightpage=\hbox{}% - \make@@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage - \def\next{\shipout}% - \fi - \fi - \fi - \next} -% -% The job of \ship@leftpage and \ship@rightpage is to invoke \ship@@leftpage -% or \ship@@rightpage at the right time. \shipout is followed either -% (i) by an \hbox, \vbox or \vtop, in which case \ship@leftpage is invoked -% after the opening {. \@leftpage is void, and \ship@leftpage invokes -% \ship@@leftpage after the closing }, or -% (ii) by a \box or \copy, in which case \ship@leftpage is invoked after -% the full assignment. \@leftpage is not voide, and \ship@leftpage invokes -% \ship@@leftpage immediately. -\def\ship@leftpage{% - \ifvoid\@leftpage\aftergroup\ship@@leftpage\else\ship@@leftpage\fi} -\def\ship@rightpage{% - \ifvoid\@rightpage\aftergroup\ship@@rightpage\else\ship@@rightpage\fi} -% -% \ship@@leftpage/\ship@@rightpage take the output box, and first make it -% into a fully-size source page (with \make@halfpage) and then this is -% centered horizontally and vertically in half of a target page (with -% \make@@halfpage). Then they are shipped individually or together. -\def\ship@@leftpage{\make@halfpage\@leftpage\ship@@@leftpage} -\def\ship@@rightpage{\make@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage} -\def\make@halfpage#1{% - \dp#1=\z@ - \setbox#1=\vbox to\@sourceheight{% - \vskip \inv@sourcemag in - \vskip \voffset - \hbox to\@sourcewidth{\hskip\inv@sourcemag in\hskip\hoffset\box#1\hss}% - \vss}% - \make@@halfpage#1} -% -% The definition of \make@@halfpage depends on the target layout. -\def\make@@halfsidebyside#1{% - \global\setbox#1=\vbox to\@targetheight{\vss - \hbox to.5\@targetwidth{\hss\box#1\hss}\vss}} -\def\make@@halftopbottom#1{% - \global\setbox#1=\vbox to.5\@targetheight{\vss - \hbox to\@targetwidth{\hss\box#1\hss}\vss}} -\def\make@@halfpage{\make@@halfsidebyside} -% -% The pages are generaly shipped in pairs: -\def\ship@twoup{% - \begingroup - \voffset=-\inv@targetmag in - \hoffset=\voffset - \global\advance\@physicalpage by 1 - \count\z@=\@physicalpage - \csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\make@fullpage - \endgroup} -\let\ship@@@leftpage\relax -\def\ship@@@rightpage{\ship@twoup} -% -% The definition of \make@fullpage depends on the layout: -\def\make@fullsidebyside{% - \hbox{\box\@leftpage\pagesep@sidebyside\box\@rightpage}} -\def\make@fulltopbottom{% - \vbox{\offinterlineskip\box\@leftpage\pagesep@topbottom\box\@rightpage}} -\def\make@fullpage{\make@fullsidebyside} -% -% A vertical or horizontal rule can be inserted. These can be redefined -% for other tricks: -\def\pagesep@sidebyside{% - \begingroup - \advance\pageseplength by \pagesepoffset - \pagesepwidth=\inv@targetmag\pagesepwidth - \kern -.5\pagesepwidth - \vrule height \inv@targetmag\pageseplength - depth -\inv@targetmag\pagesepoffset - width \pagesepwidth - \kern -.5\pagesepwidth - \endgroup} -\def\pagesep@topbottom{% - \begingroup - \pagesepwidth=\inv@targetmag\pagesepwidth - \vskip -.5\pagesepwidth - \moveright\inv@targetmag\pagesepoffset\hbox{% - \vrule height\pagesepwidth width\inv@targetmag\pageseplength}% - \vskip -.5\pagesepwidth - \endgroup} -% -% With the dvidvi layout, the pages are shipped individually: -\def\ship@dvidvi#1{% - \begingroup - \voffset=-\inv@targetmag in - \hoffset=\voffset - \csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\box#1% - \endgroup} -% -% With the booklet or Booklet layout, the pages are saved rather than -% shipped. -\begingroup -\let\newbox\relax -\gdef\save@booklet#1{% - \begingroup - \globaldefs=1 - \advance\bookletpage by 1 - \expandafter\newbox\csname bookletbox\the\bookletpage\endcsname - \expandafter\setbox\csname bookletbox\the\bookletpage\endcsname\box#1% - \endgroup} -\endgroup -% -% The pages are then printed at the end with the following macros: -\def\make@bookletpage#1{% - \setbox\ifodd#1\@rightpage\else\@leftpage\fi=% - \expandafter\box\csname bookletbox\the#1\endcsname} -\def\booklet@loop{% - \count\z@\rightpagenumber - \make@bookletpage\leftpagenumber - \make@bookletpage\rightpagenumber - \ship@twoup - \booklet@@loop} -\def\booklet@@loop{% - \advance\rightpagenumber by 2 - \advance\leftpagenumber by -2 - \ifnum\leftpagenumber<1\else\expandafter\booklet@loop\fi} -\def\Booklet@@loop{% - \advance\rightpagenumber by 1 - \advance\leftpagenumber by -1 - \ifnum\leftpagenumber<\rightpagenumber\else\expandafter\booklet@loop\fi} -% -% This one is easy: -\def\twoupemptypage{\shipout\hbox{}} -% -% This clears a whole target page if there is a saved left page. Note that -% this does not invoke the output routine; i.e., it is not like \clearpage -% or \supereject. See \twoupclearpage and \twoupeject below. -\def\twoup@eject{% - \if@leftpage\else - \global\setbox\@rightpage\hbox{}% - \make@@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage - \global\@leftpagetrue - \fi} -% -% This is the definition of \twoup@eject with the booklet option: -\def\twoup@eject@booklet{% - \leftpagenumber\bookletpage - \advance\leftpagenumber by 3 - \divide\leftpagenumber by 4 - \multiply\leftpagenumber by 4 - \rightpagenumber=1 - \ifnum\leftpagenumber>\bookletpage - \setbox\@leftpage\hbox{}% - \make@@halfpage\@leftpage - \loop - \setbox\@rightpage\copy\@leftpage - \save@booklet\@rightpage - \ifnum\leftpagenumber>\bookletpage - \repeat - \fi - \booklet@loop} -% -% This modification is needed for \LaTeX in order to get the last page -% printed out if the final page is a left page (the catcode business is -% because \enddocument is \let to \bye in amstex): -\begingroup -\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax - \catcode`\>=14\else\catcode`\>=9\fi\relax ->>\gdef\twoupclearpage{\clearpage\twoup@eject} ->>\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument} ->>\xdef\enddocument{\noexpand\twoupclearpage\the\@temptokena} -\endgroup -% -% For most other macro packages we could just leave be and all pages would -% always be printed because of the way the \end primitive works (except that -% TeX will go bonkers with the booklet layout). However, -% sometimes a blank filler page would be printed *with* headings. We prefer -% the filler page to be truly blank. To achieve this, we hack the definition -% of \end. This may cause problems with some macros. -\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax - \let\twoup@@@end\end - \def\end{\twoup@eject\twoup@@@end} - \def\twoupeject{\par\vfil\supereject\twoup@eject} -\fi -% -% This is one workaround for the page cross-references problem -\def\TwoupWrites{% - \let\TwoupSaved@write\write - \let\TwoupSaved@read\read - \let\TwoupSaved@openout\openout - \let\TwoupSaved@closeout\closeout - \def\write{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@write}% - \def\read{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@read}% - \def\openout{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@openout}% - \def\closeout{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@closeout}% - \let\TwoupWrites\relax} -% -% Defaults: -\def\twouparticle{% - \target{\magstepminus1}{11in}{8.5in}% - \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}} -\def\twoupplain{% - \target{\magstepminus2}{11in}{8.5in}% - \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}} -\def\twouplegaltarget{% - \target{\magstepminus1}{14in}{8.5in}% - \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}% -\def\twouplandscape{% - \target{\magstepminus2}{8.5in}{11in}% - \source{\magstep0}{11in}{8.5in}% - \targetlayout{topbottom}} -\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax - \twoupplain\else\twouparticle\fi -\pagesepwidth 0pt -\pageseplength 6.5in -\pagesepoffset 1in -% -\expandafter\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax -\endinput -%% END 2up.tex/2up.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 2abe7e2f5ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,975 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN fancybox.sty -%% -%% With corrections and suggestions from: -%% - Marcin Wolinski <wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl> -%% - Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de> -%% -\def\fileversion{1.3} -\def\filedate{2000/09/19} -% DG/SR modification begin - September 19, 2000 -% (suggested by Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>) -\@ifundefined{ProvidesPackage}{}{% - \ProvidesPackage{fancybox}[\filedate\space\fileversion]} -% DG/SR modification end -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 -\providecommand\@begindvi{} % For rather old versions of LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end -% DG/SR modification begin - Feb. 27, 1997 -% Now defined only in latex209.def -\def\@lquote{\leavevmode{\kern\z@}`} -% DG/SR modification end -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% DESCRIPTION: -%% fancybox.sty is a LaTeX style option, consisting of: -%% * Variants of \fbox: \shadowbox, \doublebox, \ovalbox, \Ovalbox. -%% * Helpful tools for using box macros. -%% * Extensive documentation about how to use box macros. -%% * Flexible verbatim macros. -%% -%% INSTALLATION: -%% Put this file where your TeX looks for inputs. -%% -%% DOCUMENTATION: -%% See fancybox.doc, which might be appended to this file. -%% -%% CODE: -\expandafter\ifx\csname fb@framepage\endcsname\relax\else - \expandafter\endinput -\fi -\typeout{Style option: `fancybox' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)} - -\newbox\@fancybox -\@ifundefined{@tempdimc}{\newdimen\@tempdimc}{} - -%% \shadowbox - -\newdimen\shadowsize -\shadowsize 4pt - -\def\shadowbox{\VerbBox\@shadowbox} -\def\@shadowbox#1{% - \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{\fbox{#1}}% - \leavevmode\vbox{% - \offinterlineskip - \dimen@=\shadowsize - \advance\dimen@ .5\fboxrule - \hbox{\copy\@fancybox\kern-.5\fboxrule\lower\shadowsize\hbox{% - \vrule \@height\ht\@fancybox \@depth\dp\@fancybox \@width\dimen@}}% - \vskip-\dimen@ - \moveright\shadowsize\vbox{% - \hrule \@width\wd\@fancybox \@height\dimen@}}} - -% \fancyoval - -\def\cornersize{\@ifstar{\@cornersize}{\@@cornersize}} -\def\@cornersize#1{% - \@tempdima=#1\relax - \edef\the@cornersize{\number\@tempdima sp}} -\def\@@cornersize#1{% - \edef\the@cornersize{#1\noexpand\@tempdimb}} -\cornersize{.5} - -% This is just a simple change to \oval, making use of the \cornersize -% parameter instead of making the corner arcs are large as possible. - -\def\fancyoval(#1,#2){\@ifnextchar[{\fancy@oval(#1,#2)}{\fancy@oval(#1,#2)[]}} - -\def\fancy@oval(#1,#2)[#3]{% - \begingroup - \fancy@@oval{#1\unitlength}{#2\unitlength}{#3}% - \@put{-.5\wd\@tempboxa}{-.5\ht\@tempboxa}{\ht\@tempboxa=\z@\box\@tempboxa}% - \endgroup} - -\def\fancy@@oval#1#2#3{% - \boxmaxdepth \maxdimen - \@ovttrue \@ovbtrue \@ovltrue \@ovrtrue - \@tfor\@tempa :=#3\do{\csname @ov\@tempa false\endcsname}% - \@ovxx#1\relax - \advance\@ovxx-\@wholewidth - \@ovyy#2\relax - \advance\@ovyy-\@wholewidth - \@tempdimb \ifdim \@ovyy >\@ovxx \@ovxx\else \@ovyy \fi - \advance\@tempdimb-2\p@ - \ifdim\@tempdimb>\the@cornersize\relax - \@tempdimb=\the@cornersize - \fi - \@getcirc\@tempdimb - \@ovro\ht\@tempboxa \@ovri\dp\@tempboxa - \@ovdx\@ovxx \advance\@ovdx-\@tempdima \divide\@ovdx \tw@ - \@ovdy\@ovyy \advance\@ovdy-\@tempdima \divide\@ovdy \tw@ - \@circlefnt - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{% - \if@ovr \@ovvert32\kern -\@tempdima \fi - \if@ovl \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert01\kern -\@tempdima \kern -\@ovxx \fi - \if@ovt \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx \fi - \if@ovb \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz \fi}% - \advance\@ovdx\@ovro - \advance\@ovdy\@ovro - \advance\@ovxx\@wholewidth - \wd\@tempboxa=\@ovxx - \dp\@tempboxa=\z@} - -% \ovalbox - -\def\ovalbox{\VerbBox{\@ovalbox\thinlines}} -\def\Ovalbox{\VerbBox{\@ovalbox\thicklines}} -\def\@ovalbox#1#2{% - \begingroup - #1\relax - \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#2}}% - \@tempdimc\fboxsep \advance\@tempdimc\@wholewidth - \@tempdima\ht\@fancybox \advance\@tempdima\dp\@fancybox - \advance\@tempdima2\@tempdimc - \@tempdimb\wd\@fancybox \advance\@tempdimb2\@tempdimc - \fancy@@oval\@tempdimb\@tempdima{}% - \@tempdima\dp\@fancybox \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimc - \wd\@tempboxa=\z@ - \leavevmode\hbox{% - \lower\@tempdima\box\@tempboxa - \kern\@tempdimc\box\@fancybox\kern\@tempdimc}% - \endgroup} - -% \doublebox - -\def\doublebox{\VerbBox\@doublebox} -\def\@doublebox#1{% - \begingroup - \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#1}}% - \fboxrule=.75\fboxrule - \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{\fbox{\box\@fancybox}}% - \fboxrule=2\fboxrule - \fboxsep=\fboxrule - \advance\fboxsep .5pt - \fbox{\box\@fancybox}% - \endgroup} - -% Frames for seminar.sty: - -\@ifundefined{newslideframe}{}{% - \newslideframe{shadow}{\shadowbox{#1}} - \newslideframe{double}{\doublebox{#1}} - \newslideframe{oval}{\ovalbox{#1}} - \newslideframe{Oval}{\Ovalbox{#1}}} - -% Sbox environment - -\newbox\@Sbox - -\def\Sbox{\global\setbox\@Sbox\hbox\bgroup\ignorespaces} - -\def\endSbox{% - \@testtrue\ifhmode\ifinner\@testfalse\fi\fi - \if@test\@latexerr{Misplaced \string\endSbox! Should be in LR mode}\@ehd\fi - \egroup} - -\def\TheSbox{% - \ifvoid\@Sbox - \@latexerr{\string\TheSbox\space is empty!}\@ehd - \else - \box\@Sbox - \fi} - -\def\beginsbox#1{\setbox#1\hbox\bgroup\ignorespaces} - -\def\endsbox{\endSbox} - -% \VerbBox - -\newtoks\do@VerbBox - -\def\VerbBox#1{% - \do@VerbBox{#1}% - \afterassignment\begin@VerbBox - \setbox\@fancybox=\hbox} -\def\begin@VerbBox{\aftergroup\end@VerbBox} -\def\end@VerbBox{\the\do@VerbBox{\box\@fancybox}}% - -% \Btrivlist - -\def\@Blistrestore{% - \let\par\relax - \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii - \lineskip\normallineskip \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip} - -\def\Btrivlist#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@Btrivlist{#1}}{\@Btrivlist{#1}[]}} -\def\@Btrivlist#1[#2]{% - \@Blistrestore - \let\\=\@Btrivlistcr - \fb@beginvbox{#2}% - \halign\bgroup - \if#1l\else\@empty\hfil\fi - \ignorespaces##\unskip - \if#1r\@empty\else\hfil\fi\cr} -\def\endBtrivlist{\crcr\egroup\egroup\if@pboxsw$\fi} - -\def\fb@beginvbox#1{% - \leavevmode - \@pboxswfalse - \if#1b\@empty\vbox\else\if#1t\@empty\vtop\else - \ifmmode\vcenter\else\@pboxswtrue$\vcenter\fi - \fi\fi\bgroup} - -\def\@Btrivlistcr{\@ifstar - {\@ifnextchar[{@@Btrivlistcr}{\cr}}{\@ifnextchar[{\@@Btrivlistcr}{\cr}}} -\def\@@Btrivlistcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}} - -\def\Bcenter{\Btrivlist{c}} -\def\endBcenter{\endBtrivlist} - -\def\Bflushleft{\Btrivlist{l}} -\def\endBflushleft{\endBtrivlist} - -\def\Bflushright{\Btrivlist{r}} -\def\endBflushright{\endBtrivlist} - -% \Blist - -\def\Blist#1#2{\@ifnextchar[{\@Blist{#1}{#2}}{\@Blist{#1}{#2}[]}} - -\def\@Blist#1#2[#3]{% - \ifnum\@listdepth>5 - \@toodeep - \else - \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne - \fi - \itemindent\z@ - \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname - \def\@itemlabel{#1}% - \let\makelabel\@mklab - \@nmbrlistfalse - \@Blistrestore - \let\\=\@Blistcr - \let\item\Bitem - \@Bitemswfalse - #2\relax - \fb@beginvbox{#3}% - \halign\bgroup - \ignorespaces##&\hskip\labelsep\ignorespaces##\unskip\hfil\cr} - -\def\endBlist{\endBtrivlist\global\advance\@listdepth\m@ne} - -\newif\if@Bitemsw - -\def\Bitem{\@ifnextchar({\@Bitemcr\Bitem@skip}{\@Bitemcr\@Bitem}} - -\def\@Bitemcr{% - \if@Bitemsw - \def\next{\cr\noalign{\vskip\itemsep}}% - \else - \def\next{\global\@Bitemswtrue}% - \fi - \next} - -\def\Bitem@skip(#1){\noalign{\vskip #1}\@Bitem} - -\def\@Bitem{\@ifnextchar[{\Bitem@label}{\Bitem@nolabel}} - -\def\Bitem@label[#1]{\makelabel{#1}&} - -\def\Bitem@nolabel{% - \if@nmbrlist - \expandafter\advance\csname c@\@listctr\endcsname1 \fi - \makelabel{\@itemlabel}% - &% - \if@nmbrlist\refstepcounter{\@listctr}\fi} - -\def\@Blistcr{\@ifstar - {\@ifnextchar[{@@Blistcr}{\cr&}}{\@ifnextchar[{\@@Blistcr}{\cr&}}} - -\def\@@Blistcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}&} - -% \Bitemize - -\def\Bitemize{% - \ifnum\@itemdepth>3 - \@toodeep - \else - \advance\@itemdepth\@ne - \fi - \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% - \Blist{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{\def\makelabel####1{\hfil####1}}} -\def\endBitemize{\endBlist} - -% \Bdescription - -\def\Bdescription{\Blist{}{\def\makelabel####1{\bf####1\hfil}}} -\def\endBdescription{\endBlist} - -% \Benumerate - -\def\Benumerate{% - \ifnum\@enumdepth>3 - \@toodeep - \else - \advance\@enumdepth\@ne - \fi - \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% - \Blist{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}% - {\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel####1{\hfil####1}}} -\def\endBenumerate{\endBlist} - -% Beqnarray - -\def\Beqnarray{% - \stepcounter{equation}% - \let\@currentlabel\theequation - \def\@eqnnum{{\csname reset@font\endcsname\rm (\theequation)}}% - \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th - \global\@eqcnt\z@ - \tabskip\@centering - \let\\\@eqncr - \vbox\bgroup - \halign\bgroup - \@eqnsel - \hskip\@centering - $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$% - &\global\@eqcnt\@ne - \hskip 2\arraycolsep - \hfil${##}$\hfil - &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ - \hskip 2\arraycolsep - $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$% - \hfil - \tabskip\@centering - &\if@eqnsw\hskip 1em\fi - \hfil{##}\tabskip\z@ - \cr} - -\def\endBeqnarray{% - \@@eqncr - \egroup - \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne - \egroup - \global\@ignoretrue} - -\@namedef{Beqnarray*}{\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\Beqnarray} -\@namedef{endBeqnarray*}{\nonumber\endBeqnarray} - -% \fb@outputage - -% Here we insert various hooks for rotating or framing the page. -% Otherwise, it is the usual \@outputpage - -\def\fb@outputpage{% - \begingroup - \catcode`\ =10 - \let\-\@dischyph - \let\'\@acci - \let\`\@accii - \let\=\@acciii - \if@specialpage - \global\@specialpagefalse\@nameuse{ps@\@specialstyle}% - \fi - \if@twoside - \ifodd\count\z@ - \let\@thehead\@oddhead - \let\@thefoot\@oddfoot - \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin - \else - \let\@thehead\@evenhead - \let\@thefoot\@evenfoot - \let\@themargin\evensidemargin - \fi - \fi - \csname reset@font\endcsname - \normalsize - \baselineskip\z@ - \lineskip\z@ - \let\par\@@par - \ifx\this@fancypage\@empty\else - \this@fancypage - \gdef\this@fancypage{}% - \fi - \ifx\the@fancypage\@empty\else - \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\the@fancypage{\box\@outputbox}}% - \fi - \ifx\fb@@rotatepage\@empty\else - \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\fb@@rotatepage{\box\@outputbox}}% - \fi - \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{% - \@tempdima=\wd\@outputbox - \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to\@tempdima{% - \let\label\@gobble - \let\index\@gobble - \let\glossary\@gobble - \@thehead}% - \ht\@tempboxa\headheight - \dp\@tempboxa\z@ - \box\@tempboxa - \vskip\headsep - \box\@outputbox - \baselineskip\footskip - \hbox to\@tempdima{% - \let\label\@gobble - \let\index\@gobble - \let\glossary\@gobble - \@thefoot}} - \ifx\the@@fancypage\@empty\else - \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\the@@fancypage{\box\@outputbox}}% - \fi - \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{% - \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1 \do@fancyput\fi - \vskip\topmargin - \moveright\@themargin\box\@outputbox}% - \ifx\fb@rotatepage\@empty\else - \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\lower\ht\@outputbox\box\@outputbox}% - \dp\@outputbox\z@ - \wd\@outputbox\z@ - \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\fb@rotatepage{\box\@outputbox}}% - \expandafter\fb@setoffsets\fb@theoffsets - \fi -% DG/SR modification begin - September 19, 2000 -% (suggested by Marcin Wolinski <wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl> and -% Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>) - \let\protect\noexpand -% DG/SR modification end - \shipout\box\@outputbox - \global\@colht\textheight - \endgroup - \stepcounter{page}% - \let\firstmark\botmark} - -% \fancypage - -\def\the@fancypage{} -\def\the@@fancypage{} -\def\this@fancypage{} - -\def\fancypage#1#2{% -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 - \@begindvi % Need today by LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end - \def\the@fancypage{#1}% - \def\the@@fancypage{#2}% - \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}} - -\def\thisfancypage#1#2{% -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 - \@begindvi % Need today by LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end - \gdef\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}% - \gdef\this@fancypage{\def\the@fancypage{#1}\def\the@@fancypage{#2}}} - -% \fancyput - -% Token registers used to make it easier to put definitions in argument. -% Boxes not processed until output so that contents can depend, e.g., on -% current page or marks or whatever. This makes everything slightly more -% complicated than one would expect. - -\newtoks\the@fancyput -\newtoks\this@fancyput -\def\fancyput@flag{-1}% - -% \fancyput@flag=-1 if no fancyput, 0 if regular fancyput, 1 if thisfancyput. - -\def\fancyput{% -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 - \@begindvi % Need today by LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end - \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage} - \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@fancyput}{\@testfalse\@fancyput}} -\def\@fancyput{\@ifnextchar({\@@fancyput}{\@@fancyput(\z@,\z@)}} -\def\@@fancyput(#1,#2)#3{% - \if@test - \expandafter\the@fancyput\expandafter{\the\the@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \else - \the@fancyput{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \fi - \gdef\fancyput@flag{\z@}} - -\def\thisfancyput{% -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 - \@begindvi % Need today by LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end - \gdef\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage} - \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@thisfancyput}{\@testfalse\@thisfancyput}} -\def\@thisfancyput{\@ifnextchar({\@@thisfancyput}{\@@thisfancyput(\z@,\z@)}} -\def\@@thisfancyput(#1,#2)#3{% - \if@test - \ifnum\fancyput@flag=\z@ - \expandafter\global\expandafter\this@fancyput\expandafter{% - \the\this@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \else - \expandafter\global\expandafter\this@fancyput\expandafter{% - \the\the@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \fi - \else - \global\this@fancyput{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \fi - \gdef\fancyput@flag{1}} - -\def\do@fancyput{% - \def\do##1##2##3{\raise##2\hbox to\z@{\kern##1\relax##3\hss}}% - \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to\z@{% - \kern-\hoffset - \raise\voffset\hbox{% - \ifnum\fancyput@flag=\z@\the\the@fancyput\else\the\this@fancyput\fi}% - \hss}% - \ht\@tempboxa=\z@ \dp\@tempboxa=\z@ - \box\@tempboxa - \gdef\fancyput@flag{\z@}% - \global\this@fancyput{}} - -% \Landscape - -\def\UsePageParameters{% - \clearpage - \global\@colht\textheight - \onecolumn} - -\def\fb@rotatepage{} - - -\def\Landscape{\@ifstar{\@testtrue\@Landscape}{\@testfalse\@Landscape}} -\def\@Landscape#1#2#3{% -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 - \@begindvi % Need today by LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end - \clearpage - \def\fb@rotatepage{#3}% - \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}% - \@tempdima#1\relax - \@tempdimb#2\relax - \if@test - \edef\fb@theoffsets{{\voffset}{\hoffset}{\number\@tempdima sp}}% - \else - \edef\fb@theoffsets{{\hoffset}{\voffset}{\number\@tempdimb sp}}% - \fi - \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempdima - \advance\textwidth\@tempdimb - \advance\textheight-\@tempdimb - \UsePageParameters} -\def\endLandscape{\clearpage\aftergroup\UsePageParameters} - -\def\fb@setoffsets#1#2#3{% - \@tempdima#1% - \advance#1#2% - #2#3 - \advance#2-2in - \advance#2-\@tempdima} - -\@namedef{Landscape*}{\@testtrue\@Landscape} -\@namedef{endLandscape*}{\endLandscape} - -% \LandScape - -\def\fb@@rotatepage{} - -\def\LandScape#1{% -% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997 - \@begindvi % Need today by LaTeX 2e -% DG/SR modification end - \clearpage - \def\fb@@rotatepage{#1}% - \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}% - \@tempdima\textheight - \textheight\textwidth - \textwidth\@tempdima - \UsePageParameters} -\def\endLandScape{\clearpage\aftergroup\UsePageParameters} - -% \GenericCaption - -\def\GenericCaption#1{% - \par - \begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \normalsize - \vskip 10\p@ - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}% - \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize - #1\par - \else - \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - \fi - \endgroup - \par} - -% \landfloat - -\def\landfloat#1#2{% - \gdef\curr@landfloat{#1}% - \gdef\float@rotation{#2}% - \begin{#1}[p]% - \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup - \hsize\@colht - \@parboxrestore} -\def\endlandfloat{% - \par\vskip\z@ - \egroup - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\float@rotation{\box\@tempboxa}}% - \centerline{\box\@tempboxa}% - \expandafter\end\expandafter{\curr@landfloat}} - -% \boxput - -\def\boxput{\@ifstar{\@testtrue\@boxput}{\@testfalse\@boxput}} -\def\@boxput{\@ifnextchar({\@@boxput}{\@@boxput(0,0)}} -\long\def\@@boxput(#1,#2)#3#4{% - \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#4}}% - \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox to\z@{\vss\hbox to\z@{\hss{#3}\hss}\vss}% - \@tempdima=#1\wd\@fancybox - \advance\@tempdima\wd\@fancybox - \divide\@tempdima 2 - \ifcat a#2\relax - \@tempdimb=\z@ - \else - \@tempdimb=.5\ht\@fancybox - \advance\@tempdimb.5\dp\@fancybox - \@tempdimc=\@tempdimb - \advance\@tempdimc-\dp\@fancybox - \@tempdimb=#2\@tempdimb - \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdimc - \fi - \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox to \z@{% - \if@test\kern-\wd\@fancybox\fi - \kern\@tempdima\raise\@tempdimb\box\@tempboxa\hss}% - \ht\@tempboxa=\z@ \dp\@tempboxa=\z@ - \leavevmode - \if@test - \hbox{\box\@fancybox\box\@tempboxa}% - \else - \hbox{\box\@tempboxa\box\@fancybox}% - \fi} - -% \Vfootnotes - -\def\VerbatimFootnotes{\let\@footnotetext\V@footnotetext} - -\long\def\V@footnotetext{% - \afterassignment\V@@footnotetext - \let\@tempa} -\def\V@@footnotetext{% - \insert\footins\bgroup - \csname reset@font\endcsname - \footnotesize - \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty - \splittopskip\footnotesep - \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox - \floatingpenalty \@MM - \hsize\columnwidth - \@parboxrestore - \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% - \@makefntext{}% - \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}% - \bgroup - \aftergroup\V@@@footnotetext - \ignorespaces} -\def\V@@@footnotetext{\strut\egroup} - -% Verbatim - -% The main idea is to separate the reading and formatting of the -% verbatim listing. It's pretty simple. - -\def\Verbatim@Codes{% - \let\do\@makeother - \dospecials - \Verbatim@ObeyThings - \ThisVerbCodes\relax\gdef\ThisVerbCodes{}} - -\def\EveryVerbatimCodes{} - -% \Verbatim is redefined temporarilly in \Get@Verbatim to scan the -% verbatim text. \Verbatim is used so that error messages are more -% enlightening. \next checks whether \Verbatim found its argument, -% and attempts to recover if not. -% -% Heuristically, if current environment is `foo' and argument of -% \Get@Verbatim is \The@Verbatim, then definition of \Verbatim is -% -% \def\Verbatim#1^^M#2^^M\the\EndVerbatimTokens\end{foo}{% -% \xdef\The@Verbatim{\noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine#2}% -% \endgroup\end{foo}} -% -% \The@Verbatim is then equal to the verbatim text, with spaces -% replaced by \Verbatim@Space, tabs replaced by \Verbatim@Tab, -% and ` replaced by \@lquote. In addition, each line begins with -% \Every@VerbatimLine, and each line but the last ends with -% \Verbatim@Par. It is then possible to redefine these when formatting -% the verbatim text. To insert each line as an argument to \foo, use -% \def\Every@VerbatimLine#1\Verbatim@Par{\foo{#1}} -% \The@Verbatim\Verbatim@Par -% -\newtoks\EndVerbatimTokens -\begingroup - \catcode`\|=0 - \catcode`\[=1 - \catcode`\]=2 - \catcode`\{=12 - \catcode`\}=12 - \catcode`\^^M=13% - \catcode`\\=12% - |gdef|Get@Verbatim#1[% - |begingroup% - |Verbatim@Codes|EveryVerbatimCodes% - |let|protect|noexpand% - |VerbatimEnvironment% - |edef|next[|noexpand|def|noexpand|Verbatim####1|noexpand^^M####2% - |noexpand^^M|the|EndVerbatimTokens\end{|@VerbEnvir}]% - |edef|endVerbatim[|noexpand|endgroup|noexpand|end[|@VerbEnvir]]% - |global|let|@VerbEnvir|relax% - |next[|@nil|xdef#1[|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##2]|endVerbatim]% - |def|next[|@ifnextchar|@nil[|@gobble]% If \@nil is there, then - [|gdef#1[]|endVerbatim|end[document]]]% \Verbatim found its argument. - |expandafter|next|Verbatim]% Otherwise, try to recover. - |gdef|AltGet@Verbatim#1[% - |begingroup% - |Verbatim@Codes|EveryVerbatimCodes% - |def^^M##1^^M##2[% - |ifx|@nil##2|@empty|else% - |noexpand|Verbatim@Par|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##1% - |expandafter^^M|expandafter##2% - |fi]% - |let|protect|noexpand% - |VerbatimEnvironment% - |edef|next[|noexpand|def|noexpand|Verbatim####1|noexpand^^M####2% - \end{|@VerbEnvir}]% - |edef|endVerbatim[|noexpand|endgroup|noexpand|end[|@VerbEnvir]]% - |global|let|@VerbEnvir|relax% - |next[|@nil|xdef#1[|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##2^^M|@nil]|endVerbatim]% - |def|next[|@ifnextchar|@nil[|@gobble]% - [|gdef#1[]|endVerbatim|end[document]]]% - |expandafter|next|Verbatim]% -|endgroup -\def\AltGetVerbatim{\let\Get@Verbatim\AltGet@Verbatim} - -% It is enough to not use \begin or \end when defining new verbatim -% environments, as the default is for \Get@Verbatim to look for the -% end of the current environment, but using \VerbatimEnvironment -% is easier to explain to users. - -\def\VerbatimEnvironment{% - \ifx\@VerbEnvir\relax\xdef\@VerbEnvir{\@currenvir}\fi} - -\let\@VerbEnvir\relax - -\def\The@VerbatimErr{% - \gdef\The@Verbatim{\@latexerr{Misplaced \string\end{Verbatim}}\@ehd}} -\The@VerbatimErr - -\begingroup -\catcode`\^^M=\active% -\catcode`\ =\active% -\catcode`\^^I=\active% -\gdef\Verbatim@ObeyThings{% -\catcode`\^^M=\active% -\catcode`\ =\active% -\catcode`\^^I=\active% -\catcode``=\active% -\def^^M{\noexpand\Verbatim@Par\noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine}% -\def^^I{\noexpand\Verbatim@Tab}% -\def {\noexpand\Verbatim@Space}% -\Verbatim@NoLigs}% -\gdef\Verbatim@DontObeyLines{\outer\def^^M{}}% -\endgroup - -\def\SaveVerbatim{\@bsphack\Get@Verbatim} - -\def\endSaveVerbatim{\@esphack} - -{\catcode``13 \gdef\Verbatim@NoLigs{\def`{\noexpand\@lquote}}} - -\def\Verbatim@Prep{% - \frenchspacing - \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}% - \VerbatimFont - \EveryVerbatim - \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbatimLine - \def\Verbatim@Space{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbatimSpace}% - \def\Verbatim@Tab{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbatimTab}}% - -\def\Verb@Prep{% - \frenchspacing - \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}% - \VerbFont - \EveryVerb - \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbatimLine - \def\Verbatim@Space{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbSpace}% - \def\Verbatim@Tab{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbTab}}% - -\def\Verbatim@Par{\leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty} - -% Parameter initialization: - -\def\VerbatimSpace{\ } - -{\catcode`\ =12\gdef\ttspace{{\tt }}} - -\def\VerbSpace{\ } - -\def\VerbatimTab{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ } - -\def\VerbTab{\ } - -\def\EveryVerbatim{} - -\def\EveryVerb{} - -\def\ThisVerb{} - -\def\EveryVerbatimLine{}% - -\def\EveryVerbOutLine{} - -\def\VerbatimFont{\tt} - -\def\VerbFont{\tt} - -\def\VerbatimFuzz{2pt}% - -\def\EveryVerbatimCodes{} - -\def\EveryVerbCodes{} - -\def\EveryVerbOutCodes{} - -\def\ThisVerbCodes{} - -\def\Verbatim@List#1{% - \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi - \leftskip\@totalleftmargin - \@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ - \parfillskip\@flushglue - \hfuzz\VerbatimFuzz\relax - \@@par - \global\@inlabelfalse %Prevents vspace from being inserted when - \Verbatim@Prep %first line exceeds \hsize. - #1% - \Verbatim@Par}% - -\def\UseVerbatim#1{% - \begingroup\trivlist\item[]\Verbatim@List{#1}\endtrivlist\endgroup} - -\def\Verbatim{\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim} -\def\endVerbatim{\UseVerbatim\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr} - -\def\LUseVerbatim#1{% - \begingroup\list{}{}\item[]\Verbatim@List{#1}\endlist\endgroup} - -\def\LVerbatim{\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim} -\def\endLVerbatim{\LUseVerbatim\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr} - -\def\BUseVerbatim{% - \@ifnextchar[{\@BUseVerbatim}{\@BUseVerbatim[]}} -\def\@BUseVerbatim[#1]#2{% - \begingroup - \Verbatim@Prep - \let\Verbatim@Par\@Btrivlistcr - \@Btrivlist{l}[#1]% - #2% - \endBtrivlist - \endgroup}% - -\def\BVerbatim{% - \catcode`\^^M=13\relax - \@ifnextchar[{\@BVerbatim}{\@BVerbatim[]}} -\def\@BVerbatim[#1]{\def\@tempa{[#1]}\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim} -\def\endBVerbatim{ - \expandafter\@BUseVerbatim\@tempa\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr} - -\newwrite\Verbatim@Outfile -\def\VerbatimOut#1{% - \@bsphack - \begingroup - \immediate\openout\Verbatim@Outfile #1\relax - \def\EveryVerbatimCodes{\EveryVerbOutCodes}% - \Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim} -\def\endVerbatimOut{% - \Verbatim@ObeyThings - \def\Verbatim@Par{^^J}% - \def\Verbatim@Space{\space}% - \def\Verbatim@Tab{\space}% - \def\@lquote{\string`}% - \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}% - \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbOutLine - \immediate\write\Verbatim@Outfile{\The@Verbatim}% - \immediate\closeout\Verbatim@Outfile - \endgroup - \The@VerbatimErr - \@esphack} - -% This one is a little tricky because: -% * we want to ignore the ^^M at the end of the last line, -% * we want to handle files that end with newline and files that don't -% * we want comment characters to work properly, -% * we want to expand each line before inserting \Every@VerbatimLine and -% \Verbatim@Par, -% -% \The@GVerbatim is used as scratch with global redefinition. -\newread\Verbatim@Infile -\def\Verbatim@Input#1#2{% - \begingroup - \Verbatim@Codes\EveryVerbatimCodes - \immediate\openin\Verbatim@Infile #1\relax - \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile - \@latexerr{No verbatim file #1}\@ehd - \else - \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine - \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile - \@latexerr{Verbatim file #1 is empty}\@ehd - \else - \let\The@Verbatim\The@GVerbatim - \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine - #2{\Verbatim@@Input}% - \fi - \fi - \immediate\closein\Verbatim@Infile - \endgroup} -\def\Verbatim@@Input{% - \let\protect\noexpand - \edef\The@Verbatim{% - \noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine - \The@Verbatim - \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else\noexpand\Verbatim@Par\fi}% - \let\protect\relax - \The@Verbatim - \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else - \let\The@Verbatim\The@GVerbatim - \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine - \expandafter\Verbatim@@Input - \fi}% -\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=\active% -\gdef\Verbatim@NextLine{% - \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else% - \immediate\read\Verbatim@Infile to\@tempa% - \expandafter\Verbatim@@NextLine\@tempa^^M\relax^^M\@nil% - \fi}% -% #2 is empty if line ends in ^^M, #2=\relax otherwise. -\gdef\Verbatim@@NextLine#1^^M#2^^M#3\@nil{% - \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\The@GVerbatim\expandafter{\The@GVerbatim#1}% - \ifx#2\@empty\@empty\else\expandafter\Verbatim@NextLine\fi}% -\endgroup% - -\def\UseVerb#1{\begingroup\Verb@Prep#1\endgroup} - -\def\SaveVerb{\@ifnextchar[{\Save@Verb}{\Save@Verb[]}} - -\long\def\Save@Verb[#1]#2{% - \begingroup - \Verbatim@Codes\Verbatim@DontObeyLines\EveryVerbCodes - \Save@@Verb{#1}{#2}} - -\long\def\Save@@Verb#1#2#3{% - \let\protect\noexpand - \def\next{\@ifnextchar\@nil{\@gobble}{\endgroup}}% - \long\def\Verb##1#3{\@nil\xdef#2{##1}\endgroup#1}% - \expandafter\next\Verb} - -\def\Verb{\Save@Verb[\UseVerb{\The@Verbatim}]{\The@Verbatim}} - -\def\VerbatimInput#1{\begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#1}\UseVerbatim\endgroup} - -\def\LVerbatimInput#1{\begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#1}\LUseVerbatim\endgroup} - -\def\BVerbatimInput{\@ifnextchar[{\@BVerbatimInput}{\@BVerbatimInput[]}} -\def\@BVerbatimInput[#1]#2{% - \begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#2}{\@BUseVerbatim[#1]}\endgroup} - -\endinput -%% END fancybox.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 88f687e7bd7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,193 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN npsfont.sty -%% -\def\fileversion{v1.0} -\def\filedate{91/11/20} -%% -%% Style option npsfont.sty, for use with LaTeX 2.09 -%% and the New Font Selection Scheme. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Copying of part or all of this file is allowed under the following -%% conditions only: -%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the file. Please -%% include the documentation when you do so. -%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of the file, but only for personal -%% use or use within an organization. -%% (3) You may copy fragments from the file, for personal use or for use -%% in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given -%% where credit is due. -%% -%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of -%% this file or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for -%% a nominal charge for copying etc. -%% -% DESCRIPTION: -% -% Defining new PostScript fonts with the New Font Selection Scheme is easy, -% but these macros make it easier. They save on keystrokes, and most -% importantly, they make it easy to change the file names used for fonts -% because you only have to type the file name once instead of 12 times (for -% the 12 standard LaTeX sizes). An optional argument lets you scale the fonts. -% -% These macros are substitutes for the NFSS's \new@fontshape command. For -% information on the purpose of this command, and on how to select fonts that -% are defined with it, see the documentation of the NFSS. If you don't have -% the NFSS, it is available from -% rusmv1.rus.uni-stuttgart.de -% in -% soft/tex/latex-style-supported/New-Font-Selection -% and from -% ymir.claremont.edu -% in -% [.anonymous.tex.inputs.latex-mainz] -% The NFSS is undoubtably the best way to use PostScript fonts (or any non- -% standard fonts) with LaTeX, and is well worth upgrading to. -% -% USAGE: -% -% \newpsfont[<scaling>]{<family>}{<series>}{<shape>}{<filename>} -% -% \newpsfamily[<scaling>]{<family>}{ -% {<series 1>}{<shape 1>}{<filename 1>}, -% {<series 2>}{<shape 2>}{<filename 2>}, -% . . . -% {<series n>}{<shape n>}{<filename n>}} -% -% The scaling argument is optional. Like the \new@fontshape command, these -% commands can only be used in the preamble. -% -% EXAMPLE: -% -% Suppose the Helvetica-Oblique virtual font on your system has the name -% phvro.vf. The following defines the <helvetica> family, <m>edium series, and -% <it>alic shape to be the Helvetica-Oblique font, at the standard LaTeX -% font sizes, scaled by .82: -% -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{it}{phvro} -% -% This is equivalent to: -% -% \new@fontshape{helvetica}{m}{it}{% -% <5>phvro at 4.1pt% -% <6>phvro at 4.92pt% -% <7>phvro at 5.74pt% -% <8>phvro at 6.56pt% -% <9>phvro at 7.38pt% -% <10>phvro at 8.2pt% -% <11>phvro at 8.979pt% -% <12>phvro at 9.84pt% -% <14>phvro at 11.808pt% -% <17>phvro at 14.1696pt% -% <20>phvro at 17.0068pt% -% <25>phvro at 20.4016pt}{} -% -% The following command sets up the standard Helvetica family: -% -% \newpsfamily[.82]{helvetica}{% -% {m}{n}{phvr}, %Helvetica -% {m}{it}{phvro}, %Helvetica-Oblique -% {m}{sl}{phvro}, %Helvetica-Oblique -% {bx}{n}{phvb}, %Helvetica-Bold -% {bx}{it}{phvbo}, %Helvetica-BoldOblique -% {bx}{sl}{phvbo}} %Helvetica-BoldOblique -% -% (Don't forget the commas.) It is equivalent to: -% -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{n}{phvr} %Helvetica -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{it}{phvro} %Helvetica-Oblique -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{sl}{phvro} %Helvetica-Oblique -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{n}{phvb} %Helvetica-Bold -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{it}{phvbo} %Helvetica-BoldOblique -% \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{phvbo} %Helvetica-BoldOblique -% \extra@def{helvetica}{}{} -% -% WHY SCALE FONTS?: -% -% Disclaimer: The suggestions that follow come from someone who doesn't know -% anything about fonts. -% -% Mixing fonts that are not designed to be used together is not for purists, -% but many of us do it anyway. Scaling the fonts can at least correct for -% differences in the x-heights. This is important if you use Computer -% Modern fonts for in-line math and some other fonts for text. -% -% To find out the x-height of the 10pt size of a font, load this style and -% use the command -% -% \showxheight{<filename>} -% -% E.g., \showxheight{phvr} and \showxheight{cmr10} displays -% -% x-height of cmr10 at 10pt is 4.30554pt -% x-height of phvr at 10pt is 5.24998pt -% -% on the terminal. Scaling the Helvetica fonts by 4.30554/5.24990 = .82 -% gets the x-heights of these fonts in line. It is best to set the x-heights -% the same for the medium weight, normal shaped fonts, and then scale the -% rest of the fonts in the same family by the same amount. -% -% David Jones has a psfonts.sty that sets up the standard PostScript fonts, -% all scaled so that the x-heights match that of the Computer Modern medium -% roman font. It is available via anonymous ftp from theory.lcs.mit.edu in -% /pub/dmjones. -% -% IMPLEMENTATION: -% -% \scale@stdsizes has at its argument a scaling factor. It uses \font@scale -% to define \scaled@sizes to be the macro whose argument is the name of a -% font, and which expands to the definitions of the standard \LaTeX{} sizes -% for New Font Selection Schemes \new@fontshape command. -% -\message{\space\space\fileversion\space\space\filedate - \space\space<tvz>} -\@ifundefined{new@psfontshape}{}{\endinput} -\def\font@scale#1#2#3{\dimen@=#2\dimen@=#3\dimen@ - \edef\scaled@sizes##1{\scaled@sizes{##1}<#1>##1 at\number\dimen@ sp}} -\def\scale@stdsizes#1{% - \edef\scaled@sizes##1{}% - \font@scale{5}{5pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{6}{6pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{7}{7pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{8}{8pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{9}{9pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{10}{10pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{11}{10.95pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{12}{12pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{14}{14.4pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{17}{17.28pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{20}{20.74pt}{#1}% - \font@scale{25}{24.88pt}{#1}} -\def\new@psfontshape#1#2#3#4{% - \new@fontshape{#1}{#2}{#3}{\scaled@sizes{#4}}{}} -\def\new@psfont[#1]#2#3#4#5{% - \scale@stdsizes{#1}% - \new@psfontshape{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}} -\def\newpsfont{% - \@ifnextchar [{\new@psfont}{\new@psfont[1]}} -\def\newpsfamily{% - \@ifnextchar [{\new@psfamily}{\new@psfamily[1]}} -\def\new@psfamily[#1]#2#3{% - \scale@stdsizes{#1}% - \@for\@tempa:=#3\do{% - \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\new@psfontshape{#2}\@tempa} - \@tempb}% - \extra@def{#2}{}{}} -\def\showxheight#1{% - \font\@tempfont=#1 at 10pt% - \typeout{^^J x-height of #1 at 10pt is \the\fontdimen5\@tempfont}} -% The commands are added to \@preamblecmds to save memory. -\begingroup - \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand} - \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds - \do\font@scale - \do\scale@stdsizes - \do\scaled@sizes - \do\new@psfontshape - \do\new@psfont - \do\newpsfont - \do\newpsfamily - \do\new@psfamily} -\endgroup -\endinput -%% END npsfont.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty deleted file mode 100644 index c71a539161f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN sem-a4.sty -\def\paperwidth{210mm} -\def\paperheight{297mm} -\input sem-page.sty -\slidewidth 222mm -\slideheight 152mm -\endinput -%% END sem-a4.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty deleted file mode 100644 index be12ee77b0f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN sem-page.sty -\def\fileversion{1.0} -\def\filedate{93/04/01} -%% -%% Contains the page parameters for the `seminar' LaTeX document style. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions. -%% -\def\slideleftmargin{.6in} -\def\sliderightmargin{.6in} -\def\slidetopmargin{.6in} -\def\slidebottommargin{.6in} -\ifarticle - \ifportrait - \twocolumn - \sloppy - \topmargin 0pt - \headheight 15pt - \headsep 25pt - \footskip 30pt - \footheight 15pt - \textheight\paperwidth\relax - \advance\textheight -1in - \advance\textheight -\headsep - \advance\textheight -\headheight - \advance\textheight -\footskip - \advance\textheight -\footheight - \advance\textheight -.5in - \textwidth\paperheight\relax - \advance\textwidth by -2in - \oddsidemargin 0pt - \evensidemargin 0pt - \leftmargini 2em - \leftmarginv .5em - \leftmarginvi .5em - \columnsep 40pt - \marginparwidth 0pt - \marginparsep 0pt - \else - \textwidth 5.5in - \oddsidemargin\paperwidth\relax - \advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth - \divide\oddsidemargin 2 - \advance\oddsidemargin -1in - \evensidemargin\oddsidemargin - \if@twoside - \advance\oddsidemargin -18pt - \advance\evensidemargin 18pt - \fi - \topmargin -20pt - \headheight 15pt - \headsep 25pt - \footskip 33pt - \footheight 15pt - \textheight\paperheight\relax - \advance\textheight -1in - \advance\textheight -\topmargin - \advance\textheight -\headsep - \advance\textheight -\headheight - \advance\textheight -\footskip - \advance\textheight -.5in - \fi -\else - \oddsidemargin 0pt - \evensidemargin 0pt - \marginparwidth 0pt - \marginparsep 0pt - \ifportrait - \textwidth\paperwidth\relax - \textheight\paperheight\relax - \else - \textwidth\paperheight\relax - \textheight\paperwidth\relax - \fi - \advance\textwidth by -2in - \topmargin -1in - \headheight .5in - \headsep .5in - \advance\textheight by -2in - \footskip .75in - \footheight .25in -\fi -\endinput -%% END sem-page.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 03a58cd842f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `semcolor.sty', version 1.01 -%% -%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: -%% -%% semcolor.sty Copyright (C) 1993 Timothy Van Zandt -%% -%% This package may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project -%% Public License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution. -%% Either version 1.0 or, at your option, any later version. -%% -\def\fileversion{1.01} -\def\filedate{2004/05/18} -%% -%% LaTeX style option `semcolor.sty'. -%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions. -%% -%% You must install the PSTricks package v0.9 or later to use semcolor.sty. -%% -\@ifundefined{SemcolorFrameOps}{}{\endinput} -\typeout{Style Option: `semcolor' for doc style `seminar' - \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)} -% RN modification begin -- 2004/05/04; Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de -%\input{pstricks} -\ProvidesFile{semcolor.sty}[\filedate\space v\fileversion\space (tvz)] -\RequirePackage{pstricks} -% RN modification end -% -% Set up the frame styles: -\def\SemcolorFrameOps{\psset{% - fillstyle=none,% - linewidth=\slideframewidth,% - framesep=\slideframesep,% - cornersize=absolute,% - linearc=.5cm,% - shadowsize=2pt,% - shadowcolor=darkgray}}% -\newslideframe{scplain}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psframebox{#1}} -\newslideframe{scdouble}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psdblframebox{#1}} -\newslideframe{scshadow}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psshadowbox{#1}} -\slideframe{scplain} -% -% Rotation: -\def\leftsliderotation#1{\rotateleft{#1}} -\def\rightsliderotation#1{\rotateright{#1}} -\sliderotation{left} -% -% Color: -\addto@hook\after@slidepage{\pstVerb{0 setgray}} -% -% Overlays: -\def\make@overlay#1{% - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{% - \pst@initoverlay{#1}% - \pst@Verb{(0) BOL}% - \copy\@@slidebox - \pst@Verb{(all) BOL}}} -\def\@overlay{\pst@overlay} -\addto@hook\before@newslide{\def\curr@overlay{0}} -\@ifundefined{overlaystrue}{}{\ifarticle\else\overlaystrue\layerstrue\fi} -% -\endinput -%% END semcolor.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 3602d985d7e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,183 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN semhelv.sty -\def\fileversion{1.4} -\def\filedate{2000/05/08} -%% -%% LaTeX style option `semhelv.sty' for the `seminar' document class. -%% For use with LaTeX2e. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1994, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% See seminar.cls or seminar.doc for copying restrictions. -%% Edited by Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk> -%% and Denis Girou <denis.girou@idris.fr> -%% To use OT1-encoding 7t names -%% ************************************************************************ -%% **** DESCRIPTION **** -%% ************************************************************************ -%% -% This file contains the external font information needed to load -% the PostScript Helvetica fonts for use by seminar.cls. -% -% IMPORTANT: -% As distributed, the following font file names are assumed for the -% `standard' TeX encoding: -% -% Helvetica phvr7t -% Helvetica-Oblique phvro7t -% Helvetica-Bold phvb7t -% Helvetica-BoldOblique phvbo7t -% Courier pcrr7t -% Courier-Bold pcrb7t -% Courier-Oblique pcrro7t -% Courier-BoldOblique pcrbo7t -% -% With the NFSS2 and LaTeX2e, you can also use the CORK encoding. The -% assumed file names are as above, but with `8t' instead of `7t' -% -% This means, e.g., that phvr7t.tfm or phvr7t.vf must be the name of the -% TeX .tfm or .vf (virtual font) file for the PostScript Helvetica font. -% See the documentation of your dvi-to-ps driver for information on using -% PostScript fonts. -% -% Fonts are scaled so that the x-heights match those of the cmr fonts; -% this makes in-line math look acceptable. -% -% Note: The Courier font is not that great. -% -% Preliminaries: -\csname semhelv@loaded\endcsname -\let\semhelv@loaded\endinput -\typeout{Style Option: `semhelv' for the `seminar' doc style - \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)} -\typeout{Modified by Stefan (see source for details)} -\@ifundefined{selectfont} - {\@seminarerr{`semhelv' style option can only be used - with the New Font Selection Scheme}\@eha\endinput}{} -% -% Font definitions. - -\expandafter\ifx\csname DeclareSizeFunction\endcsname\relax - -% FOR NFSS: - -\@ifundefined{newpsfamily}{\input{npsfont.sty}}{}% - -% See npsfont.sty for the definition of \newpsfamily. - -\newpsfamily[.82]{helvetica}{ - {m}{n}{phvr7t}, %Helvetica - {m}{it}{phvro7t}, %Helvetica-Oblique - {m}{sl}{phvro7t}, %Helvetica-Oblique - {bx}{n}{phvb7t}, %Helvetica-Bold - {bx}{it}{phvbo7t}, %Helvetica-BoldOblique - {bx}{sl}{phvbo7t}} %Helvetica-BoldOblique -\newpsfamily[.985]{courier}{ - {m}{n}{pcrr7t}, %Courier - {bx}{n}{pcrb7t}, %Courier-Bold - {m}{it}{pcrro7t}, %Courier-Oblique - {bx}{it}{pcrbo7t}} %Courier-BoldOblique - -% Use fonts or use \slidefonts: -\ifarticle - \renewcommand{\slidefonts}{% - \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}% - \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}% - \family\default@family\selectfont} -\else - \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}% - \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}% - \family\default@family\selectfont -\fi - -\else - -% FOR NFSS2 OR LATEX2E: - -\def\helv@scale{.82} - -\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{helvetica}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvr8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvro8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvrc8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvb8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvbo8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/m/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/n}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}% - -\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{helvetica}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvr7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvro7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvrc7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvb7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvbo7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/m/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/n}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}% - -\def\courier@scale{.985} - -% DG/SR modification begin - May. 13, 1998 -% Update some names (phvrq -> phvr7t etc.) -% DG/SR modification end - -\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{courier}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrr8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrro8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrrc8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrb8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrbo8t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/m/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * courier/b/n}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}% - -\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{courier}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrr7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrro7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrrc7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrb7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrbo7t}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/m/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * courier/b/n}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}% -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}% - -% Use fonts or use \slidefonts: -\ifarticle - \renewcommand{\slidefonts}{% - \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}% - \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}% - \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont} -\else - \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}% - \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}% - \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}% - \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont -\fi - -\fi - -\endinput -%% END semhelv.sty - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2 b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2 deleted file mode 100644 index 4ecd0ab188f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,252 +0,0 @@ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -*- Mode: Latex -*- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% seminar.bg2 --- Corrections for compatibility problems and new bugs -%% found in the Seminar package, waiting Seminar 98 -%% (see also the seminar.bug file in Seminar distribution) -%% -%% Disclaimer: this file is mine and doesn't engage TVZ! -%% -%% Note: insert this file after \usepackage{graphicx} if you use Graphicx -%% and after \usepackage{longtable} if you use LongTable -%% -%% Author : Denis GIROU (CNRS/IDRIS - France) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> -%% Created the : 1995 -%% Last mod. by : Denis GIROU (CNRS/IDRIS - France) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> -%% Last mod. the : Fri Jan 9 10:31:26 1998 -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\def\fileversion{1.6} -\def\filedate{November 20, 1997} -\typeout{seminar.bg2: various corrections for the Seminar document class added -since seminar.bug (waiting Seminar 98)^^J% -(Version \fileversion\space of <\filedate> (D.G.))} - -\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@} -\catcode`\@=11 - -% 1 - To correct a bug in the note environment -% (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) - <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - 1995) -\@savsf=1 - -% 2 - To correct several bugs to generate a list of slides with subsection -% entries -% (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) - <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - Jul. 18, 1995) -% - To clear the subheading when a new heading is defined -% (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997) -% - To assure coherence between heading and subheading when used in header/footer, -% for article mode -% (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997) -% - Improvements (\refstepcounter and \@addtoreset) by Jeremy Gibbons -% <jgibbons@brookes.ac.uk> - Sep. 30, 1997 - -% Used by the \slide@subheading macro but undefined -\def\theslidesubsection{\theslidesection.\arabic{slidesubsection}} - -\def\slide@heading[#1]#2{% -% Modification D.G. begin - Oct. 15, 1997 -% \stepcounter{slidesection}% - \refstepcounter{slidesection}% - \@addtoreset{slidesubsection}{slidesection} -% Modification D.G. end - \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@slide - {\the\c@slidesection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}% -% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997 -% \gdef\theslideheading{#1}% -% Modification D.G. end - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else - {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesection\endcsname\theslidesection}% - \makeslideheading{#2}}% - \fi -% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997 - \gdef\theslideheading{#1}% -% Modification D.G. end -% Modification D.G. begin - Aug. 1, 1997 - \gdef\theslidesubheading{}% -% Modification D.G. end -} - -\def\slide@subheading[#1]#2{% -% Modification D.G. begin - Oct. 15, 1997 -% \stepcounter{slidesection}% - \refstepcounter{slidesubsection}% -% Modification D.G. end - \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@subslide - {\the\c@slidesubsection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}% -% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997 -% \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}% -% Modification D.G. end - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else - {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesubsection\endcsname -% Modification D.G. begin - Jul. 18, 1995 -% \theslidesubsection}\makeslideheading{#2}}% - \theslidesubsection}\makeslidesubheading{#2}}% -% Modification D.G. end - \fi -% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997 - \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}% -% Modification D.G. end -} - -% 3 - To correct a bug in the \slidecontents macro -% (reported by Denis Roegel (LORIA) - <Denis.Roegel@loria.fr> - Sep. 22, 1996) - -\long\def\@gobblethree #1#2#3{} - -\def\slide@contents{% - \def\l@slide##1##2##3{% -% Modification Denis Roegel begin - Sep. 22, 1996 -% \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}% -% \let\l@subslide\@gobbletwo -% Modification Denis Roegel end - \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{##1}{##2}}{##3}}% - \let\l@subslide\@gobblethree - \@startlos} - -% 4 - To solve incompatibily between the Graphicx package and Seminar. -% The \espfslidesize Seminar macro work only with the old version of -% the EpsFig package, so with \includegraphics the PostScript files are -% always scaled without the possibility to leave them to there natural -% size. And also these files are not correctly scaled when we switch -% from normal to article mode under Seminar. So, we must redefined the -% \epsfslidesize macro of Seminar and modify few internal macros of -% Graphicx. -% (Note: I consider only the GraphicX package, not the GraphicS one) -% (reported by Karl Tombre (LORIA) - <Karl.Tombre@loria.fr> - and Denis Roegel -% (LORIA) - <Denis.Roegel@loria.fr> - Jan. 16, 1997) - -\def\GraphicsNotScaled{% -\ifx\Gin@viewport\undefined -\else % Graphicx package detected -\def\Gin@i{% - \def\Gin@req@sizes{% -% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 16, 1997 - \Gin@nat@height=\inverseslidesmag\Gin@nat@height - \Gin@nat@width=\inverseslidesmag\Gin@nat@width -% Modification Denis Girou end - \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height - \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}% - \@ifnextchar[\Gin@ii{\Gin@ii[]}} -% Modification Denis Girou begin - Feb. 19, 1997 -%\define@key{Gin}{width}{\def\Gin@ewidth{#1}} -%\define@key{Gin}{height}{\def\Gin@eheight{#1}} -%\define@key{Gin}{totalheight}{% -%\def\Gin@eresize{\totalheight}\def\Gin@eheight{#1}} -\define@key{Gin}{width}{% -\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@ewidth{\@tempdima}} -\define@key{Gin}{height}{% -\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@eheight{\@tempdima}} -\define@key{Gin}{totalheight}{% -\def\Gin@eresize{\totalheight}% -\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@eheight{\@tempdima}} -% Modification Denis Girou end -\fi} - -\def\epsfslidesize{% -\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize -% Modification Denis Girou begin - Feb. 19, 1997 -\GraphicsNotScaled} -% Modification Denis Girou end - -% 5 - To solve incompatibily between the LongTable package and Seminar -% (reported by Bhaskar Manda (UIUC) - <bhaskar@or4.me.uiuc.edu> - May 7, 1997) -% - Problem in article format seen later -% (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997) - -% From seminar.cls -\def\slide@outputLT{% (from \slide@output) - \@makeslide - \@testfalse - \ifnotesonly\else - \iflandscape - \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi - \else - \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi - \fi - \fi - \if@test - \reset@slideoutput -% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997 -% \@@makeslide - \@@makeslideLT -% Modification D.G. end - \process@slide - \fi - \refstepcounter{slide}} -\def\@@makeslideLT{% (from \@@makeslide) - \overfullslide@warning - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{% - \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax - \vbox to\slide@vsize{% -% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997 - \box\@outputbox -% Modification D.G. end - \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi - \unvbox\@slidebox - \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}% - \the\after@slidepage}% - \wd\@slidebox\textwidth} - -% From LongTable -\def\LT@output{% - \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mi - \ifnum\outputpenalty > -\LT@end@pen - \LT@err{floats and marginpars not allowed in a longtable}\@ehc - \else - \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}% - \ifdim \ht\LT@lastfoot>\ht\LT@foot - \dimen@\pagegoal - \advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@lastfoot - \ifdim\dimen@<\ht\z@ - \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\z@\copy\LT@foot\vss}% - \@makecol -% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997 -% \@outputpage - \slide@outputLT -% Modification D.G. end - \setbox\z@\vbox{\box\LT@head}% - \fi - \fi - \global\@colroom\@colht - \global\vsize\@colht - \vbox - {\unvbox\z@\box\ifvoid\LT@lastfoot\LT@foot\else\LT@lastfoot\fi}% - \fi - \else - \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\copy\LT@foot\vss}% - \@makecol -% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997 -% \@outputpage -% \global\vsize\@colroom % Work for slides, but not for notes... - \slide@outputLT -% Modification D.G. end - \copy\LT@head - \fi} - -% We must adjust \textheight. Sometimes, you must increase it a little by -% something like \addtolength{\textheight}{5mm} -% But if you use slides like \begin{slide*}[15cm,10cm] -% you must define locally \textheight=15cm -\addtolength{\textheight}{-\headheight} - -% 6 - To allow automatic changes of language dependant labels, -% for instance by loading french.sty after Seminar -% (suggested by Bernard Gaulle (IDRIS) - <gaulle@idris.fr> - Nov. 20, 1997) -% Modification Denis Girou begin - Nov. 20, 1997 -% From seminar.cls -\def\slidename{Slide} -\def\slidelabel{\bf\slidename{} \theslide} -% From slidesec.sty -\def\listslidename{List of Slides}% -\def\listofslides{\section*{\listslidename% -\@mkboth{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\listslidename}% - {\expandafter\MakeUppercase\listslidename}}% - \def\l@slide##1##2##3{% - \slide@undottedcline{\slidenumberline{##3}{##2}}{}}% - \let\l@subslide\l@slide - \@startlos} -% Modification Denis Girou end - -\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax -\endinput -%% END seminar.bg2 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug deleted file mode 100644 index 49b063fac58..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug +++ /dev/null @@ -1,197 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN seminar.bug -% LAST MODIFIED: December 1997 -% The latest version of this file can be obtained from Princeton.EDU. - -% This file list some bugs and latebreaking news for seminar.sty, -% version 1.0, released April 1, 1993. - -% 1. Typo in the user's guide: \espfslidesize should be \epsfslidesize. - -% 2. fancyheadings.sty does not work well with slides. -% WORKAROUND: Ignore the footnote in the User's Guide that discusses this. -% Instead: -% -% - If you want the width of the header to be "\textwidth" -% (the usual state of affairs), then put -% -% \renewcommand{\headwidth}{\textwidth} -% -% in the preamble and do not change "\headwidth" after that. -% -% - If you want to set the width to something else, then you have to scale -% it appropriately. E.g., use -% -% \setslidelength{\headwidth}{<dim>} -% -% or, if are using the "fancy" page style with both the article and -% slides formats, use -% \ifarticle -% \setartlength{\headwidth}{<dim1>} -% \else -% \setslidelength{\headwidth}{<dim2>} -% \fi - -% 3. Some people prefer that the headers/footers automatically adjust their -% size to the width of the framed slide (I don't, which I guess is why -% seminar.sty does not work this way.) I have added an option for this. -% Put the command -% -% \autoslidemarginstrue -% -% in the preamble. You must also input this file (seminar.bug), which -% contains the patch. - -% 4. The optional argument in \twoup[int] does not work with the -% portrait option and slides format. -% PATCH: Input this file. - -% 5. Slide labels can come out in the wrong size font. -% PATCH: Input this file. - -% 6. When \newslide is used inside a list environment, subsequent nested -% list environments can have the wrong line width. -% PATCH: Input this file. - -% 7. \overlaypagestyle and \layerpagestyle commands ignored. -% PATCH: Input this file, AFTER inputting semlayer.sty. - -% 8. boxedEPS.tex won't work inside slide environments (because seminar.sty -% erroneously modifies \read so that it is preceded by \immediate). -% PATCH: Input this file. - -%%%% PATCHES - -\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@} -\catcode`\@=11 - -% 3. -\newif\ifautoslidemargins -\ifarticle\else - \def\output@slide{% - \begingroup - \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in - \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in - \setslidelength\@tempdima{% - \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}% - \setslidelength\@tempdimb{% - \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}% - \ifrotateheaders - \@ifrotateslide{% - \dimen@=\@tempdima - \@tempdima=\@tempdimb - \@tempdimb=\dimen@}% - \fi - % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight - % used for scratch: - % Some page styles like to know \textwidth: - \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin - \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin - \ifautoslidemargins - \textwidth=\wd\@slidebox - \oddsidemargin=\@tempdima - \advance\oddsidemargin-\textwidth - \divide\oddsidemargin 2 - \else - \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin - \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin - \textwidth=\@tempdima - \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin - \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin - \fi - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{% - \kern\oddsidemargin - \vbox to\@tempdimb{% - \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1 - \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}% - \fi - \let\label\@gobble - \let\index\@gobble - \let\glossary\@gobble - \vbox to\headheight{% - \vfill - \hbox{% - \slideheadfont\relax\strut - \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}% - \kern\z@}% - \vfill - \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}% - \vfill - \vbox to\footheight{% - \hbox{% - \slidefootfont\relax\strut - \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}% - \vfill}}% - \hss}% - \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi - \insert@specials - \shipout\box\@slidebox - \endgroup - \let\firstmark\botmark} - \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{} -\fi - -% 4. -\ifarticle\else - \ifportrait - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \printlandscapetrue - \else - \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}} - \fi -\fi - -% 5. -\def\reset@slideoutput{% - \let\par\@@par - \reset@font - \normalsize - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}% - \catcode`\ =10 - \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii} - -% 6. -\def\extraslideheight#1{% - \@tempdima #1\relax - \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp} - \ifslide\set@slideheight\fi} -\def\set@slideheight{% - \iflandscape - \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight - \else - \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth - \fi - \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}% - \textheight\vsize - \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax} -\def\newslide{% - \par\penalty-\@M - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset - \the\before@newslide} - -% 7. Must be input after semlayer.sty. -\def\layer@prep{% - \ifarticle\else\pagestyle{\layer@pagestyle}\fi - \let\thepage\thelayer - \ifx\thelayerframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\thelayerframe\fi - \let\slidelabel\layerlabel} -\def\overlay@prep{% - \ifarticle\else\pagestyle{\overlay@pagestyle}\fi - \let\thepage\theoverlay - \ifx\theoverlayframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\theoverlayframe\fi - \let\slidelabel\overlaylabel} - -\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax -\endinput -%% END seminar.bug diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls deleted file mode 100644 index e5a5ae22d29..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1207 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN seminar.cls -%% LaTeX2e seminar class, derived by Sebastian Rahtz from -%% `seminar.sty', generated on <1993/10/8>. Fixes from David Carlisle -%% and Denis Girou. -%% -%\def\fileversion{1.0} -%\def\filedate{1993/04/01} -\def\fileversion{1.4} -\def\filedate{1997/10/13} -%% -%% LaTeX document style `seminar', for use with LaTeX v2.09. -%% This is a style for typesetting notes and slides. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Copying of part or all of any file in the seminar.sty package -%% is allowed under the following conditions only: -%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the files. Please -%% include the documentation when you do so. -%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of any file, but only for personal -%% use or use within an organization. -%% (3) You may copy fragments from the files, for personal use or for use -%% in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given -%% where credit is due. -%% -%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of -%% these files or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for -%% a nominal charge for copying etc. -%% -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesClass{seminar}[\filedate, \fileversion] -\typeout{% - Document Style: `seminar' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)} -\def\test@member#1#2{% - \edef\@tempg{,#2,#1,}% - \edef\@temph{####1,#1,}% - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@temph\@temph##2\@nil{% - \def\@tempg{##2}% - \ifx\@tempg\@empty\@testfalse\else\@testtrue\fi}% - \expandafter\@temph\@tempg\@nil} -\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}} -\@ifundefined{reset@font}{\def\reset@font{\normalsize\rm}}{} -\def\@seminarerr#1#2{% - \edef\@tempc{#2}\expandafter\errhelp\expandafter{\@tempc}% - \typeout{^^JSeminar.sty error.\space\space\space - Type \space H <return> \space for immediate help.^^J}% - \errmessage{#1^^J}} -\def\notslide@err#1{\message{Cannot use \string#1 in slide environments}} -\def\new@slidebox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt} -\newdimen\slidewidth \slidewidth 8.5in -\newdimen\slideheight \slideheight 6.3in -\paperwidth 8.5in -\paperheight 11in -\def\addto@preamblecmds#1{% - \begingroup - \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}% - \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds\do#1}% - \endgroup} -\addto@preamblecmds{\addto@preamblecmds\do\@preamblecmds} -\def\sem@temp#1{\@ifundefined{if#1}% - {\def\@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname} - \expandafter\@tempa\csname if#1\endcsname}{}} -\sem@temp{article}{} -\sem@temp{slidesonly}{} -\sem@temp{notes}{} -\sem@temp{notesonly}{} -\sem@temp{notesonlystar}{} -\sem@temp{portrait}{} -\DeclareOption{article}{\articletrue} -\DeclareOption{noxcomment}{\def\xcomment@hook{}} -\DeclareOption{slidesonly}{\slidesonlytrue\notesfalse\notesonlyfalse} -\DeclareOption{notes}{\notestrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesonlyfalse} -\DeclareOption{notesonly}{\notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse} -\DeclareOption{notesonly*}{% - \notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse\notesonlystartrue} -\DeclareOption{portrait}{\portraittrue} -\DeclareOption{a4}{% - \paperwidth 210mm - \paperheight 297mm - \slidewidth 222mm - \slideheight 152mm\relax} -\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\ds@a4}% -\DeclareOption{semrot}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semrot.sty}}} -\DeclareOption{semhelv}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semhelv.sty}}} -\DeclareOption{semcolor}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semcolor.sty}}} -\DeclareOption{semlcmss}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semlcmss.sty}}} -\DeclareOption{slidesec}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{slidesec.sty}}} -\DeclareOption{semlayer}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semlayer.sty}}} -\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} -\ProcessOptions -\ifnotesonly\else\notesonlystarfalse\fi -\newdimen\footheight % seminar.sty v1.0 uses it, but its not in LaTeX2e. -% Don't want these changed by article.cls: -\let\sem@paperheight\paperheight -\let\sem@paperwidth\paperwidth -\let\paperheight\footheight -\let\paperwidth\footheight -\LoadClass{article} -\renewcommand\normalsize{% - \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt - \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@ - \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@ - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \let\@listi\@slide@listi} -\let\paperheight\sem@paperheight -\let\paperwidth\sem@paperwidth -\RequirePackage{sem-page} -\newtoks\before@document -\newtoks\after@document -\let\xcomment@hook\relax -\before@document{\endgroup\the\before@document\begingroup} -\after@document{\the\after@document\xcomment@hook} -\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document} -\edef\document{\the\before@document\the\@temptokena\the\after@document} -\before@document{} -\after@document{} -\newtoks\before@enddocument -\before@enddocument{\the\before@enddocument} -\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument} -\edef\enddocument{\the\before@enddocument\the\@temptokena} -\before@enddocument{} -\newif\ifprintlandscape -\ifportrait - \ifarticle\printlandscapetrue\fi -\else - \ifarticle\else\printlandscapetrue\fi -\fi -\addto@hook\before@document{\ifprintlandscape\printlandscape\fi} -\addto@preamblecmds{\printlandscape} -\def\printlandscape{\addto@hook\before@enddocument{% - \typeout{^^J% - *******************************************************^^J% - ***** !! PRINT THIS DOCUMENT IN LANDSCAPE MODE !! *****^^J% - *******************************************************}}} -\def\slide{% - \NestedSlide@Error{slide}% - \landscapetrue - \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}} -\def\endslide{\end@slide} -\@namedef{slide*}{% - \NestedSlide@Error{slide*}% - \landscapefalse - \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}% -\@namedef{endslide*}{\end@slide} -\newcounter{slide} -\def\theslide{\arabic{slide}} -\newcount\slide@count -\newbox\@slidebox -\newbox\not@slidebox -\newif\ifslide -\newif\iflandscape -\def\@landscapeonly{0} -\def\landscapeonly{\def\@landscapeonly{1}} -\def\portraitonly{\def\@landscapeonly{-1}} -\def\NestedSlide@Error#1{% - \ifslide - \endgroup - \@seminarerr{Nested slide environments. Perhaps missing - \string\end{\@currenvir}. May be fatal}\@ehd - \expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}% - \ifslide\expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}\fi - \begingroup - \def\@currenvir{#1}% - \fi} -\def\begin@slide[#1,#2]{% - \slide@clearpage - \setlength\slidewidth{#1}% - \setlength\slideheight{#2}% - \begingroup - \ifarticle - \output{% - \advance\count@ 1 - \global\setbox\not@slidebox\box\@cclv}% - \par\@@par\penalty-\@M - \fi - \output{\slide@output}% - \slidetrue - \ifarticle\global\slide@count=\z@\fi - \refstepcounter{slide}% - \ifnotesonlystar\xdef\first@slidemarker{\the\c@slide}\fi - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset - \ifarticle\else - \edef\page@textheight{\number\textheight sp}% - \edef\page@textwidth{\number\textwidth sp}% - \fi - \set@slidesize - \slidebox@restore - \the\slide@hook - \the\before@newslide - \everyslide} -\def\end@slide{% - \par\penalty-\@M - \xdef\@tempg{\@currenvir}% - \endgroup - \ifslide - \@seminarerr{Perhaps missing `\string\end{\@tempg}', - \iffalse{\fi`\string}' or `\string\endgroup'}\@ehd - \def\next{\endgroup\ifslide\expandafter\next\fi}% - \next - \fi - \begingroup - \output{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv}% - \@@par\penalty-\@M - \endgroup - \global\advance\c@slide-1 - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}{\@nameuse{saved@c@##1}}}% - \slide@reset - \ifarticle\outputloop@savedslides\fi - \the\after@slide} -\let\slideclearpagetrue\relax -\let\slideclearpagefalse\relax -\ifarticle - \def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@} - \ifnotes - \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}} - \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}} - \else - \ifnotesonly - \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}} - \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}} - \fi - \fi -\else - \def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage} -\fi -\newtoks\slide@hook -\def\everyslide{} -\newtoks\after@slide -\def\slidebox@restore{% - \def\thepage{\theslide}% - \def\newpage{\newslide}% - \def\clearpage{\newslide}% - \def\thispagestyle##1{\notslide@err{\thispagestyle}}% - \pagestyle{\slide@pagestyle}% - \@twocolumnfalse - \def\twocolumn{\notslide@err{\twocolumn}}% - \def\onecolumn{\notslide@err{\onecolumn}}% - \def\marginpar##1{\notslide@err{\marginpar}}% - \def\thanks{\slidethanks}% - \def\maketitle{\slidemaketitle}% - \fix@floats - \fix@whatsits - \slide@footnotes - \def\do##1{\expandafter\xdef\csname - saved@c@##1\endcsname{\the\@nameuse{c@##1}}}% - \slide@reset - \topskip\z@ \maxdepth\z@ - \slide@listparameters - \slidefonts - \def\baselinestretch{\slidestretch}% - \def\arraystretch{\slidearraystretch}% - \sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}} -\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}\gdef\thedate{#1}} -\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}\gdef\theauthor{#1}} -\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\gdef\thetitle{#1}} -\date{\today} -\let\slidethanks\thanks -\def\thethanks{\@thanks}% -\def\slidemaketitle{% - \par - \begin{center}\bf - {\large \thetitle}\par\vskip 1ex - \begin{tabular}[t]{c} \theauthor \end{tabular}\par\vskip 1ex - \thedate - \end{center}% - \thethanks\par} -\def\fix@floats{% - \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{% - \expandafter\let\csname end##1\endcsname\end@float - \par\medskip\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{##1}\parindent\z@ - \ignorespaces}% - \def\end@float{\par\vskip\z@\egroup\medskip}% - \def\@dblfloat{\@float}\def\end@dblfloat{\end@float}% - \def\endfigure{\end@float}\def\endtable{\end@float}} -\let\normal@write\write -\let\normal@read\read -\let\normal@openout\openout -\let\normal@closeout\closeout -% changed as per DPC 1997/09/16 -\def\fix@whatsits{% - \long\def \protected@write##1##2##3{% - \begingroup - ##2% - \let\protect\noexpand - \immediate\normal@write##1{##3}% - \endgroup - \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}% -} -% end change -\newinsert\slide@footins -\skip\slide@footins=\bigskipamount -\count\slide@footins=1000 -\dimen\slide@footins=4in -\def\theslidefootnote{\alph{footnote}} -\def\slide@footnotes{% - \def\thefootnote{\theslidefootnote}% - \let\footins\slide@footins - \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M} -\def\slidefonts{} -\def\slidestretch{1.18} -\def\slidearraystretch{1.2} -\def\raggedslides{\@ifnextchar[{\@raggedslides}{\@raggedslides[1fil]}} -\def\@raggedslides[#1]{% - \edef\slide@@rightskip{#1}% - \ifslide\slide@rightskip\fi} -\def\slide@rightskip{% - \@rightskip\z@ plus \slide@@rightskip\relax \rightskip\@rightskip} -\def\slide@@rightskip{1fil} -\newcount\slide@listdepth -\def\slide@listparameters{% - \let\@listdepth\slide@listdepth - \slide@listdepth\z@ - \def\@listi{\slide@listi}% - \def\@listii{\slide@listii}% - \def\@listiii{\slide@listiii}% - \let\@listiv\relax\let\@listv\relax\let\@listvi\relax} -\def\slide@listi{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \parsep\parskip \divide\parsep2 - \partopsep\slidepartopsep\relax - \advance\partopsep-\parskip - \ifdim\partopsep<\z@\partopsep\z@\fi - \itemsep\slideitemsep\relax - \ifdim\parsep<\itemsep - \topsep\itemsep \advance\topsep-\parsep - \else - \itemsep\parsep \topsep\z@ - \fi} -\def\slide@listii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginii - \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \divide\itemsep2 \divide\parsep2 - \divide\topsep2 \divide\partopsep2\relax}% -\def\slide@listiii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginiii - \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \itemsep \z@ \parsep\z@ \topsep\z@}% -\def\slideleftmargini{1.8em} -\def\slideleftmarginii{1.4em} -\def\slideleftmarginiii{1em} -\def\slidelabelsep{.5em} -\def\slideitemsep{.8ex minus .2ex} -\def\slidepartopsep{1ex minus .2ex} -\newbox\saved@specials -\def\save@slidespecials{% - \begingroup - \output{% - \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv - \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@ - \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@ - \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}% - \hbox{}\penalty-\@M - \global\let\saved@texttop\@texttop - \gdef\@texttop{% - \ifvoid\saved@specials\else\box\saved@specials\nointerlineskip\fi - \saved@texttop - \global\let\@texttop\saved@texttop}% - \endgroup} -\addto@hook\after@document{\save@slidespecials} -\ifarticle\else - \def\insert@specials{% - \ifvoid\saved@specials\else - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}% - \fi - \global\let\insert@specials\relax} -\fi -\def\extraslideheight#1{% - \@tempdima #1\relax - \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp} - \ifslide\set@slidesize\fi} -\extraslideheight{6pt} -\def\set@slidesize{% - \iflandscape - \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth - \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight - \else - \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight - \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth - \fi - \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}% - \textheight\vsize - \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax - \textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\hsize\linewidth\hsize} -\def\newslide{% - \par\penalty-\@M - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset - \the\before@newslide - \set@slidesize} -\newtoks\before@newslide -\def\slide@reset{\do{footnote}} -\def\slidereset#1{\def\slide@reset{}\addtoslidereset{#1}} -\def\addtoslidereset#1{% - \edef\@tempa{#1}\expandafter\addto@slidereset\@tempa,\@nil,} -\def\addto@slidereset#1,{% - \ifx\@nil#1\else - \@ifundefined{c@#1}% - {\@seminarerr{Counter `#1' not defined}\@ehd}% - {\expandafter\def\expandafter\slide@reset\expandafter{% - \slide@reset\do{#1}}}% - \expandafter\addto@slidereset - \fi} -\def\slide@output{% - \@makeslide - \@testfalse - \ifnotesonly\else - \iflandscape - \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi - \else - \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi - \fi - \fi - \if@test - \reset@slideoutput - \@@makeslide - \process@slide - \fi - \refstepcounter{slide}} -\def\reset@slideoutput{% - \let\par\@@par - \reset@font - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}% - \catcode`\ =10 - \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii} -\newif\ifcenterslides -\centerslidestrue -\providecommand\@begindvi{} % added 1997/04/15 SPQR, to cope with very - % old LaTeXs -\def\@makeslide{% - \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{% - \@begindvi % added 1997/04/15 SPQR - \unvbox\@cclv - \ifvoid\slide@footins\else - \vskip\skip\slide@footins - \footnoterule - \unvbox\slide@footins - \fi - \vskip\z@}} -\def\@@makeslide{% - \overfullslide@warning - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{% - \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax - \vbox to\slide@vsize{% - \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi - \unvbox\@slidebox - \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}% - \the\after@slidepage}% - \wd\@slidebox\textwidth} -\def\overfullslide@warning{% - \dimen@\ht\@slidebox - \advance\dimen@-\slide@vsize\relax - \ifdim\dimen@>\slidefuzz\relax - \@warning{Slide \theslide\space overfull by \the\dimen@}% - \fi} -\def\slidefuzz{2pt} -\newtoks\after@slidepage -\newif\ifrotateheaders -\def\sliderotation#1{\@ifundefined{semsr@#1}% - {\@latexerr{Slide rotation `#1' not defined.}\@eha}% - {\@nameuse{semsr@#1}}} -\def\semsr@left{% - \def\rotate@slide{% - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\leftsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}} -\def\semsr@right{% - \def\rotate@slide{% - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\rightsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}} -\def\semsr@none{\let\rotate@slide\relax} -\sliderotation{none} -\def\leftsliderotation#1{% - \@seminarerr{\string\leftsliderotation\space has not been defined}% - \@ehd} -\let\rightsliderotation\leftsliderotation -\def\@ifrotateslide#1{% - \ifx\rotate@slide\relax\else - \iflandscape\ifportrait#1\fi\else\ifportrait\else#1\fi\fi - \fi} -\def\process@slide{% - \slideframewidth=\inverseslidesmag\slideframewidth - \slideframesep=\inverseslidesmag\slideframesep - \fboxrule\slideframewidth - \fboxsep\slideframesep - \ifarticle - \@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide - \else - \ifrotateheaders\else\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi - \fi - \process@@slide} -\def\process@@slide{\finish@slide\output@slide} -\def\finish@slide{% - \theslideframe - \add@slidelabel\slidelabel} -\ifarticle - \def\output@slide{% - \global\advance\slide@count1 - \@ifundefined{slidebox@\the\slide@count}% - {{\globaldefs=1\expandafter - \new@slidebox\csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname}}{}% - \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname - slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname\box\@slidebox} -\else - \def\output@slide{% - \begingroup - \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in - \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in - \setslidelength\@tempdima{% - \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi} - \setslidelength\@tempdimb{% - \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi} - \ifrotateheaders - \@ifrotateslide{% - \dimen@=\@tempdima - \@tempdima=\@tempdimb - \@tempdimb=\dimen@} - \fi - % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight - % used for scratch: - \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin - \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin - \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin - \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin - % Some page styles like to know \textwidth: - \textwidth=\@tempdima - \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin - \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{% - \kern\oddsidemargin - \vbox to\@tempdimb{% - \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1 - \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}% - \fi - \let\label\@gobble - \let\index\@gobble - \let\glossary\@gobble - \vbox to\headheight{% - \vfill - \hbox{% - \slideheadfont\relax\strut - \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}% - \kern\z@}% - \vfill - \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}% - \vfill - \vbox to\footheight{% - \hbox{% - \slidefootfont\relax\strut - \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}% - \vfill}}% - \hss}% - \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi - \insert@specials - \shipout\box\@slidebox - \endgroup - \let\firstmark\botmark} - \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{} -\fi -\newskip\slidesep -\slidesep\intextsep -\ifarticle - \def\fps@fslide{htbp} - \def\ftype@fslide{32} - \def\float@savedslide{% - \begingroup\@float{fslide}% - \centerline{\box\@slidebox}% - \end@float\endgroup}% - \@namedef{float*@savedslide}{% - \begingroup\@dblfloat{fslide}% - \centerline{\box\@slidebox}% - \end@dblfloat\endgroup}% - \def\center@slide{\hbox{% - \kern-\@totalleftmargin - \hbox to \columnwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}}% - \def\onepercol@savedslide{% - \vbox to .996\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak}% - \def\twopercol@savedslide{% - \dimen@.5\textheight - \advance\dimen@-\slidesep - \ifdim\ht\@slidebox>\dimen@ - \onepercol@savedslide - \else - \vbox to .498\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak - \fi} - \def\here@savedslide{% - \addvspace\slidesep\center@slide\addvspace\slidesep} - \@namedef{here*@savedslide}{% - \goodbreak \hrule \@height\z@ \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak - \center@slide - \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak \hrule\@height\z@ \goodbreak} -\fi -\ifarticle - \def\slideplacement#1{\@ifundefined{#1@savedslide}% - {\@seminarerr{Slide placement `#1' undefined}\@ehd}% - {\expandafter\let\expandafter\output@savedslide - \csname #1@savedslide\endcsname}} -\else - \def\slideplacement#1{} -\fi -\ifarticle - \ifnotes - \ifportrait - \slideplacement{float} - \else - \slideplacement{float*} - \fi - \else - \ifportrait - \slideplacement{onepercol} - \else - \slideplacement{twopercol} - \fi - \fi -\fi -\ifarticle - \def\outputloop@savedslides{% - \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth - \ifvoid\not@slidebox\else - \dimen@=\dp\not@slidebox - \unvbox\not@slidebox - \hrule height\z@ - \prevdepth\dimen@ - \penalty\z@ - \fi - \edef\slide@@count{\the\slide@count\relax}% - \slide@count\z@ - \loop - \ifnum\slide@count<\slide@@count - \advance\slide@count1 - \expandafter\setbox\expandafter\@slidebox\expandafter\box - \csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname - \output@savedslide - \repeat - \ifnotesonlystar\make@slidemarker\fi} -\fi -\def\make@slidemarker{% - \addvspace\slidesep - \moveleft\@totalleftmargin - \vbox{% - \hsize\columnwidth - \hrule height 1pt - \kern 8pt - \hbox to \columnwidth{% - \hss - \LARGE\bf\the@slidemarker - \hss}% - \kern 8pt - \hrule height 1pt}% - \addvspace\slidesep} -\def\the@slidemarker{% - Slide% - \ifnum\c@slide=\first@slidemarker\else - s {\c@slide\first@slidemarker\relax\theslide} --\fi - { }\theslide}% -\ifarticle - \let\c@note\c@page - \def\p@note{\p@page} - \def\thenote{\thepage} -\else - \newcounter{note} - \def\thenote{\theslide-\arabic{note}} - \def\thepage{\thenote} - \addto@hook\after@slide{\setcounter{note}{1}} - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@outputpage\expandafter{% - \@outputpage\stepcounter{note}} -\fi -\ifarticle\else - \let\c@page\c@slide - \countdef\c@slide=0 - \c@slide=0 - \c@page=1 -\fi -\ifarticle - \let\truepagenumbers\relax -\else - \def\truepagenumbers{% - \let\c@slide\c@page - \countdef\c@page=0 - \c@page=1 - \c@slide=0 - \let\truepagenumbers\relax} -\fi -\addto@preamblecmds{\truepagenumbers} -\newdimen\slideframewidth \slideframewidth 4pt -\newdimen\slideframesep \slideframesep .3in -\def\newslideframe#1{% - \@ifnextchar[{\@newslideframe{#1}}{\@newslideframe{#1}[]}} -\def\@newslideframe#1[#2]{% - \@namedef{semsfops@#1}{#2}% - \@namedef{semsf@#1}##1} -\newslideframe{plain}{\fbox{#1}} -\def\slideframe{\@slideframe{slide}} -\def\@slideframe#1{% - \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@@slideframe{#1}}{\@testfalse\@@slideframe{#1}}} -\def\@@slideframe#1{% - \@ifnextchar[{\@@@slideframe{#1}}{\@@@slideframe{#1}[]}} -\def\@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{% - \def\@tempa{none}% - \def\@tempb{#3}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \@namedef{the#1frame}{\relax}% - \else - \ifx\@tempb\@empty - \@namedef{the#1frame}{}% - \else - \@ifundefined{semsf@#3}% - {\@seminarerr{Slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}% - {\if@test - \@@@@slideframe{#1}[#2]{#3}% - \else - \@namedef{the#1frame}{\setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{% - \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}#2\@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}% - \fi}% - \fi - \fi} -\def\@@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1frame\endcsname - \edef\next{% - \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1frame\endcsname}% - \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{% - \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}% - #2% - \@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}}% -\slideframe{plain} -\def\slidestyle#1{\@ifundefined{ss@#1}% - {\@seminarerr{Slide style `#1' undefined}\@eha}% - {\@nameuse{ss@#1}}} -\def\ss@empty{\let\add@slidelabel\@gobble} -\def\ss@left{\def\add@slidelabel##1{% - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{% - \vbox to \ht\@slidebox{\vss - \hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 15pt}% - \vss}\box\@slidebox}}} -\def\ss@bottom{\def\add@slidelabel##1{% - \setbox\@slidebox=\vbox{\copy\@slidebox\vskip 9pt - \hbox to\wd\@slidebox{\hss##1\hss}}}}% -\ifarticle - \ifportrait\slidestyle{bottom}\else\slidestyle{left}\fi -\else - \slidestyle{empty} -\fi -\def\slidelabel{\bf Slide \theslide} -\def\newpagestyle#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\newcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{% - \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}} -\def\renewpagestyle#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\renewcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{% - \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}} -\def\@ifgoodps#1{% - \@ifundefined{ps@#1}{\@seminarerr{Page style `#1' undefined}\@eha}} -\def\slidepagestyle#1{% - \@ifgoodps{#1}% - {\ifslide\pagestyle{#1}\else\edef\slide@pagestyle{#1}\fi}} -\def\ps@{} -\slidepagestyle{} -\ifarticle - \def\ps@align{} -\else - \def\ps@align{% - \def\@oddhead{\thepage\hfil+}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{+\hfil+}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot} -\fi -\def\slideheadfont{\scriptsize} -\def\slidefootfont{\scriptsize} -\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or - 2074\or 2488\or 2986\or 3583\or 4300\or 5160\fi\relax} -\def\magstepminus#1{% - \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax} -\def\@magstep#1{% - \ifnum#1<\z@\magstepminus{-#1}\else\magstep#1\fi} -{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12 - \gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}} -\def\invert@mag#1{\@tempdima=1000pt - \divide\@tempdima by #1\relax - \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@tempdima#1} -\def\@slidesmag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax% - \ifnum\@tempcnta>0 - \edef\inverseslidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \invert@mag\inverseslidesmag - \ifarticle\else\mag\@tempcnta\fi - \else - \@seminarerr{\string\@slidesmag\space argument must be an - integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha - \fi} -\def\@articlemag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax% - \ifnum\@tempcnta>0 - \edef\inverseartmag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \invert@mag\inverseartmag - \ifarticle\mag\@tempcnta\fi - \else - \@seminarerr{\string\articlemag\space argument must be an - integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha - \fi} -\addto@preamblecmds{\@slidesmag\do\@articlemag} -\newdimen\semin -\newdimen\semcm -\def\@semmagerr#1{% - \@seminarerr{\string#1 argument must be an integer - between -5 and 9}\@eha} -\def\slidesmag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6 - \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 - \edef\the@slidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \@slidesmag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}% - \else - \@semmagerr\slidesmag - \fi - \else - \@semmagerr\slidesmag - \fi - \setslidelength\semin\seminlength - \setslidelength\semcm\semcmlength} -\def\seminlength{1in} -\def\semcmlength{1cm} -\def\articlemag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6 - \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 - \edef\the@articlemag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \@articlemag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}% - \else - \@semmagerr\articlemag - \fi - \else - \@semmagerr\articlemag - \fi} -\addto@preamblecmds{\slidesmag\do\articlemag} -\def\setslidelength#1#2{% - #1=#2\relax - #1=\inverseslidesmag#1}% -\def\addtoslidelength#1#2{% - \dimen@=#2\relax - \advance#1 by \inverseslidesmag\dimen@} -\def\setartlength#1#2{% - #1=#2\relax - #1=\inverseartmag#1} -\def\addtoartlength#1#2{% - \dimen@=#2\relax - \advance#1 by \inverseartmag\dimen@} -\def\slide@epsfsize#1#2{% - \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt - \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt - \inverseslidesmag#1% - \else - 0pt - \fi - \else - \inverseslidesmag\epsfxsize - \fi - \epsfysize - \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt - \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt - \inverseslidesmag#2% - \else - 0pt - \fi - \else - \inverseslidesmag\epsfysize - \fi} -\def\epsfslidesize{\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize} -\slidesmag{4} -\articlemag{0} -\def\do@pageparameters{% - \do\oddsidemargin - \do\evensidemargin - \do\marginparwidth - \do\marginparsep - \do\topmargin - \do\headheight - \do\headsep - \do\textheight - \do\textwidth - \do\topskip - \do\footskip - \do\footheight} -\ifarticle - \def\scale@pageparameters{% - \begingroup - \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseartmag##1\relax}% - \do@pageparameters - \endgroup} -\else - \def\scale@pageparameters{% - \begingroup - \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseslidesmag##1\relax}% - \do@pageparameters - \endgroup} -\fi -\addto@hook\before@document{\scale@pageparameters} -\addto@preamblecmds{\scale@pageparameters\do\do@pageparameters} -\def\allversions{} -\let\endallversions\relax -\@namedef{allversions*}{\@bsphack\globaldefs=1} -\@namedef{endallversions*}{\@esphack} -\def\slide@list{slide,slide*,allversions,allversions*} -\def\addtoslidelist#1{\xdef\slide@list{\slide@list,#1}} -\addto@preamblecmds{\addtoslidelist} -\ifslidesonly - \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{\@@input xcomment.sty }{} - \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}} - \newxcomment[]{note} -\else - \def\note{\@bsphack}% - \def\endnote{\@esphack}% -\fi -\def\noxcomment{\def\xcomment@hook{}} -\def\os@list{} -\newif\if@os -\def\onlyslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@ostrue - \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\onlyslides\space argument - contains undefined references}}} -\def\notslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@osfalse - \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\notslides\space argument - contains undefined references}}} -\addto@preamblecmds{\onlyslides\do\notslides} -\addto@hook\after@document{% - \ifx\os@list\@empty\else\os@expandlist\fi} -\def\os@expandlist{% - \let\os@@warning\relax - \begingroup - \def\ref##1{\@ifundefined{r@##1}{?}% - {\noexpand\@car\@nameuse{r@##1}\noexpand\@nil}}% - \edef\@tempd{\os@list}% - \xdef\os@list{}% - \@for\@tempc:=\@tempd - \do{\expandafter\os@expandrange\@tempc-:-:\@nil}% - \os@@warning - \endgroup - \let\os@expandrange\relax - \let\os@checknum\relax - \let\os@expandlist\relax} -\def\os@expandrange#1-#2-#3\@nil{% - \def\@tempa{?}\def\@tempb{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \let\os@@warning\os@warning - \else - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \def\@tempb{#2}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \let\os@@warning\os@warning - \else - \def\@tempa{:}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \else - \@tempcntb=#2\relax - \fi - \advance\@tempcnta by -1 - \advance\@tempcntb by 1 - \ifx\os@list\@empty - \xdef\os@list{\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}% - \else - \xdef\os@list{\os@list,\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}% - \fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\os@test{% - \@testtrue - \iflandscape - \ifnum\@landscapeonly=-1 \@testfalse\fi - \else - \ifnum\@landscapeonly=1 \@testfalse\fi - \fi - \if@test - \ifx\os@list\@empty\else - \if@os\@testfalse\fi - \@for\@tempa:=\os@list\do{\expandafter\os@testrange\@tempa\@nil}% - \fi - \fi} -\def\os@testrange#1+#2\@nil{% - \ifnum\c@slide>#1 - \ifnum\c@slide<#2 - \if@os\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\onlynotestoo{% - \ifnotes\@testtrue\else\ifnotesonly\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi\fi - \if@test - \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{% - \edef\sem@temp{\the\catcode`\@}% - \catcode`\@=11 - \@@input xcomment.sty - \catcode`\@=\sem@temp\relax}{}% - \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}% - \addto@hook\after@slide\onlynotes@too - \fi} -\def\onlynotes@too{% - \os@test - \if@test\gdef\do@end{}\else\gdef\do@end{\xc@begin}\fi} -\addto@preamblecmds\onlynotestoo -\def\ptsize#1{% - \@ifundefined{#1@semptsize}% - {\@seminarerr{\string\ptsize\space `#1' not valid.}\@eha}% - {\ifslide - \sem@ptsize{#1}\large\normalsize - \else - \edef\slide@ptsize{#1}% - \fi}} -\edef\slide@ptsize{1\@ptsize}% -\def\slidefontsizes{\ptsize} %For backwards compatibility?? -\def\slide@setsize#1#2#3#4{% - \@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \set@slideskip{#2}} -\def\slide@@setsize#1#2#3#4{% - \slide@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\slidedisplayskips} -\def\set@slideskip#1{% - \normallineskiplimit=#1 - \advance\normallineskiplimit-\normalbaselineskip - \multiply\normallineskiplimit-1 - \normallineskiplimit\slideskip\normallineskiplimit - \ifdim\normallineskiplimit<1pt\normallineskiplimit=1pt\fi - \normallineskip=\normallineskiplimit - minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit - \dimen@=\normalbaselineskip - \normalbaselineskip=\dimen@ minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit - \normalbaselines} -\def\slideskip{.75} -\def\slideshrink{.25} -\def\slidedisplayskips{% - \abovedisplayskip 1.75ex minus .35ex - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip .2ex minus .2ex - \belowdisplayshortskip 1ex minus .2ex} -\def\sem@ptsize#1{% - \@nameuse{#1@semptsize}% - \large\normalsize - \leftmargini\slideleftmargini\relax - \leftmarginii\slideleftmarginii\relax - \leftmarginiii\slideleftmarginiii\relax - \labelsep\slidelabelsep\relax - \parskip\slideparskip\relax - \parindent\slideparindent\relax - \slide@rightskip - \slide@listi - \skip\footins\slidefootins\relax - \footnotesep\slidefootnotesep\relax} -\def\slidefootins{2ex minus .8ex} -\def\slidefootnotesep{1.2ex} -\def\slideparindent{\z@} -\def\slideparskip{1ex minus .2ex} -\@namedef{8@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}} -\@namedef{9@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}} -\@namedef{10@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}} -\@namedef{11@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}} -\@namedef{12@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}% - \let\Huge\huge} -\@namedef{14@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}% - \let\huge\LARGE - \let\Huge\LARGE} -\@namedef{17@semptsize}{% - \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}% - \let\LARGE\Large - \let\huge\Large - \let\Huge\Large} -\def\twoup{\@ifnextchar[{\@twoup}{\@twoup[0]}} -\ifarticle - \ifportrait - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \targetlayout{topbottom}% - \printlandscapefalse - \else - \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}} - \else - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \if@twoside - \targetlayout{twosided}% - \fi - \printlandscapetrue - \else - \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}} - \fi -\else - \ifportrait - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \advance\@tempcnta by -3 - \target{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \printlandscapetrue - \else - \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}} - \else - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \targetlayout{topbottom}% - \printlandscapefalse - \else - \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmargerr\slidesmag}}% - \fi -\fi -\def\@semtwoupmagerr#1{% - \@seminarerr{\string#1 must come before \string\twoup}\@eha} -\addto@preamblecmds{\twoup\do\@twoup} -\openin1 seminar.con -\ifeof1\else\closein1 \relax\@@input seminar.con\fi -\endinput -%% -%% END `seminar.cls'. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 4b92372424a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1172 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN seminar.sty -%% -%% This is file `seminar.sty', generated -%% on <1993/4/2> with the docstrip utility (2.0r). -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% seminar.doc -%% -\def\fileversion{1.0} -\def\filedate{93/04/01} -%% -%% LaTeX document style `seminar', for use with LaTeX v2.09. -%% This is a style for typesetting notes and slides. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Copying of part or all of any file in the seminar.sty package -%% is allowed under the following conditions only: -%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the files. Please -%% include the documentation when you do so. -%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of any file, but only for personal -%% use or use within an organization. -%% (3) You may copy fragments from the files, for personal use or for use -%% in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given -%% where credit is due. -%% -%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of -%% these files or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for -%% a nominal charge for copying etc. -%% -\@ifundefined{@seminarerr}{}{\endinput} -\typeout{% - Document Style: `seminar' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)} -\def\test@member#1#2{% - \edef\@tempg{,#2,#1,}% - \edef\@temph{####1,#1,}% - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@temph\@temph##2\@nil{% - \def\@tempg{##2}% - \ifx\@tempg\@empty\@testfalse\else\@testtrue\fi}% - \expandafter\@temph\@tempg\@nil} -\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}} -\@ifundefined{reset@font}{\def\reset@font{\normalsize\rm}}{} -\def\@seminarerr#1#2{% - \edef\@tempc{#2}\expandafter\errhelp\expandafter{\@tempc}% - \typeout{^^JSeminar.sty error.\space\space\space - Type \space H <return> \space for immediate help.^^J}% - \errmessage{#1^^J}} -\def\notslide@err#1{Cannot use \string#1 in slide environments} -\def\new@slidebox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt} -\newdimen\slidewidth \slidewidth 8.5in -\newdimen\slideheight \slideheight 6.3in -\@ifundefined{paperwidth}{\def\paperwidth{8.5in}}{} -\@ifundefined{paperheight}{\def\paperheight{11in}}{} -\def\addto@preamblecmds#1{% - \begingroup - \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}% - \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds\do#1}% - \endgroup} -\addto@preamblecmds{\addto@preamblecmds\do\@preamblecmds} -\def\sem@temp#1{\@ifundefined{if#1}% - {\def\@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname} - \expandafter\@tempa\csname if#1\endcsname}{}} -\sem@temp{article}{} -\sem@temp{slidesonly}{} -\sem@temp{notes}{} -\sem@temp{notesonly}{} -\sem@temp{notesonlystar}{} -\sem@temp{portrait}{} -\def\ds@article{\articletrue} -\def\ds@slidesonly{\slidesonlytrue\notesfalse\notesonlyfalse} -\def\ds@notes{\notestrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesonlyfalse} -\def\ds@notesonly{\notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse} -\@namedef{ds@notesonly*}{\ds@notesonly\notesonlystartrue} -\def\ds@portrait{\portraittrue} -\@namedef{ds@a4}{% - \def\paperwidth{210mm} - \def\paperheight{297mm} - \slidewidth 222mm - \slideheight 152mm\relax} -\@@input article.sty -\ifnotesonly\else\notesonlystarfalse\fi -\@@input sem-page.sty -\newtoks\before@document -\newtoks\after@document -\let\xcomment@hook\relax -\before@document{\endgroup\the\before@document\begingroup} -\after@document{\the\after@document\xcomment@hook} -\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document} -\edef\document{\the\before@document\the\@temptokena\the\after@document} -\before@document{} -\after@document{} -\newtoks\before@enddocument -\before@enddocument{\the\before@enddocument} -\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument} -\edef\enddocument{\the\before@enddocument\the\@temptokena} -\before@enddocument{} -\newif\ifprintlandscape -\ifportrait - \ifarticle\printlandscapetrue\fi -\else - \ifarticle\else\printlandscapetrue\fi -\fi -\addto@hook\before@document{\ifprintlandscape\printlandscape\fi} -\addto@preamblecmds{\printlandscape} -\def\printlandscape{\addto@hook\before@enddocument{% - \typeout{^^J% - *******************************************************^^J% - ***** !! PRINT THIS DOCUMENT IN LANDSCAPE MODE !! *****^^J% - *******************************************************}}} -\def\slide{% - \NestedSlide@Error{slide}% - \landscapetrue - \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}} -\def\endslide{\end@slide} -\@namedef{slide*}{% - \NestedSlide@Error{slide*}% - \landscapefalse - \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}% -\@namedef{endslide*}{\end@slide} -\newcounter{slide} -\def\theslide{\arabic{slide}} -\newcount\slide@count -\newbox\@slidebox -\newbox\not@slidebox -\newif\ifslide -\newif\iflandscape -\def\@landscapeonly{0} -\def\landscapeonly{\def\@landscapeonly{1}} -\def\portraitonly{\def\@landscapeonly{-1}} -\def\NestedSlide@Error#1{% - \ifslide - \endgroup - \@seminarerr{Nested slide environments. Perhaps missing - \string\end{\@currenvir}. May be fatal}\@ehd - \expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}% - \ifslide\expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}\fi - \begingroup - \def\@currenvir{#1}% - \fi} -\def\begin@slide[#1,#2]{% - \slide@clearpage - \setlength\slidewidth{#1}% - \setlength\slideheight{#2}% - \begingroup - \ifarticle - \output{% - \advance\count@ 1 - \global\setbox\not@slidebox\box\@cclv}% - \par\@@par\penalty-\@M - \fi - \output{\slide@output}% - \slidetrue - \ifarticle\global\slide@count=\z@\fi - \refstepcounter{slide}% - \ifnotesonlystar\xdef\first@slidemarker{\the\c@slide}\fi - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset - \ifarticle\else - \edef\page@textheight{\number\textheight sp}% - \edef\page@textwidth{\number\textwidth sp}% - \fi - \set@slidesize - \slidebox@restore - \the\slide@hook - \the\before@newslide - \everyslide} -\def\end@slide{% - \par\penalty-\@M - \xdef\@tempg{\@currenvir}% - \endgroup - \ifslide - \@seminarerr{Perhaps missing `\string\end{\@tempg}', - \iffalse{\fi`\string}' or `\string\endgroup'}\@ehd - \def\next{\endgroup\ifslide\expandafter\next\fi}% - \next - \fi - \begingroup - \output{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv}% - \@@par\penalty-\@M - \endgroup - \global\advance\c@slide-1 - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}{\@nameuse{saved@c@##1}}}% - \slide@reset - \ifarticle\outputloop@savedslides\fi - \the\after@slide} -\let\slideclearpagetrue\relax -\let\slideclearpagefalse\relax -\ifarticle - \def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@} - \ifnotes - \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}} - \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}} - \else - \ifnotesonly - \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}} - \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}} - \fi - \fi -\else - \def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage} -\fi -\newtoks\slide@hook -\def\everyslide{} -\newtoks\after@slide -\def\slidebox@restore{% - \def\thepage{\theslide}% - \def\newpage{\newslide}% - \def\clearpage{\newslide}% - \def\thispagestyle{\notslide@err{\thispagestyle}}% - \pagestyle{\slide@pagestyle}% - \@twocolumnfalse - \def\twocolumn{\notslide@err{\twocolumn}}% - \def\onecolumn{\notslide@err{\onecolumn}}% - \def\marginpar{\notslide@err{\marginpar}}% - \def\thanks{\slidethanks}% - \def\maketitle{\slidemaketitle}% - \fix@floats - \fix@whatsits - \slide@footnotes - \def\do##1{\expandafter\xdef\csname - saved@c@##1\endcsname{\the\@nameuse{c@##1}}}% - \slide@reset - \topskip\z@ \maxdepth\z@ - \slide@listparameters - \slidefonts - \def\baselinestretch{\slidestretch}% - \def\arraystretch{\slidearraystretch}% - \sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}} -\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}\gdef\thedate{#1}} -\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}\gdef\theauthor{#1}} -\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\gdef\thetitle{#1}} -\date{\today} -\let\slidethanks\thanks -\def\thethanks{\@thanks}% -\def\slidemaketitle{% - \par - \begin{center}\bf - {\large \thetitle}\par\vskip 1ex - \begin{tabular}[t]{c} \theauthor \end{tabular}\par\vskip 1ex - \thedate - \end{center}% - \thethanks\par} -\def\fix@floats{% - \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{% - \expandafter\let\csname end##1\endcsname\end@float - \par\medskip\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{##1}\parindent\z@ - \ignorespaces}% - \def\end@float{\par\vskip\z@\egroup\medskip}% - \def\@dblfloat{\@float}\def\end@dblfloat{\end@float}% - \def\endfigure{\end@float}\def\endtable{\end@float}} -\let\normal@write\write -\let\normal@read\read -\let\normal@openout\openout -\let\normal@closeout\closeout -\def\fix@whatsits{% - \def\write{\immediate\normal@write}% - \def\read{\immediate\normal@read}% - \def\openout{\immediate\normal@openout}% - \def\closeout{\immediate\normal@closeout}} -\newinsert\slide@footins -\skip\slide@footins=\bigskipamount -\count\slide@footins=1000 -\dimen\slide@footins=4in -\def\theslidefootnote{\alph{footnote}} -\def\slide@footnotes{% - \def\thefootnote{\theslidefootnote}% - \let\footins\slide@footins - \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M} -\def\slidefonts{} -\def\slidestretch{1.18} -\def\slidearraystretch{1.2} -\def\raggedslides{\@ifnextchar[{\@raggedslides}{\@raggedslides[1fil]}} -\def\@raggedslides[#1]{% - \edef\slide@@rightskip{#1}% - \ifslide\slide@rightskip\fi} -\def\slide@rightskip{% - \@rightskip\z@ plus \slide@@rightskip\relax \rightskip\@rightskip} -\def\slide@@rightskip{1fil} -\newcount\slide@listdepth -\def\slide@listparameters{% - \let\@listdepth\slide@listdepth - \slide@listdepth\z@ - \def\@listi{\slide@listi}% - \def\@listii{\slide@listii}% - \def\@listiii{\slide@listiii}% - \let\@listiv\relax\let\@listv\relax\let\@listvi\relax} -\def\slide@listi{% - \leftmargin\leftmargini - \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \parsep\parskip \divide\parsep2 - \partopsep\slidepartopsep\relax - \advance\partopsep-\parskip - \ifdim\partopsep<\z@\partopsep\z@\fi - \itemsep\slideitemsep\relax - \ifdim\parsep<\itemsep - \topsep\itemsep \advance\topsep-\parsep - \else - \itemsep\parsep \topsep\z@ - \fi} -\def\slide@listii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginii - \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \divide\itemsep2 \divide\parsep2 - \divide\topsep2 \divide\partopsep2\relax}% -\def\slide@listiii{% - \leftmargin\leftmarginiii - \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep - \itemsep \z@ \parsep\z@ \topsep\z@}% -\def\slideleftmargini{1.8em} -\def\slideleftmarginii{1.4em} -\def\slideleftmarginiii{1em} -\def\slidelabelsep{.5em} -\def\slideitemsep{.8ex minus .2ex} -\def\slidepartopsep{1ex minus .2ex} -\newbox\saved@specials -\def\save@slidespecials{% - \begingroup - \output{% - \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv - \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@ - \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@ - \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}% - \hbox{}\penalty-\@M - \global\let\saved@texttop\@texttop - \gdef\@texttop{% - \ifvoid\saved@specials\else\box\saved@specials\nointerlineskip\fi - \saved@texttop - \global\let\@texttop\saved@texttop}% - \endgroup} -\addto@hook\after@document{\save@slidespecials} -\ifarticle\else - \def\insert@specials{% - \ifvoid\saved@specials\else - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}% - \fi - \global\let\insert@specials\relax} -\fi -\def\extraslideheight#1{% - \@tempdima #1\relax - \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp} - \ifslide\set@slidesize\fi} -\extraslideheight{6pt} -\def\set@slidesize{% - \iflandscape - \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth - \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight - \else - \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight - \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth - \fi - \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}% - \textheight\vsize - \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax - \textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\hsize\linewidth\hsize} -\def\newslide{% - \par\penalty-\@M - \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset - \the\before@newslide - \set@slidesize} -\newtoks\before@newslide -\def\slide@reset{\do{footnote}} -\def\slidereset#1{\def\slide@reset{}\addtoslidereset{#1}} -\def\addtoslidereset#1{% - \edef\@tempa{#1}\expandafter\addto@slidereset\@tempa,\@nil,} -\def\addto@slidereset#1,{% - \ifx\@nil#1\else - \@ifundefined{c@#1}% - {\@seminarerr{Counter `#1' not defined}\@ehd}% - {\expandafter\def\expandafter\slide@reset\expandafter{% - \slide@reset\do{#1}}}% - \expandafter\addto@slidereset - \fi} -\def\slide@output{% - \@makeslide - \@testfalse - \ifnotesonly\else - \iflandscape - \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi - \else - \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi - \fi - \fi - \if@test - \reset@slideoutput - \@@makeslide - \process@slide - \fi - \refstepcounter{slide}} -\def\reset@slideoutput{% - \let\par\@@par - \reset@font - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}% - \catcode`\ =10 - \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii} -\newif\ifcenterslides -\centerslidestrue -\def\@makeslide{% - \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{% - \unvbox\@cclv - \ifvoid\slide@footins\else - \vskip\skip\slide@footins - \footnoterule - \unvbox\slide@footins - \fi - \vskip\z@}} -\def\@@makeslide{% - \overfullslide@warning - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{% - \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax - \vbox to\slide@vsize{% - \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi - \unvbox\@slidebox - \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}% - \the\after@slidepage}% - \wd\@slidebox\textwidth} -\def\overfullslide@warning{% - \dimen@\ht\@slidebox - \advance\dimen@-\slide@vsize\relax - \ifdim\dimen@>\slidefuzz\relax - \@warning{Slide \theslide\space overfull by \the\dimen@}% - \fi} -\def\slidefuzz{2pt} -\newtoks\after@slidepage -\newif\ifrotateheaders -\def\sliderotation#1{\@ifundefined{semsr@#1}% - {\@latexerr{Slide rotation `#1' not defined.}\@eha}% - {\@nameuse{semsr@#1}}} -\def\semsr@left{% - \def\rotate@slide{% - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\leftsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}} -\def\semsr@right{% - \def\rotate@slide{% - \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\rightsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}} -\def\semsr@none{\let\rotate@slide\relax} -\sliderotation{none} -\def\leftsliderotation#1{% - \@seminarerr{\string\leftsliderotation\space has not been defined}% - \@ehd} -\let\rightsliderotation\leftsliderotation -\def\@ifrotateslide#1{% - \ifx\rotate@slide\relax\else - \iflandscape\ifportrait#1\fi\else\ifportrait\else#1\fi\fi - \fi} -\def\process@slide{% - \slideframewidth=\inverseslidesmag\slideframewidth - \slideframesep=\inverseslidesmag\slideframesep - \fboxrule\slideframewidth - \fboxsep\slideframesep - \ifarticle - \@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide - \else - \ifrotateheaders\else\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi - \fi - \process@@slide} -\def\process@@slide{\finish@slide\output@slide} -\def\finish@slide{% - \theslideframe - \add@slidelabel\slidelabel} -\ifarticle - \def\output@slide{% - \global\advance\slide@count1 - \@ifundefined{slidebox@\the\slide@count}% - {{\globaldefs=1\expandafter - \new@slidebox\csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname}}{}% - \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname - slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname\box\@slidebox} -\else - \def\output@slide{% - \begingroup - \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in - \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in - \setslidelength\@tempdima{% - \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi} - \setslidelength\@tempdimb{% - \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi} - \ifrotateheaders - \@ifrotateslide{% - \dimen@=\@tempdima - \@tempdima=\@tempdimb - \@tempdimb=\dimen@} - \fi - % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight - % used for scratch: - \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin - \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin - \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin - \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin - % Some page styles like to know \textwidth: - \textwidth=\@tempdima - \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin - \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{% - \kern\oddsidemargin - \vbox to\@tempdimb{% - \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1 - \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}% - \fi - \let\label\@gobble - \let\index\@gobble - \let\glossary\@gobble - \vbox to\headheight{% - \vfill - \hbox{% - \slideheadfont\relax\strut - \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}% - \kern\z@}% - \vfill - \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}% - \vfill - \vbox to\footheight{% - \hbox{% - \slidefootfont\relax\strut - \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}% - \vfill}}% - \hss}% - \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi - \insert@specials - \shipout\box\@slidebox - \endgroup - \let\firstmark\botmark} - \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{} -\fi -\newskip\slidesep -\slidesep\intextsep -\ifarticle - \def\fps@fslide{htbp} - \def\ftype@fslide{32} - \def\float@savedslide{% - \begingroup\@float{fslide}% - \centerline{\box\@slidebox}% - \end@float\endgroup}% - \@namedef{float*@savedslide}{% - \begingroup\@dblfloat{fslide}% - \centerline{\box\@slidebox}% - \end@dblfloat\endgroup}% - \def\center@slide{\hbox{% - \kern-\@totalleftmargin - \hbox to \columnwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}}% - \def\onepercol@savedslide{% - \vbox to .996\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak}% - \def\twopercol@savedslide{% - \dimen@.5\textheight - \advance\dimen@-\slidesep - \ifdim\ht\@slidebox>\dimen@ - \onepercol@savedslide - \else - \vbox to .498\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak - \fi} - \def\here@savedslide{% - \addvspace\slidesep\center@slide\addvspace\slidesep} - \@namedef{here*@savedslide}{% - \goodbreak \hrule \@height\z@ \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak - \center@slide - \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak \hrule\@height\z@ \goodbreak} -\fi -\ifarticle - \def\slideplacement#1{\@ifundefined{#1@savedslide}% - {\@seminarerr{Slide placement `#1' undefined}\@ehd}% - {\expandafter\let\expandafter\output@savedslide - \csname #1@savedslide\endcsname}} -\else - \def\slideplacement#1{} -\fi -\ifarticle - \ifnotes - \ifportrait - \slideplacement{float} - \else - \slideplacement{float*} - \fi - \else - \ifportrait - \slideplacement{onepercol} - \else - \slideplacement{twopercol} - \fi - \fi -\fi -\ifarticle - \def\outputloop@savedslides{% - \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth - \ifvoid\not@slidebox\else - \dimen@=\dp\not@slidebox - \unvbox\not@slidebox - \hrule height\z@ - \prevdepth\dimen@ - \penalty\z@ - \fi - \edef\slide@@count{\the\slide@count\relax}% - \slide@count\z@ - \loop - \ifnum\slide@count<\slide@@count - \advance\slide@count1 - \expandafter\setbox\expandafter\@slidebox\expandafter\box - \csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname - \output@savedslide - \repeat - \ifnotesonlystar\make@slidemarker\fi} -\fi -\def\make@slidemarker{% - \addvspace\slidesep - \moveleft\@totalleftmargin - \vbox{% - \hsize\columnwidth - \hrule height 1pt - \kern 8pt - \hbox to \columnwidth{% - \hss - \LARGE\bf\the@slidemarker - \hss}% - \kern 8pt - \hrule height 1pt}% - \addvspace\slidesep} -\def\the@slidemarker{% - Slide% - \ifnum\c@slide=\first@slidemarker\else - s {\c@slide\first@slidemarker\relax\theslide} --\fi - { }\theslide}% -\ifarticle - \let\c@note\c@page - \def\p@note{\p@page} - \def\thenote{\thepage} -\else - \newcounter{note} - \def\thenote{\theslide-\arabic{note}} - \def\thepage{\thenote} - \addto@hook\after@slide{\setcounter{note}{1}} - \expandafter\def\expandafter\@outputpage\expandafter{% - \@outputpage\stepcounter{note}} -\fi -\ifarticle\else - \let\c@page\c@slide - \countdef\c@slide=0 - \c@slide=0 - \c@page=1 -\fi -\ifarticle - \let\truepagenumbers\relax -\else - \def\truepagenumbers{% - \let\c@slide\c@page - \countdef\c@page=0 - \c@page=1 - \c@slide=0 - \let\truepagenumbers\relax} -\fi -\addto@preamblecmds{\truepagenumbers} -\newdimen\slideframewidth \slideframewidth 4pt -\newdimen\slideframesep \slideframesep .3in -\def\newslideframe#1{% - \@ifnextchar[{\@newslideframe{#1}}{\@newslideframe{#1}[]}} -\def\@newslideframe#1[#2]{% - \@namedef{semsfops@#1}{#2}% - \@namedef{semsf@#1}##1} -\newslideframe{plain}{\fbox{#1}} -\def\slideframe{\@slideframe{slide}} -\def\@slideframe#1{% - \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@@slideframe{#1}}{\@testfalse\@@slideframe{#1}}} -\def\@@slideframe#1{% - \@ifnextchar[{\@@@slideframe{#1}}{\@@@slideframe{#1}[]}} -\def\@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{% - \def\@tempa{none}% - \def\@tempb{#3}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \@namedef{the#1frame}{\relax}% - \else - \ifx\@tempb\@empty - \@namedef{the#1frame}{}% - \else - \@ifundefined{semsf@#3}% - {\@seminarerr{Slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}% - {\if@test - \@@@@slideframe{#1}[#2]{#3}% - \else - \@namedef{the#1frame}{\setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{% - \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}#2\@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}% - \fi}% - \fi - \fi} -\def\@@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1frame\endcsname - \edef\next{% - \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1frame\endcsname}% - \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{% - \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}% - #2% - \@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}}% -\slideframe{plain} -\def\slidestyle#1{\@ifundefined{ss@#1}% - {\@seminarerr{Slide style `#1' undefined}\@eha}% - {\@nameuse{ss@#1}}} -\def\ss@empty{\let\add@slidelabel\@gobble} -\def\ss@left{\def\add@slidelabel##1{% - \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{% - \vbox to \ht\@slidebox{\vss - \hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 15pt}% - \vss}\box\@slidebox}}} -\def\ss@bottom{\def\add@slidelabel##1{% - \setbox\@slidebox=\vbox{\copy\@slidebox\vskip 9pt - \hbox to\wd\@slidebox{\hss##1\hss}}}}% -\ifarticle - \ifportrait\slidestyle{bottom}\else\slidestyle{left}\fi -\else - \slidestyle{empty} -\fi -\def\slidelabel{\bf Slide \theslide} -\def\newpagestyle#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\newcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{% - \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}} -\def\renewpagestyle#1#2#3{% - \expandafter\renewcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{% - \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}} -\def\@ifgoodps#1{% - \@ifundefined{ps@#1}{\@seminarerr{Page style `#1' undefined}\@eha}} -\def\slidepagestyle#1{% - \@ifgoodps{#1}% - {\ifslide\pagestyle{#1}\else\edef\slide@pagestyle{#1}\fi}} -\def\ps@{} -\slidepagestyle{} -\ifarticle - \def\ps@align{} -\else - \def\ps@align{% - \def\@oddhead{\thepage\hfil+}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead - \def\@oddfoot{+\hfil+}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot} -\fi -\def\slideheadfont{\scriptsize} -\def\slidefootfont{\scriptsize} -\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or - 2074\or 2488\or 2986\or 3583\or 4300\or 5160\fi\relax} -\def\magstepminus#1{% - \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax} -\def\@magstep#1{% - \ifnum#1<\z@\magstepminus{-#1}\else\magstep#1\fi} -{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12 - \gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}} -\def\invert@mag#1{\@tempdima=1000pt - \divide\@tempdima by #1\relax - \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@tempdima#1} -\def\@slidesmag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax% - \ifnum\@tempcnta>0 - \edef\inverseslidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \invert@mag\inverseslidesmag - \ifarticle\else\mag\@tempcnta\fi - \else - \@seminarerr{\string\@slidesmag\space argument must be an - integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha - \fi} -\def\@articlemag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax% - \ifnum\@tempcnta>0 - \edef\inverseartmag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \invert@mag\inverseartmag - \ifarticle\mag\@tempcnta\fi - \else - \@seminarerr{\string\articlemag\space argument must be an - integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha - \fi} -\addto@preamblecmds{\@slidesmag\do\@articlemag} -\newdimen\semin -\newdimen\semcm -\def\@semmagerr#1{% - \@seminarerr{\string#1 argument must be an integer - between -5 and 9}\@eha} -\def\slidesmag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6 - \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 - \edef\the@slidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \@slidesmag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}% - \else - \@semmagerr\slidesmag - \fi - \else - \@semmagerr\slidesmag - \fi - \setslidelength\semin\seminlength - \setslidelength\semcm\semcmlength} -\def\seminlength{1in} -\def\semcmlength{1cm} -\def\articlemag#1{% - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6 - \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 - \edef\the@articlemag{\the\@tempcnta}% - \@articlemag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}% - \else - \@semmagerr\articlemag - \fi - \else - \@semmagerr\articlemag - \fi} -\addto@preamblecmds{\slidesmag\do\articlemag} -\def\setslidelength#1#2{% - #1=#2\relax - #1=\inverseslidesmag#1}% -\def\addtoslidelength#1#2{% - \dimen@=#2\relax - \advance#1 by \inverseslidesmag\dimen@} -\def\setartlength#1#2{% - #1=#2\relax - #1=\inverseartmag#1} -\def\addtoartlength#1#2{% - \dimen@=#2\relax - \advance#1 by \inverseartmag\dimen@} -\def\slide@epsfsize#1#2{% - \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt - \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt - \inverseslidesmag#1% - \else - 0pt - \fi - \else - \inverseslidesmag\epsfxsize - \fi - \epsfysize - \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt - \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt - \inverseslidesmag#2% - \else - 0pt - \fi - \else - \inverseslidesmag\epsfysize - \fi} -\def\epsfslidesize{\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize} -\slidesmag{4} -\articlemag{0} -\def\do@pageparameters{% - \do\oddsidemargin - \do\evensidemargin - \do\marginparwidth - \do\marginparsep - \do\topmargin - \do\headheight - \do\headsep - \do\textheight - \do\textwidth - \do\topskip - \do\footskip - \do\footheight} -\ifarticle - \def\scale@pageparameters{% - \begingroup - \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseartmag##1\relax}% - \do@pageparameters - \endgroup} -\else - \def\scale@pageparameters{% - \begingroup - \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseslidesmag##1\relax}% - \do@pageparameters - \endgroup} -\fi -\addto@hook\before@document{\scale@pageparameters} -\addto@preamblecmds{\scale@pageparameters\do\do@pageparameters} -\def\allversions{} -\let\endallversions\relax -\@namedef{allversions*}{\@bsphack\globaldefs=1} -\@namedef{endallversions*}{\@esphack} -\def\slide@list{slide,slide*,allversions,allversions*} -\def\addtoslidelist#1{\xdef\slide@list{\slide@list,#1}} -\addto@preamblecmds{\addtoslidelist} -\ifslidesonly - \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{\@@input xcomment.sty }{} - \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}} - \newxcomment[]{note} -\else - \def\note{\@bsphack}% - \def\endnote{\@esphack}% -\fi -\def\noxcomment{\def\xcomment@hook{}} -\def\os@list{} -\newif\if@os -\def\onlyslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@ostrue - \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\onlyslides\space argument - contains undefined references}}} -\def\notslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@osfalse - \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\notslides\space argument - contains undefined references}}} -\addto@preamblecmds{\onlyslides\do\notslides} -\addto@hook\after@document{% - \ifx\os@list\@empty\else\os@expandlist\fi} -\def\os@expandlist{% - \let\os@@warning\relax - \begingroup - \def\ref##1{\@ifundefined{r@##1}{?}% - {\noexpand\@car\@nameuse{r@##1}\noexpand\@nil}}% - \edef\@tempd{\os@list}% - \xdef\os@list{}% - \@for\@tempc:=\@tempd - \do{\expandafter\os@expandrange\@tempc-:-:\@nil}% - \os@@warning - \endgroup - \let\os@expandrange\relax - \let\os@checknum\relax - \let\os@expandlist\relax} -\def\os@expandrange#1-#2-#3\@nil{% - \def\@tempa{?}\def\@tempb{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \let\os@@warning\os@warning - \else - \@tempcnta=#1\relax - \def\@tempb{#2}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \let\os@@warning\os@warning - \else - \def\@tempa{:}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \else - \@tempcntb=#2\relax - \fi - \advance\@tempcnta by -1 - \advance\@tempcntb by 1 - \ifx\os@list\@empty - \xdef\os@list{\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}% - \else - \xdef\os@list{\os@list,\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}% - \fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\os@test{% - \@testtrue - \iflandscape - \ifnum\@landscapeonly=-1 \@testfalse\fi - \else - \ifnum\@landscapeonly=1 \@testfalse\fi - \fi - \if@test - \ifx\os@list\@empty\else - \if@os\@testfalse\fi - \@for\@tempa:=\os@list\do{\expandafter\os@testrange\@tempa\@nil}% - \fi - \fi} -\def\os@testrange#1+#2\@nil{% - \ifnum\c@slide>#1 - \ifnum\c@slide<#2 - \if@os\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi - \fi - \fi} -\def\onlynotestoo{% - \ifnotes\@testtrue\else\ifnotesonly\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi\fi - \if@test - \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{% - \edef\sem@temp{\the\catcode`\@}% - \catcode`\@=11 - \@@input xcomment.sty - \catcode`\@=\sem@temp\relax}{}% - \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}% - \addto@hook\after@slide\onlynotes@too - \fi} -\def\onlynotes@too{% - \os@test - \if@test\gdef\do@end{}\else\gdef\do@end{\xc@begin}\fi} -\addto@preamblecmds\onlynotestoo -\def\ptsize#1{% - \@ifundefined{#1@semptsize}% - {\@seminarerr{\string\ptsize\space `#1' not valid.}\@eha}% - {\ifslide - \sem@ptsize{#1}\large\normalsize - \else - \edef\slide@ptsize{#1}% - \fi}} -\edef\slide@ptsize{1\@ptsize}% -\def\slidefontsizes{\ptsize} %For backwards compatibility?? -\def\slide@setsize#1#2#3#4{% - \@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% - \set@slideskip{#2}} -\def\slide@@setsize#1#2#3#4{% - \slide@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\slidedisplayskips} -\def\set@slideskip#1{% - \normallineskiplimit=#1 - \advance\normallineskiplimit-\normalbaselineskip - \multiply\normallineskiplimit-1 - \normallineskiplimit\slideskip\normallineskiplimit - \ifdim\normallineskiplimit<1pt\normallineskiplimit=1pt\fi - \normallineskip=\normallineskiplimit - minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit - \dimen@=\normalbaselineskip - \normalbaselineskip=\dimen@ minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit - \normalbaselines} -\def\slideskip{.75} -\def\slideshrink{.25} -\def\slidedisplayskips{% - \abovedisplayskip 1.75ex minus .35ex - \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip .2ex minus .2ex - \belowdisplayshortskip 1ex minus .2ex} -\def\sem@ptsize#1{% - \@nameuse{#1@semptsize}% - \large\normalsize - \leftmargini\slideleftmargini\relax - \leftmarginii\slideleftmarginii\relax - \leftmarginiii\slideleftmarginiii\relax - \labelsep\slidelabelsep\relax - \parskip\slideparskip\relax - \parindent\slideparindent\relax - \slide@rightskip - \slide@listi - \skip\footins\slidefootins\relax - \footnotesep\slidefootnotesep\relax} -\def\slidefootins{2ex minus .8ex} -\def\slidefootnotesep{1.2ex} -\def\slideparindent{\z@} -\def\slideparskip{1ex minus .2ex} -\@namedef{8@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}} -\@namedef{9@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}} -\@namedef{10@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}} -\@namedef{11@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}} -\@namedef{12@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}% - \let\Huge\huge} -\@namedef{14@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}% - \let\huge\LARGE - \let\Huge\LARGE} -\@namedef{17@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}% - \let\LARGE\Large - \let\huge\Large - \let\Huge\Large} -\def\twoup{\@ifnextchar[{\@twoup}{\@twoup[0]}} -\ifarticle - \ifportrait - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \targetlayout{topbottom}% - \printlandscapefalse - \else - \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}} - \else - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \if@twoside - \targetlayout{twosided}% - \fi - \printlandscapetrue - \else - \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}} - \fi -\else - \ifportrait - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \advance\@tempcnta by -3 - \target{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \printlandscapetrue - \else - \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}} - \else - \def\@twoup[#1]{% - \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax - \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta - \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax - \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax - \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax - \@@input 2up.tex - \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}% - \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \targetlayout{topbottom}% - \printlandscapefalse - \else - \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for - \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha - \fi - \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmargerr\slidesmag}}% - \fi -\fi -\def\@semtwoupmagerr#1{% - \@seminarerr{\string#1 must come before \string\twoup}\@eha} -\addto@preamblecmds{\twoup\do\@twoup} -\openin1 seminar.con -\ifeof1\else\closein1 \relax\@@input seminar.con\fi -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `seminar.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty deleted file mode 100644 index a428d3796e9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,146 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN semlayer.sty -%% -%% This is file `semlayer.sty', generated -%% on <1993/4/2> with the docstrip utility (2.0r). -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% semlayer.doc -%% -\def\fileversion{1.0} -\def\filedate{93/04/01} -%% -%% LaTeX style option `semlayer.sty'. -%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions. -%% -\addto@hook\before@newslide{% - \global\def\overlay@list{}% - \setcounter{overlay}{0}} -\newbox\@@slidebox -\def\process@@slide{% - \ifx\overlay@list\@empty - \finish@slide - \output@slide - \else - \setbox\@@slidebox\box\@slidebox - \make@overlay{0}% - \finish@slide - \output@slide - {\let\theoverlay\theslide\layer@loop{0}}% - \overlay@loop - \fi} -\def\overlay@loop{% - \begingroup - \overlay@prep - \c@overlay=1 - \@whilenum\c@overlay<10 - \do{% - \test@member{\the\c@overlay}{\overlay@list}% - \if@test - \make@overlay{\the\c@overlay}% - \finish@slide - \output@slide - \fi - \layer@loop{\the\c@overlay}% - \advance\c@overlay by 1}% - \endgroup} -\def\layer@loop#1{% - \begingroup - \layer@prep - \@for\currlayer:=\layer@list\do{% - \test@member{#1-\currlayer}{\overlay@list}% - \if@test - \make@overlay{#1-\currlayer}% - \finish@slide - \output@slide - \fi}% - \endgroup} -\def\layer@prep{% - \ifarticle\pagestyle{\layer@pagestyle}\fi - \let\thepage\thelayer - \ifx\thelayerframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\thelayerframe\fi - \let\slidelabel\layerlabel} -\def\overlay@prep{% - \ifarticle\pagestyle{\overlay@pagestyle}\fi - \let\thepage\theoverlay - \ifx\theoverlayframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\theoverlayframe\fi - \let\slidelabel\overlaylabel} -\def\layerframe{\@slideframe{layer}} -\def\overlayframe{\@slideframe{overlay}} -\def\thelayerframe{} -\def\theoverlayframe{} -\def\overlaylabel{\bf Overlay \theoverlay} -\def\layerlabel{\bf Layer \thelayer} -\newcounter{overlay} -\def\theoverlay{\theslide-\alph{overlay}} -\def\currlayer{} -\def\thelayer{\theoverlay-\currlayer} -\newif\ifoverlays -\newif\iflayers -\@ifundefined{@overlay}% - {\let\@overlay\relax}% - {\ifarticle\else\overlaystrue\layerstrue\fi} -\def\nooverlays@err{% - \@seminarerr{You need to use additional macros for overlays, - e.g., semcolor.sty}\@ehd - \global\overlaysfalse - \global\layersfalse} -\@ifundefined{@overlay}{}{} -\def\overlay#1{% - \ifoverlays\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi - \ifslide - \@tempcnta=#1 - \@testfalse - \ifnum\@tempcnta>-1 \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 \@testtrue\fi\fi - \if@test - \c@overlay=\@tempcnta - \ifnum\c@overlay=0 - \advance\c@slide by -1 - \refstepcounter{slide}% - \else - \advance\c@overlay by -1 - \refstepcounter{overlay}% - \ifoverlays - \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay}% - \fi - \fi - \ifoverlays - \@overlay{\the\c@overlay}% - \fi - \else - \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space argument must be - an integer between 0 and 9}\@eha - \fi - \else - \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space can only be used - in slide environments}\@eha - \fi - \ignorespaces} -\def\colorlayers#1{% - \edef\@tempc{#1}% - \edef\layer@list{\layer@list,#1}% - \def\@tempa##1{% - \@namedef{##1}{% - \iflayers\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi - \ifslide - \iflayers - \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay-##1}% - \@overlay{\the\c@overlay-##1}% - \fi - \else - \@seminarerr{Color layer `##1' can only be used in - slide environments}\@eha - \fi}} - \@for\@tempb:=\@tempc\do{% - \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb}}} -\def\layer@list{} -\def\overlaypagestyle#1{\@ifgoodps{#1}{\edef\overlay@pagestyle{#1}}} -\def\layerpagestyle#1{\@ifgoodps{#1}{\edef\layer@pagestyle{#1}}} -\overlaypagestyle{} -\layerpagestyle{} -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `semlayer.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 81cf69dae7f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN semlcmss.sty -\def\fileversion{1.0 (2e)} -\def\filedate{94/02/01} -%% -%% LaTeX style option `semlcmss.sty' for the `seminar' document style. -%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the New Font Selection Scheme (1 or 2) -%% or (some day) with LaTeX2e. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1994, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions. -%% -%% This file contains the external font information needed to load
-%% the SliTeX sans serif fonts for use by seminar.sty.
-%% -\csname semlcmss@loaded\endcsname -\let\semlcmss@loaded\endinput -\typeout{Style Option: `semlcmss' \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)} -\@ifundefined{selectfont} - {\@seminarerr{`semlcmss' style option can only be used - with the New Font Selection Scheme}\@eha\endinput}{} -% -\expandafter\ifx\csname DeclareSizeFunction\endcsname\relax - -% First, the font definitions: -\new@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{n}{%
- <5>lcmss8 scaled 695%
- <6>lcmss8 scaled 833%
- <7>lcmss8 scaled 913%
- <8>lcmss8 % - <9>lcmss8 scaled 1095% - <10>lcmss8 scaled 1200%
- <11>lcmss8 scaled 1314%
- <12>lcmss8 scaled 1440%
- <14>lcmss8 scaled 1727%
- <17>lcmss8 scaled 2074%
- <20>lcmss8 scaled 2488%
- <25>lcmss8 scaled 2986%
- }{}
-\extra@def{lcmss}{}{}
-% -\new@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
- <5>lcmssi8 scaled 695%
- <6>lcmssi8 scaled 833%
- <7>lcmssi8 scaled 913%
- <8>lcmssi8 % - <9>lcmssi8 scaled 1095% - <10>lcmssi8 scaled 1200%
- <11>lcmssi8 scaled 1314%
- <12>lcmssi8 scaled 1440%
- <14>lcmssi8 scaled 1727%
- <17>lcmssi8 scaled 2074%
- <20>lcmssi8 scaled 2488%
- <25>lcmssi8 scaled 2986%
- }{}
-\extra@def{lcmss}{}{}
-\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{sl}{lcmss}{m}{it} -% -\new@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
- <5>lcmssb8 scaled 695%
- <6>lcmssb8 scaled 833%
- <7>lcmssb8 scaled 913%
- <8>lcmssb8 % - <9>lcmssb8 scaled 1095% - <10>lcmssb8 scaled 1200%
- <11>lcmssb8 scaled 1314%
- <12>lcmssb8 scaled 1440%
- <14>lcmssb8 scaled 1727%
- <17>lcmssb8 scaled 2074%
- <20>lcmssb8 scaled 2488%
- <25>lcmssb8 scaled 2986%
- }{}
-\extra@def{cmssb}{}{} -\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{it}{lcmss}{bx}{n} -\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{lcmss}{bx}{n} - -% -% Now define \slidefonts: -\ifarticle - \def\slidefonts{% - \def\default@family{lcmss}% - \def\rmdefault{lcmss}% - \def\sfdefault{lcmss}% - \family\default@family\selectfont} -\else - \def\default@family{lcmss}% - \def\rmdefault{lcmss}% - \def\sfdefault{lcmss}% - \family\default@family\selectfont -\fi - -\else - -\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmss}{}{} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{ - <5>s*[1.1120]lcmss8
- <6>s*[1.1107]lcmss8
- <7>s*[1.0434]lcmss8
- <8>lcmss8 - <9>s*[0.9733]lcmss8 - <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmss8}{}
- -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{ - <5>s*[1.1120]lcmssi8
- <6>s*[1.1107]lcmssi8
- <7>s*[1.0434]lcmssi8
- <8>lcmssi8 - <9>s*[0.9733]lcmssi8 - <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmssi8}{}
- -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{ - <5>s*[1.1120]lcmssb8
- <6>s*[1.1107]lcmssb8
- <7>s*[1.0434]lcmssb8
- <8>lcmssb8 - <9>s*[0.9733]lcmssb8 - <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmssb8}{}
- -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{<-> ssub * lcmss/m/sl }{} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{<-> sub * lcmss/bx/n }{} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{<-> sub * lcmss/bx/n }{} - -% Now define \slidefonts: -\ifarticle - \def\slidefonts{% - \def\default@family{lcmss}% - \def\rmdefault{lcmss}% - \def\sfdefault{lcmss}% - \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont} -\else - \def\default@family{lcmss}% - \def\rmdefault{lcmss}% - \def\sfdefault{lcmss}% - \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont -\fi - -\fi - -% Now set up a few things for seminar.sty: -% These fonts are intended to be used with the 10pt font size -% declarations (and \magstep4), slightly modified: -\ptsize{10}\slidesmag{4}\articlemag{0} -\@namedef{10@semptsize}{% - \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}% - \def\small{\footnotesize}% - \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}% - \def\scriptsize{\footnotesize}% - \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}% - \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}% - \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}% - \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}% - \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}% - \def\Huge{\huge}} -\def\semlcmss@warning#1{% - \@warning{Can't use `\string#1' with the semlcmss option!}} -\def\ptsize#1{\semlcmss@warning\ptsize} -\def\slidesmag#1{\semlcmss@warning\slidesmag} -\def\articlemag#1{\semlcmss@warning\articlemag} - -\endinput -%% END semlcmss.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty deleted file mode 100644 index dbaa0162aee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN sem-rot.sty -\def\fileversion{1.0} -\def\filedate{93/04/01} -%% -%% LaTeX style option `semrot.sty'. -%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions. -%% -%% The following is just an interface for seminar.sty: -\def\leftsliderotation#1{\@rotate[l]{#1}} -\def\rightsliderotation#1{\@rotate[r]{#1}} -\sliderotation{left} -%% -%% And the rest is rotate.sty, as distributed with Rokicki's dvips. -%% -% These macros allow you to rotate or flip a \TeX\ box. Very useful for -% sideways tables or upsidedown answers. -% -% To use, create a box containing the information you want to rotate. -% (An hbox or vbox will do.) Now call \@rotr\boxnum to rotate the -% material and create a new box with the appropriate (flipped) dimensions. -% \@rotr rotates right, \@rotl rotates left, \@rotu turns upside down, and -% \@rotf flips. These boxes may contain other rotated boxes. -% -\newdimen\@rotdimen -\newbox\@rotbox - -\def\@vspec#1{\special{ps:#1}}% passes #1 verbatim to the output -\def\@rotstart#1{\@vspec{gsave currentpoint currentpoint translate - #1 neg exch neg exch translate}}% #1 can be any origin-fixing transformation -\def\@rotfinish{\@vspec{currentpoint grestore moveto}}% gets back in synch -% -% First, the rotation right. The reference point of the rotated box -% is the lower right corner of the original box. -% -\def\@rotr#1{\@rotdimen=\ht#1\advance\@rotdimen by\dp#1% - \hbox to\@rotdimen{\hskip\ht#1\vbox to\wd#1{\@rotstart{90 rotate}% - \box#1\vss}\hss}\@rotfinish} -% -% Next, the rotation left. The reference point of the rotated box -% is the upper left corner of the original box. -% -\def\@rotl#1{\@rotdimen=\ht#1\advance\@rotdimen by\dp#1% - \hbox to\@rotdimen{\vbox to\wd#1{\vskip\wd#1\@rotstart{270 rotate}% - \box#1\vss}\hss}\@rotfinish}% -% -% Upside down is simple. The reference point of the rotated box -% is the upper right corner of the original box. (The box's height -% should be the current font's xheight, \fontdimen5\font, -% if you want that xheight to be at the baseline after rotation.) -% -\def\@rotu#1{\@rotdimen=\ht#1\advance\@rotdimen by\dp#1% - \hbox to\wd#1{\hskip\wd#1\vbox to\@rotdimen{\vskip\@rotdimen - \@rotstart{-1 dup scale}\box#1\vss}\hss}\@rotfinish}% -% -% And flipped end for end is pretty ysae too. We retain the baseline. -% -\def\@rotf#1{\hbox to\wd#1{\hskip\wd#1\@rotstart{-1 1 scale}% - \box#1\hss}\@rotfinish}% -% -% Now the user interface for LaTeX: \rotate[type]{text} where -% ``type'' is `l' for left, `r' for right, `u' for upside-down, or -% `f' for flip. `l' is the default. -% -\def\rotate{\@ifnextchar[{\@rotate}{\@rotate[l]}} -\def\@rotate[#1]#2{\setbox\@rotbox=\hbox{#2}\@nameuse{@rot#1}\@rotbox} -\endinput -%% END sem-rot.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 81abef8d08e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,200 +0,0 @@ -%% BEGIN slidesec.sty -\def\fileversion{v0.9} -\def\filedate{92/05/07} -%% -%% Style option slidesec.sty, for use with LaTeX 2.09 or SliTeX. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Copying of part or all of this file is allowed under the following -%% conditions only: -%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the file. Please -%% include the documentation when you do so. -%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of the file, but only for personal -%% use or use within an organization. -%% (3) You may copy fragments from the file, for personal use or for use -%% in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given -%% where credit is due. -%% -%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of -%% this file or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for -%% a nominal charge for copying etc. -%% -% DISCLAIMER: -% -% Someone who actually uses something like this should rewrite it. -% -% DESCRIPTION: -% -% This file contains macros for sections, headings, tables of contents, -% and lists of slides, for slides. It can probably be used with your -% favorite LaTeX slide package (e.g., seminar.sty). -% However: -%% If the counter used to keep track of slides is not slide , -%% then change the following line: -\def\@SCTR{\theslide} -%% -% ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: -% -% The idea comes from Young U. Ryu's lslides.sty. -% -% USAGE: -% -% \slideheading[#1]{#2} -% * Analogous to \section. -% * [#1] is optional; \slideheading{#1} is same as \slideheading[#1]{#2}. -% * Advances slidesection counter. -% * Sets \theslideheading to #1; can be used, e.g., in headers and footers. -% * Adds #1 to slide contents file. -% * If #2 is non-empty, invokes \makeslideheading{#2} to make a heading. -% Default definition of \makeslideheading is -% \begin{center}\large\bf #2 \end{center} -% but you can redefine this to suit your tastes. -% -% \slidesubheading[#1]{#2} -% * Analogous to \subsection. -% * Like \slideheading, but add "sub" to all the names. -% -% \slideheading and \slidesubheading are meant to be used at most once in -% a slide, but this is not a binding restriction. -% -% You may want to define abbreviated forms. E.g., -% \newcommand{heading}{\slideheading} -% \newcommand{subheading}{\slidesubheading} -% -% \listofslides -% * Analogous to \listoftables. -% -% \slidecontents -% * Analogous to \tableofcontents -% -% \Slidecontents -% * List \slidecontents, but puts some check marks and stuff to -% indicate what you have covered so far and what is coming up. -% Meant to be used in the middle of a presentation. -% -% To change fonts and otherwise customize what you get from \listofslides, -% \slidecontents, and \Slidecontents, you have to hack at the definitions -% of these macros. -% -% BUGS: -% -% These macros have not been tested very much. -% -% IMPLEMENTATION: -% -\@ifundefined{@startlos}{}{\endinput} -\typeout{File `slidesec.sty' \fileversion\space\space - \filedate\space\space <tvz>} -% -% If we use \@starttoc{los} to read in \jobname.los, then its contents -% are destroyed and we can't read it again. \@startlos is like \@starttoc, -% but it sets the flae \los@flag to 1, and then we add a few commands -% to \enddocument that open \filename.los if \los@flag=1. -% -\def\los@flag{0}% -\def\@startlos{% - \begingroup\makeatletter\@input{\jobname.los}\endgroup - \gdef\los@flag{1}\global\@nobreakfalse} -\newtoks\@temptokenb -\@temptokena{% - \ifnum\los@flag=1\if@filesw - \newwrite\tf@los\immediate\openout\tf@los\jobname.los\relax - \fi\fi} -\expandafter\@temptokenb\expandafter{\enddocument} -\edef\enddocument{\the\@temptokena\the\@temptokenb} -% -\newcounter{slidesection} -\newcounter{slidesubsection} -\def\theslidesection{\arabic{slidesection}} -\def\thesubslidesection{\theslidesection.\arabic{subslidesection}} -% -\def\slideheading{\@dblarg\slide@heading}% -\def\slide@heading[#1]#2{% - \stepcounter{slidesection}% - \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@slide - {\the\c@slidesection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}% - \gdef\theslideheading{#1}% - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else - {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesection\endcsname\theslidesection}% - \makeslideheading{#2}}% - \fi} -\def\slidesubheading{\@dblarg\slide@subheading} -\def\slide@subheading[#1]#2{% - \stepcounter{slidesection}% - \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@subslide - {\the\c@slidesubsection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}% - \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}% - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else - {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesubsection\endcsname - \theslidesubsection}\makeslideheading{#2}}% - \fi} -\def\theslideheading{}\def\theslidesubheading{} -% -\def\makeslideheading#1{% - \begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}} -\def\makeslidesubheading{\makeslideheading} -% -\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\vskip \z@ plus .2pt - \bgroup - \leftskip #2\relax \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \leavevmode - \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima - \hbox{}\hskip -\leftskip - #4\par - \egroup} -\def\slide@dottedcline{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} -\def\slide@undottedcline{\@undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} -\def\slide@cline{\slide@dottedcline} -% -\def\slidenumberline#1{\hbox to\@tempdima{\hss#1\hskip 1em}} -% -\def\listofslides{\section*{List of Slides% - \@mkboth{LIST OF SLIDES}{LIST OF SLIDES}}% - \def\l@slide##1##2##3{% - \slide@undottedcline{\slidenumberline{##3}{##2}}{}}% - \let\l@subslide\l@slide - \@startlos} -% -\def\slidecontents{\@ifstar% - {\def\slide@cline{\slide@undottedcline}\slide@contents}% - {\def\slide@cline{\slide@dottedcline}\slide@contents}} -\def\slide@contents{% - \def\l@slide##1##2##3{% - \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}% - \let\l@subslide\@gobbletwo - \@startlos} -% -\def\Slidecontents{\@ifstar% - {\def\slide@cline{\slide@undottedcline}\Slide@contents}% - {\def\slide@cline{\slide@dottedcline}\Slide@contents}} -\def\Slide@contents{% - \def\l@slide##1##2##3{% - \ifcase\lslide@flag - \message{##1 ** \the\c@slidesection} - \ifnum##1>\c@slidesection - \def\lslide@flag{1}{\large\slide@cline{% - \slidenumberline{$\Rightarrow\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}% - \else - {\large\slide@cline{% - \slidenumberline{$\surd\;\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}% - \fi - \or - \def\lslide@flag{2}{\large\slide@cline{% - \slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}% - \or - {\large\slide@cline{% - \slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}% - \fi}% - \def\l@subslide##1##2##3{% - \ifnum\lslide@flag=1 - \@undottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}{##2}{}% - \fi}% - \def\lslide@flag{0}% - \@startlos} -% -\endinput -%% END slidesec.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty deleted file mode 100644 index a117aced289..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,182 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `xcomment.sty', generated -%% on <1993/2/17> with the docstrip utility (2.0r). -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% xcomment.doc -%% -\def\fileversion{1.2} -\def\filedate{93/02/12} -%% -%% Style option `xcomment' for use with LaTeX v2.09. -%% This is a style for comment and "inverse" comment environments. -%% -%% COPYRIGHT 1992, 1993 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu -%% -%% Input file: xcomment.sty. -%% Documented code: xcomment.doc. -%% For printing documentation: xcomment.tex. -%% -%% You may find xcomment.doc and xcomment.tex appended to xcomment.sty. -%% -%% For Licensing info, see sem-read.me -%% -\@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{}{\endinput} -\typeout{Style-Option: `xcomment' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz) } -\def\newxcomment{\@ifnextchar [{\@newxcommentwitharg}% - {\@newxcomment}} -\def\@newxcomment#1{% - \expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname##1{\@xcomment{#1}{##1}}}% -\def\@newxcommentwitharg[#1]#2{% - \expandafter\def\csname #2\endcsname{\@xcomment{#2}{#1}}} -\newxcomment{xcomment} -\def\envirsep{\par} -\def\rescanfile#1{\def\@rescanfile{#1}} -\rescanfile{\jobname.tmp} -\def\norescanfile{\let\@rescanfile\relax} -\def\@nofloat#1{\hrule height\z@\nobreak\vfill\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{#1}} -\def\end@nofloat{\egroup\nobreak\vfill\nobreak\hrule height\z@\medbreak} -\def\nofloat#1{\@for\@tempa:=#1\do{\@namedef{#1}{\@nofloat{#1}}% - \@namedef{end#1}{\end@nofloat}}} -\def\xc@makeother#1{% - \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=0\catcode`#112% - \else \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=1\catcode`#112% - \else \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=2\catcode`#112% - \else \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=6\catcode`#112% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} -\newwrite\tokout -\newread\tokin -\def\rescan#1{% - \ifx\@rescanfile\relax\else - \ifx\@rescanfile\@empty #1{}\else - \immediate\openout\tokout=\@rescanfile - \immediate\write\tokout{{\the#1}\relax}% - \immediate\closeout\tokout - \openin\tokin=\@rescanfile - \read\tokin to\@tempd - \closein\tokin - \expandafter#1\@tempd% - \fi\fi} -\def\@xcomment#1#2{% - \ifx\@preamblecmds\@notprerr - \def\xc@csname{#1}% - \edef\xc@envirlist{#2}% - \ifx\xc@envirlist\@empty \@bsphack \else - \begingroup - \def\@envirsep{}% - \@ifundefined{normal@begin}{\let\normal@begin\begin}{}% - \@ifundefined{normal@end}{\let\normal@end\end}{}% - \def\begin##1{\do@begin{##1}\normal@begin{##1}}% - \def\end##1{\normal@end{##1}\do@end}% - \def\do@begin##1{\@ifundefined{##1}{}{\def\do@end{}}}% - \let\do@end\xc@begin - \fi - \let\next\xc@begin - \else - \expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document\@xcomment{@@@}{#2}}% - \edef\document{\the\@temptokena}% - \let\next\relax - \fi - \next} -\def\end@xcomment{\ifx\xc@envirlist\@empty \@esphack \else \endgroup \fi}% -\def\xc@begin{% - \begingroup - \let\do\xc@makeother - \dospecials - \ifx\xcommentchar\@empty\else - \expandafter\catcode\expandafter`\xcommentchar=14 - \fi - \catcode`\^^M\active - \xcomment@} -\def\xcommentchar{\%} -\begingroup -\catcode`\!=12 -\catcode`\[=12 -\catcode`\]=12 -\catcode`\"=12 -\lccode`\!=`\\ -\lccode`\[=`\{ -\lccode`\]=`\} -\lccode`\"=`\% -\catcode`\~=\active -\lccode`\~=`\^^M -\lowercase{ - \gdef\xcomment@#1~{\xcomment@@#1\@nnil!\@nil} - \gdef\xcomment@@#1!{\xcomment@@@} - \gdef\xcomment@@@#1\@nil{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty - \let\next\xcomment@ - \else - \def\next{\xcomment@@#1\@nil}% - \@testtrue - \xc@checkbegin#1\relax begin[]\relax\relax - \if@test - \xc@checkend#1\relax end[]\relax\relax - \if@test - \xc@checkinput#1\relax input[]\relax\relax - \if@test - \xc@checkinclude#1\relax include[]\relax\relax - \if@test - \xc@checkendinput#1\relax endinputss\relax\relax - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \next} - \gdef\xc@checkbegin#1begin[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty - \def\@tempa{#2}% - \@for\@tempb:=\xc@envirlist\do{% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\def\next{\xc@end{#2}#3\@nil}\fi}% - \fi} - \gdef\xc@checkend#1end[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty - \@testfalse - \def\@tempa{#2}\def\@tempb{document}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \def\next{\endgroup\end@xcomment\end{document}}% - \else - \ifx\@tempa\xc@csname - \def\next{\end@@xcomment{#2}#3\@nil}% - \fi\fi\fi} - \gdef\xc@checkinput#1input[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty - \def\next{\expandafter\xcomment@\@@input #2 \xcomment@@#3\@nil}% - \@testfalse - \fi} - \gdef\xc@checkendinput#1endinput#2#3\relax#4\relax{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\ifcat\noexpand#2a\relax\else - \let\next\endinput - \fi\fi} - \gdef\xc@checkinclude#1include[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{% - \def\@tempa{#1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty - \def\next{% - \global\let\xc@savedinput\@@input - \def\@@input{% - \global\let\@@input\xc@savedinput - \expandafter\xcomment@\@@input}% - \include{#2}% - \global\let\@@input\xc@savedinput - \xcomment@@#3\@nil}% - \@testfalse - \fi} - \gdef\end@@xcomment#1#2\@nnil!\@nil{% - \endgroup - \toks@{#2 }\rescan{\toks@}% - \edef\next{\noexpand\end@xcomment\noexpand\end{#1}\the\toks@}% - \next}% - \gdef\xc@end#1#2\@nnil!\@nil{% - \endgroup - \@envirsep \let\@envirsep\envirsep - \toks@{#2 }\rescan{\toks@}% - \edef\next{\noexpand\normal@begin{#1}\the\toks@}% - \next}% - }% END OF LOWERCASE -\endgroup -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `xcomment.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm b/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm deleted file mode 100644 index 33df37d9b1c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE rdf:RDF SYSTEM "../../support/tpm.dtd"> -<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#" xmlns:TPM="http://texlive.dante.de/"> - <rdf:Description about="http://texlive.dante.de/texlive/Package/seminar.zip"> - <TPM:Name>seminar</TPM:Name> - <TPM:Type>Package</TPM:Type> - <TPM:Date>2006/01/21 00:25:32</TPM:Date> - <TPM:Version></TPM:Version> - <TPM:Creator>rahtz</TPM:Creator> - <TPM:Title>Overhead slides.</TPM:Title> - <TPM:Description> -A class that produces overhead slides (transparencies), with many -facilities. -Seminar is also the basis of other packages, such as -prosper. -[description copied from TeX Catalogue] - </TPM:Description> - <TPM:Author>Timothy Van Zandt</TPM:Author> - <TPM:Size>629809</TPM:Size> - <TPM:License></TPM:License> - <TPM:Build/> - <TPM:RunFiles size="175161"> -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2 -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty -texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty -texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm - </TPM:RunFiles> - <TPM:DocFiles size="454648"> -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty -texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty - </TPM:DocFiles> - <TPM:Provides>Package/seminar</TPM:Provides> - </rdf:Description> -</rdf:RDF> - |